Nortel Networks Webcam N0060600 User Manual
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
BCM  
Business Communications Manager  
Document Status: Standard  
Document Version: 01.1  
Part Number: N0060600  
Date: December 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Task List  
Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
To copy telephone configurations..................................................................................69  
To change telephone DNs.............................................................................................70  
DMC Feature List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
To arrange the DMC Feature list using Element Manager............................................90  
Setting up central answering positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
To create CAP stations..................................................................................................93  
To program module buttons ..........................................................................................93  
Monitoring Hunt Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
To use a silent monitor ................................................................................................107  
Configuring Hospitality services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
To set up hospitality service ........................................................................................112  
To set up call restrictions.............................................................................................113  
To set up wake-up services.........................................................................................113  
To assign a room to a telephone.................................................................................113  
To delete a room assignment from a telephone..........................................................114  
Configuring analog telephones and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
To assign a pause for external dialing.........................................................................118  
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
To assign a line to a telephone....................................................................................121  
To add line assignments..............................................................................................124  
To configure capabilities and preferences...................................................................125  
To configure telephone capabilities.............................................................................127  
To configure preferences for a telephone....................................................................129  
To program telephone buttons ....................................................................................131  
To program user speed dials.......................................................................................132  
To program outgoing call restrictions ..........................................................................132  
To set restrictions ........................................................................................................133  
To set line/set restrictions............................................................................................133  
Global VoIP features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
To use the Services button to access features............................................................141  
To define a key label ...................................................................................................142  
To set up a password and allow Hot desking..............................................................144  
To reset the Hot Desking password field for a specific IP telephone ..........................145  
To use the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration......................145  
To cancel Hot desking.................................................................................................146  
To configure a new time zone on a remote IP telephone............................................146  
To force a firmware download to a Nortel IP telephone ..............................................147  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Task List  
Default memory button programming for telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
To enable Bluetooth® on an IP Phone 1140E.............................................................168  
Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio . . . . . . . . . . 179  
To label a button..........................................................................................................186  
Telephony features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
To move line buttons ...................................................................................................189  
Feature configuration: Answering calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
To configure handsfree and handsfree answerback ...................................................194  
To add a telephone to a pickup group.........................................................................195  
To allow trunk answer..................................................................................................195  
To block user access...................................................................................................195  
To assign an Answer DN.............................................................................................196  
To program a telephone for DND on Busy ..................................................................198  
To program privacy on a line.......................................................................................199  
To automatically enable privacy on a line....................................................................199  
To set intrusion controls ..............................................................................................200  
To program full autohold on a line...............................................................................201  
To program auto hold on a telephone .........................................................................201  
To program Exclusive Hold .........................................................................................201  
To use the transfer feature ..........................................................................................202  
To transfer unanswered calls ......................................................................................203  
To redirect lines from the system ................................................................................203  
To allow redirect ..........................................................................................................203  
To set a redirect tone...................................................................................................204  
To redirect lines at the telephone ................................................................................204  
To program call forward on the system .......................................................................204  
To use Call Forward at the telephone .........................................................................205  
To block user access...................................................................................................205  
To use Camp-on..........................................................................................................206  
To park a call...............................................................................................................206  
To retrieve a parked call..............................................................................................207  
To configure the SWCA system controls.....................................................................207  
To allow call display.....................................................................................................209  
To reset call log space.................................................................................................210  
Feature configuration: Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
To block user access to feature programming ............................................................213  
To allow a telephone to make priority calls..................................................................214  
To configure system settings for page.........................................................................216  
To configure telephone settings for page ....................................................................216  
To make a page announcement..................................................................................217  
To make a voice announcement .................................................................................217  
To set up a 3-party conference call .............................................................................218  
To set up an Ad-hoc multiparty conference call ..........................................................218  
To allow last number redial..........................................................................................221  
To program speed dials in the DN record....................................................................222  
To program user speed dials at the telephone............................................................222  
To view the feature that is currently assigned to a button ...........................................223  
To configure memory buttons for features...................................................................223  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Task List  
5
To erase a memory button ..........................................................................................223  
To store more than one number or code on one button..............................................223  
About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
To add SWCA keys to your telephone ........................................................................250  
To receive a call and assign it to a SWCA key............................................................250  
To retrieve a call from a SWCA key ............................................................................252  
To conference a call parked on a SWCA key..............................................................253  
Configuring the music source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
To select the music source..........................................................................................282  
To open the Music Manager Administration application..............................................285  
To load music onto the BCM .......................................................................................286  
To delete an audio file from BCM................................................................................287  
To add a sound file to the Play List .............................................................................287  
To remove a sound file from the Play List ...................................................................287  
To access the BcmAmp Player ...................................................................................289  
To configure a Network Device to be the IP Music source..........................................290  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Task List  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Contents  
Chapter 1  
Getting started with BCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
About BCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
BCM key hardware elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Symbols and conventions used in this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
How to get Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Getting Help from the Nortel Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Chapter 2  
Welcome panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Chapter 3  
System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Setting clock control to local system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Chapter 4  
System schedule settings and services scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Configuring schedule names and timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Default time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Configuring scheduled service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Chapter 5  
System features and feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
BCM feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Button programming features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Chapter 6  
DN records parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Main panel tabs: common fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Line Access tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Line Access - Properties tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Contents  
Line Access - Line Assignment tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Line Access - Line Pool Access tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Line Access - Answer DNs tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Capabilities and Preferences main tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Capabilities and Preferences - Properties tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Capabilities and Preferences - SWCA Call Group tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Capabilities and Preferences - ATA Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Restrictions main tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Restrictions - Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Chapter 7  
Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Copying settings to other DNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Renumbering DNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Chapter 8  
Global telephony settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Feature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Feature Settings panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Answer DN answer key levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Advanced Feature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
System Wide Call Appearances Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
ONN Blocking (North American systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Reset logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Chapter 9  
Telephony system and device programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Chapter 10  
Configuring system speed dial numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
System Speed Dial panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Chapter 11  
DMC Feature List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Arranging the DMC Feature list using Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Chapter 12  
Setting up central answering positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Programming CAP/KIM buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Managing lines on a KIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Chapter 13  
Creating ring groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Ring Groups - Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Ring Groups - Line Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Chapter 14  
Configuring Hunt Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Hunt Groups system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Configuring the Hunt Group general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Hunt Group members and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Chapter 15  
Monitoring Hunt Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Monitoring external hunt group calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Chapter 16  
Configuring Hospitality services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Hospitality - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Hospitality - Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Setting up your hospitality system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Chapter 17  
Configuring analog telephones and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Configuring an analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Chapter 18  
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Using the DN panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
System DNs - Line Access tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Job aid: Notes about assigning lines to telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Line Assignment and Line Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Job aid: Answer DN notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Configuring Capabilities and Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Job aid: Assigning intercom (I/C) buttons (keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Contents  
Configuring telephone capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Job aid: Line redirection notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Configuring Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Job aid: Call log notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Telephone memory button programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Job aid: Notes about button programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
User speed dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Outgoing call restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Chapter 19  
Configuring telephones: IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Configuring an IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
PVQM - Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Chapter 20  
Global VoIP features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
IP feature list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
IP telephone feature display labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Hot desking IP telephone configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Using the Hot desking feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Chapter 21  
Default memory button programming for telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Rules of default button assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
7316E digital phone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
7316 digital phone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
7208 digital phone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
7100 digital phone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
7000 digital phone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
7406 digital phone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
IP telephone button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
IP telephone 2007 button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
WLAN handset 2210/2211/2212 button defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
WLAN handset display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Information area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Feature options area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
DMC Portables (413X/414X) (Europe only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
11  
Chapter 22  
Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro — Administrator Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Desktop Assistant Pro — Administrator Edition main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Menu bar commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Button programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Button labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Chapter 23  
Telephony features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Features to set up telephone set features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Moving line buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Receiver volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Programming distinctive ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Ring volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Auxiliary ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Chapter 24  
Feature configuration: Answering calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Answering calls directed to your telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Answering calls not directed to your telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Directed Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Answer DNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Configuring privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
DND on Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Turn Privacy on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Intrusion controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Holding calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Using Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Hold automatically (autohold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Hold a call exclusively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Parking or transferring calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Transfer (answered) calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Transfer (unanswered) calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Line redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Call forward (unanswered) calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Call Forward and voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Camp-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Contents  
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Call information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Call display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Call duration timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Time and date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Malicious Caller ID (MCID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Call log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
LogIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Chapter 25  
Feature configuration: Making calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Blocking user access to feature programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Protecting outgoing call privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Managing a busy signal on an internal call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
Priority Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
Ring Again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
Other ways of communicating with internal users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
Leaving a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Making announcements to individuals (Voice Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Create a conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Dialing shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Saved Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Autodial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Speed dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Programming memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Chapter 26  
Using telephones for special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Special feature telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Hospitality services telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Setting up a central answering position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Prime line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Direct dial telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Creating an enhanced CAP station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Hunt groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Ringing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
13  
Chapter 27  
Display prompts and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Common display prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Viewing active services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Call log prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Report and record alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Chapter 28  
About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Managing calls using SWCA keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
Other features that affect how you use SWCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Chapter 29  
Market profile attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Media bay module availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
FEM MBM–Norstar trunk cartridge combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
Time zones and language information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Time and date format based on language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Language support for South America and Central America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
Caller ID display formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
Core parameters for market profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
Global analog trunk parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272  
GASM8 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275  
ISDN line services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
Analog and digital trunk types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279  
Chapter 30  
Configuring the music source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Selecting the music source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282  
Configuring Music Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Opening the Music Manager Administration application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
Loading music onto the BCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286  
Deleting music from BCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287  
Adding music to the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287  
Removing music from the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287  
Using the BcmAmp Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289  
Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 Contents  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Chapter 1  
Getting started with BCM  
Refer to the following topics for general BCM information:  
•
•
•
•
“About BCM”  
“Symbols and conventions used in this guide” on page 18  
“Related publications” on page 19  
“How to get Help” on page 21  
About this guide  
The BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide describes how to configure and assign features to  
telephony devices through Telset and through Element Manager.  
Purpose  
The concepts, operations, and tasks described in this guide relate to the BCM software. This guide  
provides task-based information about how to assign features and provide basic programming for  
the Business Communications Manager.  
Use Element Manager, Startup Profile, and Telset Administration to configure various BCM  
parameters.  
In brief, the information in this guide explains:  
•
•
•
global telephony settings  
steps to configure DNs  
product features and how to assign them  
Audience  
The BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide is directed to installers who install, configure, and  
maintain BCM systems.  
To use this guide, you must:  
•
•
•
be an authorized BCM installer or administrator within your organization  
know basic Nortel BCM terminology  
be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
16 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM  
Acronyms  
The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide.  
Table 1 Acronyms  
Acronym  
Description  
ASM  
ATA  
Analog station module  
analog terminal adapter  
BRI  
Basic Rate Interface  
BCM  
CAP  
CC  
Business Communications Manager  
Central Answering Position  
Contact Center  
CLID  
CoS  
Calling Line Identification  
Class of Service  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
KIM  
Digital Private Network Signaling System  
Integrated Services Digital Network  
Key Indicator Module  
MCDN  
MCID  
MWI  
OLI  
Meridian Customer Defined Networking  
malicious call identification  
message wait indicator  
outgoing line identification  
outgoing name and number  
proactive voice quality monitoring  
silent monitor  
ONN  
PVQM  
SM  
SWCA  
system-wide call appearance  
Organization  
This guide is organized for easy access to information that explains the concepts, operations, and  
procedures associated with the BCM system.  
About BCM  
The BCM system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and  
medium-sized businesses.  
The BCM system:  
•
integrates voice and data capabilities, VoIP gateway functions, and QoS data-routing features  
into a single telephony system  
•
enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 17  
BCM key hardware elements  
BCM includes the following key elements:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
BCM200 main unit  
BCM400 main unit  
BCM1000 main unit  
BCM expansion unit (compatible with BCM400 main unit)  
BCM400 expansion gateway  
BCM media bay modules (MBM):  
— 4x16  
— ASM8, ASM8+  
— BRIM  
— CTM4, CTM8  
— DDIM  
— DSM16+, DSM32+  
— DTM  
— FEM  
— GASM  
— GATM4, GATM8  
BCM features  
BCM supports the complete range of IP telephony features offered by existing BCM products:  
Note: You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes (no  
additional hardware is required).  
•
•
VoIP Gateway: Up to 12 VoIP trunks  
VoIP Telephony Clients: Up to 64 VoIP Telephony clients, supporting the range of Nortel  
IP Phones.  
BCM applications  
BCM supports many applications provided on the existing BCM platforms.  
Note: You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes (no  
additional hardware is required).  
•
•
Voice Messaging for standard voice mail and auto-attendant features  
Unified Messaging providing integrated voice mail management between voice mail and  
common e-mail applications  
•
Fax Suite providing support for attached analog fax devices  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice Networking features  
LAN CTE (computer telephony engine)  
VEWAN (Voice Enabled WAN)  
IVR (Integrated Voice Response)  
IP Music  
Intelligent Contact Center  
Symbols and conventions used in this guide  
These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCM system:  
Caution: Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment.  
Danger: Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock.  
Warning: Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work  
improperly.  
Note: Alerts you to important information.  
Tip: Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task.  
Security Note: Indicates a point of system security where a default should be  
changed, or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of  
!
security required for the system.  
Warning: Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap  
before performing the maintenance procedure.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 19  
Warning: Alerts you to remove the BCM main unit and expansion unit power  
cords from the ac outlet before performing any maintenance procedure.  
The following conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display  
and dialpad.  
Convention  
Example  
Used for  
Word in a special font (shown in  
the top line of the display)  
Command line prompts on display telephones.  
Pswd:  
Underlined word in capital letters  
(shown in the bottom line of a  
two-line display telephone)  
Display option. Available on two line display  
telephones. Press the button directly below the  
option on the display to proceed.  
PLAY  
Dialpad buttons  
Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a  
particular option.  
£
The following text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described:  
Convention  
Description  
bold Courier  
text  
Indicates command names and options and text that you must enter.  
Example: Use the infocommand.  
Example: Enter show ip{alerts|routes}.  
italic text  
Indicates book titles.  
plain Courier  
text  
Indicates command syntax and system output (for example, prompts  
and system messages).  
Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters  
FEATURE  
HOLD  
RELEASE  
Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on  
whichever set you are using.  
Related publications  
This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide. There are two types  
of publications: Technical Documents on page 19 and User Guides on page 20.  
Technical Documents  
BCM 4.0 System Overview (N0060607)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
20 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM  
System Installation  
BCM 4.0 for BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide Addendum (N0060603)  
BCM200/400 BCM 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide (N0060612)  
Keycode Installation Guide (N0060625)  
System Programming  
BCM 4.0 Administration Guide (N0060598)  
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
BCM 4.0 Telset Administration Guide (N0060610)  
Telephones and Peripherals  
BCM 4.0 Telephony Device Installation Guide (N0060609)  
BST Doorphone Installation and Configuration Guide (P1013654)  
T24 KIM Installation Card (P0603481)  
IP Key Expansion Module (KEM) User Guide  
Digital Mobility  
DECT Deployment and Demonstration Tool  
Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide (N0000623)  
T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide (P0606142)  
IP Telephony  
i2050 Software Phone Installation Guide (N0022555)  
IP Phone 1120E User Guide (NN-10300-062)  
IP Phone 1140E User Guide (NN-10300-064)  
IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide (N0060623)  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide (N0060634)  
User Guides  
Telephones and Peripherals  
BCM 4.0 Telephone Features User Guide (N0060608)  
BST Doorphone User Guide (P0605668)  
Central Answering Position (CAP) User Guide (P0603480)  
Hospitality Features Card (N0027326)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 21  
System-wide Call Appearance (SWCA) Features Card (N0027186)  
T7000 Telephone User Card (P0912061)  
T7100 Telephone User Card (P0609621)  
T7208 Telephone User Card (P0609622)  
T7316 Telephone User Card (P0935248)  
T7316E Telephone User Card (P0609623)  
Digital Mobility  
DECT 413X/414X Handset User Guide (N0028550)  
Digital Mobility Phone 7420 User Guide (N0000635)  
Digital Mobility Phone 7430/7440 User Guide (N0028550)  
T7406 Cordless Telephone User Card (P0942259)  
IP Telephony  
IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide (N0060623)  
IP Phone 2001 User Guide (N0027313)  
IP Phone 2002 User Guide (N0027300)  
IP Phone 2004 User Guide (N0027284)  
IP Phone 2007 User Guide (N0064498)  
BCM WLAN 2210/2211/2212 Handset User Guide (N0009103)  
How to get Help  
This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.  
Getting Help from the Nortel Web site  
The best source of support for Nortel products is the Nortel Support Web site:  
http://www.nortel.com/support  
This site enables customers to:  
•
•
•
•
•
download software and related tools  
download technical documents, release notes, and product bulletins  
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation  
search the Support Web site and Nortel Knowledge Base  
open and manage technical support cases  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
22 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM  
Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center  
If you have a Nortel support contract and cannot find the information you require on the  
Nortel Support Web site, you can get help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.  
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).  
Outside North America, go to the Web site below and look up the telephone number that applies  
in your region:  
http://www.nortel.com/callus  
When you speak to the telephone agent, you can reference an Express Routing Code (ERC) to  
more quickly route your call to the appropriate support specialist. To locate the ERC for your  
product or service, go to:  
http://www.nortel.com/erc  
Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller  
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized  
reseller, you can contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
23  
Chapter 2  
Welcome panel  
The Welcome panel displays information for the current account logged on the system. The  
administrator is prompted to change the password before any programming menus are accessible.  
This panel will be displayed on the first login to the BCM by nnadmin, when the administrator has  
selected the forced password change option on an account, or if the password has expired. See  
Figure 1.  
Figure 1 Initial welcome panel  
Table 2 Initial Welcome panel fields  
Attribute  
User ID  
Value  
Description  
<read-only>  
<alphanumeric>  
User ID you used to log on to the system.  
Password  
To change password, select the field and enter new  
password. The password must satisfy the password  
policy requirements for the system. See the BCM 4.0  
Administration Guide (N0060598) for more  
information on password requirements.  
Once the password has been changed the entire navigation tree is accessible. See Figure 2.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
24 Chapter 2 Welcome panel  
Figure 2 Welcome panel  
Table 3 Welcome panel fields  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Current Account  
Account Notifications <read-only>  
Displays BCM administrative messages or notifications  
regarding the current user.  
User ID  
<read-only>  
<read-only>  
User ID you used to log on to the system.  
Telset User ID  
User ID used to logon to the telset configuration interfaces for  
telephony and CallPilot applications.  
Last successful login <read-only>  
Date and time that this user account was last logged in the  
system.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Chapter 3  
System Software  
The system software identity.  
The following path indicates where to access the system identification settings in Element  
Manager:  
•
Element Manager: System > Identification  
Figure 3 System Identification panel  
Table 1 describes each field on this panel.  
Table 1 System Identification fields  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Model  
<read-only>  
This is the system hardware release currently running on this  
device.  
System name  
<alphanumeric>  
It is easier to manage a group of systems if each system is  
provided with a unique name or identification number.  
Version  
<read-only>  
<read-only>  
The version of software running on the BCM Main Unit.  
Country or region  
This setting defines internal system settings for default values,  
available languages, and hardware and functional availability  
for a specific country or region.  
Setting Date and Time  
How you set the Date and Time feature for your system depends on whether your system receives  
this information from a network server.  
The following path indicates where to access the date and time settings in Element Manager:  
•
Element Manager: Configuration > System > Date and Time  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
26 Chapter 3 System Software  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panel  
Task  
“Setting clock control to local system” on page 28  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Date and Time management.  
Figure 4 Date and time panel  
Table 2 describes each field on the Date and Time panel.  
Table 2 Date and Time panel fields (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Date and Time Source  
NTP  
Set to NTP (Network Time Protocol) if the system uses a  
network server to determine the correct time and date.  
Trunk  
Manual  
Set to Trunk to use time and date settings from a CO through  
an analog or ISDN line.  
Set to Manual if you want to be able to manually configure the  
time and date for your system.  
Network Time Protocol Settings  
(Settings are active only if Clock Control Type is set to Network Time Protocol.)  
NTP server address  
<IP address>  
The IP address of the server that controls the network time and  
date.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 System Software 27  
Table 2 Date and Time panel fields (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Synch every (s)  
NA (not applicable)  
1-XXXX  
The number of seconds specified to elapse between contacts  
with the NTP server.  
NA: Appears if you chose Manually in the Synch with Server  
field.  
1-XXXX: Number of seconds between contacts with the NTP  
server.  
NTP security mode  
Secured  
Select whether the NTP security mode is secured or  
unsecured.  
Unsecured  
Raise Alarm if Clock differs <seconds>  
by at least (s)  
The number of discrepancy seconds specified that must occur  
before the system notifies you of a time difference from the  
NTP server, if the system automatically checks with the NTP  
server.  
NTP key ID  
<1-65,534>  
ID for accessing the NTP.  
NTP key string  
<8 characters>  
Control key corresponding to ID for accessing the NTP.  
Current Date and Time  
Date and time  
<country/  
region-specific date  
and time format>  
The current date and time.  
Year  
<numeric>  
The current year in yyyy format.  
Time zone  
<drop-down list>  
The appropriate time zone for the location of this system. The  
Time zone must be set for software updates to be applied.  
Daylight Savings Time  
<read-only>  
The appropriate mode for the Time zone.  
Selected: The system automatically updates the time twice a  
year.  
Cleared: The system never updates the time for Daylight  
Savings Time.  
Note: North American Daylight Savings Time rules change in 2007.  
Four time zones have been added to support regions that do not want to  
switch to the new time zone rules. The time zones are identified  
“pre-2007 DST”.  
If the system is to synchronize with an NTP Server or trunk, check the following:  
1
2
3
Set Date and Time Source to NTP or Trunk.  
In the NTP server address field enter the IP address of the NTP server.  
Set the number of seconds between synchronizations in normal operations (Synch Every).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 Chapter 3 System Software  
4
5
In the bottom frame, ensure that the Time zone is correct for the location of the local system.  
If Trunk was selected in the Date and Time Source drop-down list, enter the year in the Year  
field.  
Note: Only time and date info are updated when NTP and Trunk  
settings are selected. Year information is not updated. You also have full  
control over time and date settings using telset admin even if NTP or  
Trunk are selected. Any setting applied through telset admin are  
over-written by the external source if NTP or Trunk are selected. Time  
zones need to be set for software updates to be applied.  
Setting clock control to local system  
If you want the clock to be controlled locally:  
1
2
Ensure that Clock Control Type is set to local.  
In the bottom frame:  
•
•
•
•
In the Time Zone field, select the Time zone the system uses.  
In the Date field, enter the month, day and year.  
In the Time field, enter the hours and minutes and time of day.  
In the Daylight Savings Time field, choose whether the system updates the time twice a  
year for daylight savings time.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
29  
Chapter 4  
System schedule settings and services scheduling  
Use scheduled services to control how calls are answered in off-hours (Ringing Groups), how calls  
are routed at various times of the day, and how restrictions are applied on lines and telephones at  
specific times of the day.  
The following paths indicate where to access scheduled services in Element Manager and through  
Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Scheduled Services  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Services  
The Scheduled Services - Settings and Schedules panel has three distinct areas for configuration.  
•
•
•
The table in the top frame allows you to determine which schedules are active for the system  
for routing, restriction, and ringing schedules.  
The table in the top frame to the right sets the time periods within each schedule for each day  
of the week.  
The table in the bottom frame allows you to rename schedules.  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panels  
Related panels or tasks  
Feature  
“Configuring scheduled service”  
on page 31  
Alternate routes for routing  
schedules in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606)  
“Control telephone” on page 225  
“Configuring schedule names and “Ring Groups - Line Settings tab”  
timers” on page 30  
on page 97  
Restriction filters in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606)  
“Restrictions (Line and Remote) in  
the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Restrictions main tab” on page 65  
Class of Service table in the  
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration  
Guide (N0060606)  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management.  
Schedules are activated and deactivated through control telephones. Refer to “Control telephone”  
on page 225.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
30 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling  
Restriction and Routing services require a service control password before users are allowed to  
change scheduling on a control telephone. The Service Control Password field on this panel allows  
you to delete a current entry, and add a new password. Make a note of the password; the panel  
displays only asterisks.  
Configuring schedule names and timers  
The tables on this panel allow you to change the names of the schedules, and to determine when  
the schedules, which are set to automatically execute, are deployed. Any changes to these settings  
affect all services that use schedules.  
Figure 5 Schedule names and timers  
Table 3 describes the fields on the subpanel tables.  
Table 3 Schedule common settings  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Schedules  
Schedule  
<alphanumeric>  
Double-click the field, and enter a descriptive name for the schedule.  
Schedule Times  
For each schedule, there are timers for the seven days of the week.  
Day  
<seven days>  
Start Time  
00:00 to 12:00  
a.m.-p.m./24:00  
This is the time when the schedule starts, and any previously-running schedules  
stop.  
Use a 12-hour or 24-hour format. If the entry is less than 12:00, the system  
prompts for a day period setting.  
00:00 = schedule is off  
start and stop are the same = schedule runs for 24 hours  
start: 22:00/stop: 06:00 = schedule starts at midnight, runs until 6 a.m., then  
starts again at 10 p.m. (22:00).  
Stop Time  
00:00 to 12:00  
a.m.-p.m./24:00  
This is the time when the schedule stops.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling 31  
Default time settings  
Table 4 provides a list of the default times for each schedule.  
Table 4 Default schedule times  
Schedule  
Start Time Stop Time  
Schedule  
Start Time Stop Time  
Schedule 1: Night  
Schedule 2: Evening  
Schedule 3: Lunch  
23:00  
17:00  
12:00  
07:00  
23:00  
13:00  
Schedule 4:  
Schedule 5:  
Schedule 6:  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
Configuring scheduled service  
The table in the top frame lists all schedules available on the system. Configure the settings for the  
schedules that you are using for your system.  
Figure 6 Services table  
Table 5 describes the fields under Scheduled Services.  
Table 5 Service settings (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Service control <alphanumeric> Restriction and Routing schedules require the user to enter a password on the  
password  
control telephone before scheduling can be changed.  
If you forget the password, enter a new password.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
32 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling  
Table 5 Service settings (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Schedule  
<read-only>  
These are the schedules that are available on the system.  
Routing Svc  
Off  
Off prevents the service from being activated.  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control  
telephone. This setting overrides any automatically-running schedules.  
Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the  
Common Settings heading. These times are then automatically executed when  
the service is active.  
Default: Off  
Overflow  
<check box>  
If all the lines used by a route are busy when a call is made, you can program  
Routing service to overflow to the route used for normal mode. If the call is  
routed to use the normal mode, the telephone sounds a warning tone and  
displays the message Expensive route. The caller then can release the  
call to avoid the toll charges or can continue.  
Tips: A schedule must be active for overflow routing to be in effect. Overflow  
routing is not available in normal mode.  
You must create an overflow route to be used with each routing code. In this  
way, every route used with a scheduled mode that has overflow service must  
have an alternate route in normal service.  
Default: Cleared  
Ringing Svc  
Off  
Off prevents the service from being activated.  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control  
telephone. This setting overrides any automatically-running schedules.  
Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the  
Common Settings heading. These times are then executed automatically when  
the service is active.  
Default: Off  
For details about setting up ring groups, refer to “Creating ring groups” on  
page 95.  
Trunk Answer  
<check box>  
Trunk answer enables you to answer, from any telephone, an external call that  
is ringing at another telephone in your office, if the Ringing Service is active on  
that line at the time of the call. If the service is not active, you cannot answer the  
call.  
Trunk answer is useful if the other telephones are not assigned the same lines  
as the telephone you are using to answer the call.  
Note: You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if Ringing service is set to  
Manual or Auto.  
Default: Selected  
Extra Dial Set None  
DN <XX>  
DN <control set>  
The Extra dial set attribute allows you to assign an additional telephone to  
receive calls for each schedule.  
Note: The extra dial set is activated during a schedule by entering the Ringing  
service feature code from the assigned direct dial telephone. This does not  
activate the Ringing service, unless the direct dial telephone is also a control  
set.  
Restriction Svc Off  
Off prevents the service from being activated.  
Manual  
Auto  
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control  
telephone. This setting overrides any automatically-running schedules.  
Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the  
Common Settings heading. These times are then executed automatically when  
the service is active.  
Default: Off  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
33  
Chapter 5  
System features and feature codes  
•
•
“BCM feature codes” on page 33 provides a complete list of the feature codes that can be  
accessed from digital and IP telephones.  
“Button programming features” on page 36 provides a list of the features that are  
programmable under the DN record Button Programming heading.  
BCM feature codes  
The following provides a quick reference for BCM features available by pressing the FEATURE  
button on M-series telephones, Business Series Terminals (BST series), and IP telephones. Table 6  
provides feature names sorted alphabetically, and numerically by feature code.  
Refer to the user documentation for the specific product to find out how to use the codes on each  
type of telephone.  
Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Sorted by feature name  
Sorted by activation code  
FEATURE  
FEATURE  
Feature name  
<code>  
<code>  
Feature name  
Alarm time (room set)  
Alarm time - Cancel  
Alarm time (HS admin set)  
Autodial - External  
875  
#875  
877  
*1  
0
Speed Dial - Activate  
Button inquiry  
*0  
1
Messages - Send  
#1  
*1  
Messages - Cancel Send  
Autodial - External  
Autodial - Internal  
*2  
Auto Hold  
73  
2
Ring Again  
Auto Hold - Cancel  
#73  
86  
#2  
*2  
Ring Again - Cancel  
Autodial - Internal  
Background Music  
Background Music - Cancel  
Button inquiry  
#86  
*0  
3
Conference Call  
*3  
Memory buttons - Program  
Call Forward  
Contact Center agent login/log out  
Contact Center agent make busy/ready  
Contact Center queue status  
Call Charge Indication  
Call Duration Timer  
904  
908  
909  
818  
77  
4
#4  
*4  
Call Forward - Cancel  
Speed Dial - Add, change  
Last Number Redial  
Language - Primary  
Language - Alternate  
Language - Alternate 2  
Language - Alternate 3  
Time zone readjust (IP telephones)  
5
*501  
*502  
*503  
*504  
*510  
Call Forward  
4
Call Forward - Cancel  
Call Forward to Voice Mail  
Call Information  
#4  
984  
811  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
34 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes  
Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Sorted by feature name  
Sorted by activation code  
FEATURE  
FEATURE  
Feature name  
<code>  
<code>  
Feature name  
Call Log - Delete items (autobumping)  
Call Log - Manual  
Call Log - View information  
Call Log options  
815  
813  
812  
*84  
*85  
74  
System Wide Call Appearance  
(SWCA)  
*521 to *536  
*537  
*538  
*550  
*6  
Find oldest SWCA  
Find newest SWCA  
Silent Monitor  
Call Log password  
Call Park  
Ring Type  
Call Queuing  
801  
82  
60  
Page  
Camp-on  
61  
Page - Internal (telephone speakers)  
Page - External (external speakers)  
Class of Service  
68  
62  
Page - Combined (internal and  
external)  
Conference Call  
3
63  
Contrast adjustment  
Dialing Mode  
*7  
64  
Line Pool  
*82  
76  
65  
Messages - View  
Voice Call  
Directed Pickup  
66  
Display Voice Mail DN, skillset or IVR DN  
Do not Disturb  
985  
85  
67  
Saved Number Redial  
Class of Service  
Priority Call  
68  
Do not Disturb - Cancel  
Exclusive Hold  
#85  
79  
69  
*7  
Contrast adjustment  
Transfer  
Voice Mail Leave Message  
Group Listening  
980  
802  
#802  
75  
70  
#70  
71  
Transfer - Cancel  
Link  
Group Listening - Cancel  
Group Pickup  
73  
Auto Hold  
IP Services list  
*900  
*999  
*501  
*502  
*503  
*504  
5
#73  
74  
Auto Hold - Cancel  
Call Park  
IP Hot desking  
Language - Primary  
Language - Alternate  
Language - Alternate 2  
Language - Alternate 3  
Last Number Redial  
Line buttons - Move  
Line Pool  
75  
Group Pickup  
Directed Pickup  
Call Duration Timer  
Pause  
76  
77  
78  
79  
Exclusive Hold  
Ring Volume  
*81  
64  
*80  
*81  
82  
Line buttons - Move  
Camp-on  
Line Redirection  
84  
Line Redirection - Cancel  
Link  
#84  
71  
*82  
83  
Dialing Mode  
Privacy (on/off)  
Line Redirection  
Line Redirection - Cancel  
Call Log options  
Do not Disturb  
Long tones  
808  
897  
*3  
84  
Malicious call identification (MCID)  
Memory buttons - Program  
Messages - Send  
#84  
*84  
85  
1
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                     
Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 35  
Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Sorted by feature name  
Sorted by activation code  
FEATURE  
FEATURE  
Feature name  
<code>  
<code>  
Feature name  
Messages - Cancel Send  
Messages - View  
#1  
#85  
Do not Disturb - Cancel  
Call Log password  
Background Music  
Background Music - Cancel  
Voice Call Deny  
65  
*85  
Name and number blocking  
Name and number blocking - Cancel  
Page  
819  
#819  
60  
86  
#86  
88  
Page - Combined (internal and external)  
Page - External (external speakers)  
Page - Internal (telephone speakers)  
Pause  
63  
#88  
800  
801  
802  
#802  
803  
804  
805  
806  
#806  
807  
808  
811  
812  
813  
Cancel Voice Call Deny  
Trunk Answer  
62  
61  
Call Queuing  
78  
Group Listening  
Priority Call  
69  
Group Listening - Cancel  
Time  
Privacy (on/off)  
83  
Record call  
989  
2
Wait for dial tone  
Test telephone display  
Static Time  
Ring Again  
Ring Again - Cancel  
Ring Type  
#2  
*6  
Static Time - Cancel  
Ringing (Signal) Call  
Long tones  
Ring Volume  
*80  
807  
876  
878  
879  
Ringing (Signal) Call  
Room condition (Room set)  
Room condition (HS admin set)  
Room occupancy  
Call Information  
Call Log - View information  
Call Log - Manual  
Call Log - Delete items  
(autobumping)  
Run/Stop  
*9  
815  
Saved Number Redial  
Silent Monitor  
67  
818  
Call Charge Indication  
Name and number blocking  
Name and number blocking - Cancel  
View active services  
*550  
*4  
819  
Speed Dial - Add, change  
Speed Dial - Activate  
Static Time  
#819  
870  
0
806  
#806  
871  
Turn Ringing service on  
Turn Ringing service off  
Turn Restriction service on  
Turn Restriction service off  
Turn Routing service on1  
Turn Routing service off  
Alarm time  
Static Time - Cancel  
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA)  
#871  
872  
*521 to  
*536  
#872  
873  
Find available SWCA  
Find oldest SWCA  
Find newest SWCA  
Test telephone display  
Time  
*520  
*537  
*538  
805  
803  
*510  
70  
#873  
875  
#875  
876  
Alarm time - Cancel  
Room condition (Room set)  
Alarm time (HS admin)  
Room condition (HS admin)  
Room occupancy  
Time zone adjust (IP telephones)  
Transfer  
877  
878  
Transfer - Cancel  
#70  
879  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
36 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes  
Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Sorted by feature name  
Sorted by activation code  
FEATURE  
FEATURE  
Feature name  
<code>  
<code>  
Feature name  
Transfer to mailbox  
986  
897  
Malicious call identification (MCID)  
Run/Stop  
Trunk Answer  
800  
*9  
Turn Restriction service off  
Turn Restriction service on  
Turn Ringing service off  
#872  
872  
*900  
904  
908  
IP Services list  
Contact Center agent login/log out  
#871  
Contact Center agent make busy/  
ready  
Turn Ringing service on  
Turn Routing service off  
Turn Routing service on1  
View active services  
Voice Call  
871  
#873  
873  
870  
66  
909  
980  
981  
982  
984  
985  
Contact Center queue status  
Voice Mail Leave Message  
Voice Mail login  
Voice Mail Operator settings  
Call Forward to Voice Mail  
Voice Call Deny  
88  
Display Voice Mail DN, skillset, or  
IVR DN  
Voice Call Deny - Cancel  
Voice Mail direct  
#88  
988  
987  
981  
982  
804  
986  
987  
988  
989  
*999  
Transfer to mailbox  
Voice Mail Interrupt  
Voice Mail direct  
Record call  
Voice Mail Interrupt  
Voice Mail login  
Voice Mail Operator settings  
Wait for dial tone  
IP Hot desking  
Note  
1Contact your System Administrator for the service control password.  
Button programming features  
The following describes the features available for Button Programming (Configuration >  
Telephony > Sets > All DNs > Capabilities and Preferences > Button Programming).  
Note that some of these features require other system settings in order to work.  
•
Some of the buttons are controlled by features under Configuration > Telephony > Sets >  
Active Sets > Capabilities. Paging is an example of a feature that requires other settings.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 37  
•
Some features also require that the service be available on the line from your telephone service  
provider. The types of lines provided are also determined by the region chosen for your  
system. MCID (malicious call identification) is an example of this type of feature.  
Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Set command  
(FEATURE  
Feature  
Description  
<code>)  
None  
Indicates a button that is configured for button programming, but nothing  
has been entered.  
0
Speed dial  
Activates the speed dial feature. The telephone prompts the user for a  
speed dial code.  
1
Send message  
Allows the user to send a message to another DN on the system.  
#1  
Cancel send message  
Allows the user to cancel a message that was sent to another set within  
the network.  
2
3
4
Ring again  
Turns on the Ring again feature.  
Conference/Transfer  
Call forward  
Initiates a conference between user and two parties.  
Allows the user to enter a number to forward all calls.  
Note: Allow redirect must be selected to forward calls outside of the  
system.  
5
Last number redial  
Language choice  
Page - general  
Causes set to redial the last number that was dialed.  
Allows the user to select the language in which prompts are displayed.  
Initiates a page.  
*5  
60  
61  
Page - Internal  
Allows the user to page internal to a specific zone, which is identified  
within the Button programming. (For example F611 internal zone 1, F610  
page internal all zones.)  
62  
63  
Page - External  
Allows the user to page through the speaker on a specific telephone.  
Page - speaker and zone Allows the user to page through both the internal sets, and externally  
connected paging equipment to a specific zone, which is identified within  
Button programming.  
64  
65  
Line pool  
Allows the user to access a line pool. The pool this button accesses is  
specified during Button Programming for this feature.  
Reply message  
Allows the user to access messages, and send a reply to the message  
sender.  
#65  
66  
Cancel message waiting Allows the user to cancel the message waiting indicator.  
Voice call  
Allows the user to make an announcement, or begin a call through the  
speaker of another telephone.  
67  
68  
Saved number redial  
Restriction override  
Allows the user to redial a number that was saved while on a call.  
Allows the user to override any restrictions on the set or line with a CoS  
password.  
69  
*7  
Priority call  
Contrast  
Transfer  
Allows the user to priority call an internal DN that is currently busy.  
Allows the user to adjust the contrast of the display screen.  
70  
Allows the user to transfer an existing call to another telephone or  
external number.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
38 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes  
Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Set command  
(FEATURE  
Feature  
Description  
<code>)  
71  
Link  
Activates the Link command, which allows the user to access special  
features on a remote PBX system.  
74  
Call park  
Allows the user to park a call.  
*520  
Find available SWCA key System searches for a free SWCA key among the SWCA keys that are  
assigned to the current telephone.  
*521 to *536 System Wide Call  
Non-intercom calls are associated with an available SWCA key when the  
call is answered, originated, or placed on Hold.  
Appearance (1 to 16)  
Features that interact with this feature: Hold, telephone keys, outgoing  
and incoming calls.  
*537  
*538  
*550  
75  
Find oldest SWCA call  
Find newest SWCA call  
Silent monitor  
System searches among the SWCA keys assigned to the telephone, and  
unparks the call that has been parked the longest.  
System searches among the SWCA keys assigned to the telephone, and  
unparks the most recently parked call.  
Allows the user to monitor hunt group calls. (Telephone must be  
assigned with SM supervisor.)  
Group pickup  
Allows the user to answer a call ringing telephone within the Pickup  
group.  
76  
77  
78  
79  
Directed pickup  
Call timer  
Allows the user to answer any ringing telephone within the same system.  
Allows the user to see the call duration timer.  
Pause  
Allows the user to insert a pause during a dialing sequence.  
Exclusive hold  
Allows the user to place a call on hold at the current telephone. All  
appearances of the call on other telephones indicate the line is busy.  
800  
801  
Trunk answer  
Call queuing  
Allows the user to answer a ringing line while in a ringing service. (If  
enabled).  
Allows the user to answer calls in order when several calls arrive in rapid  
succession. Calls are presented in this order: incoming calls, timed-out  
forwarded calls, then camped calls.  
802  
Group listening  
Activates the speaker on the set to allow a group of people to hear a call.  
But the user must talk to the caller through the handset.  
803  
804  
Time  
Briefly displays the current time.  
Wait for dialtone  
Places a pause in a dialing string that holds the following digits until a  
dialtone is perceived on the line.  
806  
807  
Static date and time  
Ringing (Signal) call  
First line displays the date and time.  
Directly rings another telephone inside the system when an extension is  
entered after the feature is selected. This is the same process as  
pressing an intercom button and dialing an extension.  
808  
811  
812  
Long tones  
Allows the user to send long DTMF tones.  
Call information  
Allows the user to view information about a current call.  
Allows the user to view call log information.  
Call log - view  
information  
813  
Call LogIt  
Allows the user to add the current call to the call log manually.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 39  
Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Set command  
(FEATURE  
<code>)  
Feature  
Description  
815  
818  
819  
82  
Call logs autobumping  
Call charge indication  
ONN blocking  
Allows the user to select if the system will remove the oldest log item  
manually when the log space fills.  
Allows the user to view the charges for a call (available on DASS2 and  
ETSI Euro trunks only).  
Allows the user to block the call information from the telephone for an  
outgoing call.  
Camp-on  
Allows the user to transfer and camp an external call on another  
telephone in the system.  
83  
84  
Privacy control  
Line redirection  
Allows the user to change the line privacy setting on the current call.  
Allows the user to redirect a line on their telephone to an external  
number.  
85  
86  
Do not disturb  
Allows the user to block incoming calls from ringing on the telephone.  
Background music  
Allows the user to play music provided by a background music source  
through the speaker on the telephone.  
870  
871  
872  
873  
88  
Service mode status  
Ringing service  
Restriction service  
Routing Service  
Voice call deny  
MCID  
Allows the user to view the current service mode being used.  
Allows the user to change the ringing service mode.  
Allows the user to change the restriction service mode.  
Allows the user to change the routing service mode.  
Allows the user to deny other users from Voice Calling their set.  
(Malicious Call Identification)  
897  
Allows the user to query the system for information about a call within 25  
seconds after the user hangs up, but before the caller hangs up.  
*501  
*7  
Language choice  
Contrast  
Provides a menu that allows you to choose the language for the display  
prompts on the telephone.  
Digital telephones only.  
Sets the level of contrast for the telephone display.  
904  
905  
906  
907  
908  
CC agent login/log out  
CC supervise  
Allows the user to log in or out of ACD.  
Allows the CC supervisor to monitor CC agent calls.  
Allows the CC agent to request help from a CC supervisor.  
Allows the CC agent or supervisor to enter activity codes for reporting.  
Allows the user to indicate ready or Not ready status on ACD.  
CC supervisor help  
CC activity code  
CC agent make Not  
ready/ready  
909  
980  
CC skillset status  
Allows the user to view the status of queued calls on ACD.  
Allows the user to log into voice mail box to leave a message.  
Voice mail Leave  
Message  
981  
982  
984  
Voice mail login  
Opens your mailbox to play your messages and to access mailbox  
options.  
Voice mail operator  
settings  
Allows the user to set the parameters for the voice mail operator.  
Call forward to voice mail Forwards all calls to your voicemail.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
40 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes  
Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Set command  
(FEATURE  
Feature  
Description  
<code>)  
985  
986  
987  
Display voice mail DN  
Transfer to mailbox  
Voice mail interrupt  
Displays the voice mail, skillset, or IVR DN.  
Transfers an external call directly to a mailbox on the CallPilot system.  
Intercepts a caller who is listening to your mailbox greeting or leaving a  
message.  
988  
989  
Voice mail direct  
Record call  
Dial an internal user via the name in the voice mail directory.  
Record the call to your voice mail box. Must be enabled by the system  
administrator.  
*900  
*999  
IP services list  
IP Hot desking  
IP telephones only.  
Allows the user to access a feature menu. This is the same menu that is  
accessed by pressing the Services key.  
IP telephones only.  
Allows the user to access the Hot desking feature. This feature allows  
calls to be diverted from one IP telephone to another.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
41  
Chapter 6  
DN records parameters  
The DN record defines the specific function of each telephone within the system.  
The following paths indicate where to access DN record parameters in Element Manager and  
through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Terminals and Sets  
Other areas of programming that affect how each telephone functions include:  
•
•
system settings (“Global telephony settings” on page 71)  
telephone model  
The DN records panel is a multilayered panel with multiple tabs. Although all panels show up for  
all models, not all models require configuration for all panels. Refer to the task and feature  
programming links to determine specific configuration. For information on programming a  
Doorphone refer to the BST Doorphone documentation.  
The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field.  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panel tabs  
Tasks  
Features  
“Main panel tabs: common fields” on  
page 42  
“Common procedures: copying and “Feature configuration: Answering  
renumbering DNs” on page 69  
calls” on page 193  
“Line Access tab” on page 44  
“Configuring telephones: Digital  
telephones” on page 119  
“Feature configuration: Making  
calls” on page 213  
“Line Access - Line Assignment  
tab” on page 46  
“Configuring analog telephones and “Hotline telephone” on page 225  
devices” on page 115  
“Line Access - Line Pool Access  
tab” on page 48  
“Control telephone” on page 225  
“Line Access - Answer DNs tab”  
on page 49  
“Supervisor telephone for silent  
monitoring” on page 227  
“Capabilities and Preferences main tab”  
on page 50  
“Capabilities and Preferences -  
Capabilities tab” on page 52  
“Capabilities and Preferences -  
Preferences tab” on page 56  
“Features to set up telephone set  
features” on page 187  
“Auxiliary ringer” on page 190  
“Capabilities and Preferences -  
ATA Settings tab” on page 62  
“Capabilities and Preferences - IP “Configuring telephones: IP  
Terminal Details tab” on page 64 telephones” on page 135  
“Global VoIP features” on page 139  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
42 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Panel tabs  
“Capabilities and Preferences -  
Tasks  
Features  
“Default memory button  
programming for telephones” on  
page 149  
Button Programming tab” on  
page 58 (includes CAP/KIM  
button programming)  
“Creating an enhanced CAP station”  
on page 229  
“Capabilities and Preferences -  
User Speed Dial tab” on page 61  
“System features and feature  
codes” on page 33  
“Restrictions main tab” on page 65  
“Call security: Restriction filters” in  
the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Restrictions - Set Restrictions  
tab” on page 66  
“Configuring remote access  
packages” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606)  
“Restrictions - Line/Set  
Restrictions tab” on page 67  
“Restrictions (Line and Remote)” in  
the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about DN records.  
Main panel tabs: common fields  
The Line Access, Capabilities and Preferences, and Restrictions tabs included in the Main panel,  
all display the same four columns as shown in Table 8.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 43  
Figure 7 Main Panel tabs  
Table 8 Common columns for the main panels (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
DN  
<numeric>  
This number is unique to each telephone record. The number  
identifies the telephone to the system. DN start digits and DN length  
are configured during system setup.  
Digital and analog telephone DNs map one-to-one with ports on  
module connections. IP telephone DNs do not map to specific ports;  
however, a keycode is required to activate the feature.  
Model  
Analog  
7000  
This heading appears for telephones in the digital DN range, from  
the Start DN (default: 221) up to DN 433. Choose the setting that is  
appropriate for the telephone you want to configure.  
7100  
This field is read-only if the telephone is already attached or  
registered to the system.  
7208  
7310/7316  
7316E  
7324  
•
•
7310/7316: also 7406 cordless digital phone  
7316E: also for 7316E digital phone with KIMs  
(Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only)  
2004/2050  
2002  
2001  
2007  
2033  
2050  
DMC prtb  
1120E, 1140E  
Other  
Name  
<up to seven alphanumeric  
characters>  
Use this field to provide a more specific description of the telephone,  
such as the last name of the user, the location, or the actual  
extension number if it is different than the DN number.  
Also refer to “Programming name display (outgoing)” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
44 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 8 Common columns for the main panels (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Port  
<port number>  
This number indicates the port number to which this DN  
corresponds.  
A group of port numbers relates to a specific station module installed  
in your BCM. If you change the DN for a telephone, the port number  
remains the same.  
If you physically move a telephone with the relocation feature turned  
on, the DN transfers to the new port, and the DN for that port  
transfers to the vacated location.  
Line Access tab  
The Line Access tab displays the DNs table. Line access programming is performed using the  
four tabs that appear in the details panel when a DN is selected. Refer to Figure 8.  
•
•
•
•
Line Access - Properties tab  
“Line Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 46  
“Line Access - Line Pool Access tab” on page 48  
“Line Access - Answer DNs tab” on page 49  
Line Access - Properties tab  
The administrator can use the properties tab to identify the public and private OLI of the selected  
DN. You also identify where, and when, calls are forwarded.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 45  
Figure 8 Properties tab  
Table 9 describes these fields.  
Table 9 Line Access tab fields (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Pub. OLI  
<up to 12 digits>  
This setting defaults to the DN of the device. The Public Network  
Code concatenates to the beginning of this number to create the  
entire public network number. The length of this number is  
dependent on the country requirements.  
This line identification number (OLI) appears on the telephone called  
from this telephone over the public network. Also refer to “Public  
network settings” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606).  
North America: If the OLI contains the public network code, the  
information in the Public Network code field is ignored. Therefore, it  
is recommended that OLIs be programmed to the public received  
number length, only. This allows a global change if the Public  
Network Code is changed.  
Also refer to “Configuring CLID on your system” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Priv. OLI  
<numeric>  
Define the originating line identification number (OLI) that appears  
on the telephone being called from this telephone over a private  
network.  
Note: On systems running DID, this field is populated automatically  
with the DN.  
If the DN length or the Received # length are changed to be different  
from each other, this field is cleared.  
Also refer to “Configuring CLID on your system” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
*If your system allows outgoing name and number blocking, the telephone must have a valid OLI.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
46 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 9 Line Access tab fields (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Fwd No  
Answer  
up to 24 digits  
Enter the number to which you want to redirect unanswered  
incoming calls.  
Fwd Delay  
2, 3, 4, 6, 10  
Define the number of rings before the system forwards an  
unanswered call.  
This heading only appears after you enter a Call Forward No  
Answer number and press Enter.  
Default: 4  
Fwd Busy  
Fwd All  
up to 24 digits  
up to 24 digits  
Redirect incoming calls when this telephone is busy with another  
call.  
This setting is the same as using FEATURE 4 at a telephone. When  
this feature is active, all calls to this telephone are forwarded to the  
destination entered in this field.  
If you are forwarding calls to a remote location, ensure that you  
include the required destination/access codes.  
A user can press FEATURE #4 to cancel this feature.  
Line Access - Line Assignment tab  
Use the line assignment settings to assign physical trunks and target lines to each telephone. Target  
lines are used as incoming only. Other lines can be used to both place and answer calls, if they are  
configured to do so.  
Figure 9 Line Access - Line Assignment tab  
Table 10 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Line  
<read-only>  
These are the lines on which this telephone can receive calls. If the  
line is a two-way line (DID), the user can also use the line to make  
calls.  
Also refer to “Configuring Lines” in the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 47  
Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Appearance Type  
Ring only, Appr&Ring, Select how a call on this line appears on the telephone.  
Appr only  
If you choose Appr&Ring or Appr only, you can have as many  
simultaneous DID calls as there are target line button appearances.  
If you choose Ring only, you can have as many simultaneous DID  
calls as you have intercom buttons.  
Note: The BCM does not support a mixture of Appr only and Ring  
only appearances for the same line.  
7000 or 7100 digital phones default to Ring only.  
(Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only)  
Appearances  
<1-255>  
Select the number of appearances of a target line.  
(for target lines, only)  
Note: The number of appearances that can be assigned to a  
telephone depends on how many buttons with indicators are  
available. Target line appearances cannot overwrite other line  
appearances, Answer DNs, Intercom buttons, or assigned  
Handsfree button.  
Caller ID set  
<check box>  
This prompt only appears for target lines, and for any analog lines  
that provide CLID through an GATM (not all markets).  
When enabled, the telephone displays call information when it is  
available for a call before answer.  
When disabled, no call information is displayed for this line. Choose  
this setting if the telephone does not have a display, or if you do not  
want call information displayed to the user. Disabling this function  
can reduce system resource requirements.  
Note: Only 30 telephones can have this field enabled for any given  
line.  
Vmsg Set  
<check box>  
Select whether an indicator shows on the telephone for a voice  
message waiting on an external voice message system.  
The line must appear on the receiving telephone.  
Note: The Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) is currently supported  
exclusively by Meridian Mail and CallPilot and SL-100, and  
DMS-100.  
MCDN note: If your system is part of an MCDN network connected  
to a Meridian 1 system, and you are using the voice mail system off  
the Meridian 1, you must enable this field.  
Analog lines connected to legacy analog ASM station modules, and  
analog telephones attached to an ATA device, do not provide visible  
message waiting indication. Analog telephones connected to a  
GASM8 support message indicators, if the telephone is set up to  
receive them.  
Note: Contact your voice message service provider to find out if your voice message service  
works with BCM, or if you have any problems with your service.  
Priv. Received #  
(Target lines only)  
These fields reflect the settings defined under target lines.  
These are the digit strings that the system uses to identify a call for this telephone.  
Refer to “Trunk/Line Data, main panel” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606).  
Pub. Received #  
(Target lines only)  
Actions  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
48 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields (Sheet 3 of 3)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Add  
To add a line to a telephone:  
1. On the System DNs table (Line Access tab), choose the DN record where you want to  
add lines.  
2. Under the Assigned Lines table in the bottom panel, click Add.  
3. Enter a line number in the dialog box.  
4. Click OK to save the line to the list.  
Delete  
1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to  
delete lines.  
2. On the Assigned Lines table in the bottom panel, select a line you want to delete.  
3. Click Delete.  
4. Click OK to confirm the selection.  
Line Access - Line Pool Access tab  
Use the Line Pool Access tab to add line pools to a telephone record.  
Figure 10 Line Access - Line Pool Access tab  
These shared pools of lines enables many users to use fewer lines for connections, where dedicated  
lines are not practical or not desirable. If all lines in the pool are taken, the user receives a busy  
signal.  
Some trunks, such as PRI and VoIP, must be put into line pools. For outgoing calls, the line pools  
are assigned to the telephones that call out over these trunks.  
All lines except PRI and BRI ETSI-QSIG lines are configured in line pools A to O. PRI and BRI  
ETSI-QSIG lines can be configured into line pools BLOC-A to BLOC-F.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 49  
Table 11 describes the access fields on this panel.  
Table 11 Line Pool Access fields  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Line Pool  
<read-only>  
This is a list of available line pools. Choose the ones that provide the  
outgoing call access you want for the telephone.  
Actions  
Add  
1. On the Line Access tab, choose the DN record, to which, you want to add line pools.  
2. On the Line Pools Access tab in the bottom panel, click Add.  
3. Enter a line pool in the dialog box.  
4. Click OK on the dialog box to save the line pool to the list.  
Delete  
1. On the Line Access tab, choose the DN record, of which, you want to delete line pools.  
2. On the Line Pools Access tab in the bottom panel, select a line pool you want to delete.  
3. Click Delete.  
4. Click Yes.  
Line Access - Answer DNs tab  
Program a telephone to provide automatic call alerting and call answering for other telephones in  
the system. The DNs of the other telephones are referred to as Answer DNs.  
Figure 11 Line Access - Answer DNs tab  
Table 12 describes the access fields on this panel.  
Table 12 Line Pool Access Fields - Answer DNs (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
DN  
<DN number>  
From the main panel DN list.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
50 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 12 Line Pool Access Fields - Answer DNs (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Appearance Type  
Appr&Ring, Appr only, Define how calls to the Answer DN will present on this telephone:  
Ring only  
Appr&Ring: Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button, and  
the telephone rings.  
Appr only: Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button.  
Ring only: Telephone rings.  
Notes:  
Every answer DN you assign to a telephone automatically designates an appearance on the answer telephone  
beside a button with an indicator, if one is available. Answer DNs overwrite feature assignments to buttons with  
indicators. They do not overwrite line, Hunt group, intercom, or handsfree assignments.  
If no buttons are available on the telephone, ensure that you program the Answer DN as Ring only. In that case,  
when a call comes in to the other telephone, the user receives a ring tone.  
Actions  
Add  
You can add a maximum of eight Answer DNs per telephone.  
1. On the Line Access tab, choose the DN record where you want to add Answer DNs.  
2. Under the Answer DNs tab, click Add.  
3. Enter the appropriate DN in the dialog box.  
4. Click OK to save the entry.  
5. On the Answer DNs tab, select the Appearance type field beside the Answer DN you just  
entered, and choose the appropriate appearance type.  
Programming Note: If the telephone has memory buttons with display designators, the  
system automatically assigns Answer DNs to buttons starting at the bottom right row of  
buttons. If the telephone has Handsfree assigned to a memory button, the Answer DNs start  
above that button. If the telephone has no memory buttons with display, ensure that you  
choose Ring only as the Appearance type.  
Delete  
1. On the Line Access tab, choose the DN record where you want to delete Answer DNs.  
1. On the Answer DNs tab, select the Answer DN line you want to delete.  
2. Click Delete.  
3. Click Yes.  
Capabilities and Preferences main tab  
Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones, and how the  
telephones receive calls.  
Preferences control how the telephone itself works. These settings also can be set by users at the  
telephones using feature codes.  
Modify the Capabilities and Preferences for a particular DN by changing the values on the  
following subpanels.  
•
•
•
•
•
“Capabilities and Preferences - Properties tab” on page 51  
“Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 52  
“Capabilities and Preferences - SWCA Call Group tab” on page 55  
“Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab” on page 56  
“Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming table” on page 58  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 51  
•
•
•
“Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab” on page 58  
“Capabilities and Preferences - ATA Settings tab” on page 62  
“Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details tab” on page 64  
Capabilities and Preferences - Properties tab  
The Properties settings control how calls are displayed, as well as assignment of control sets to  
individual telephones.  
Figure 12 Capabilities and Preferences - Properties tab  
Table 13 describes the fields shown on the main Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel.  
Table 13 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Prime Line  
None, Pool (A to O),  
I/C (intercom),  
Choose the first line that the telephone selects when a call is made. PRI  
Bloc pools are not valid selections for a Prime line.  
Line: <line number>  
When you assign a line pool as a prime line, the system searches  
automatically for an idle line in the pool.  
Intercom Keys  
Control Set  
0 to 8  
Assign the number of intercom buttons to a telephone.  
Intercom buttons provide a telephone with access to internal and external  
lines, and to line pools.  
DN: <any telephone  
DN>  
The Control telephone attribute allows you to define a DN that acts as a  
control telephone.  
None  
A control telephone is used to enable/disable Scheduled Services, such  
as Restriction Services, for the telephones to which it is assigned. For  
more information about services, see “System schedule settings and  
services scheduling” on page 29.  
DN:221<start DN>*  
You can assign several control sets for your system, but you can only  
assign one control telephone per DN.  
* If you change the Start DN, this number reflects that change.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
52 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 13 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
First Display  
Name  
Number  
Line  
Determine the call display information that appears first.  
This feature depends on the services to which you subscribe. Call Display  
information can contain the name of the caller, the number of the caller,  
the name of the line in your BCM where the call enters. For each  
telephone, you can determine the call display information that appears  
first.  
See also “Programming incoming CLID” in the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Tips: The Call Information feature displays and toggles between the name and line number for  
Call Display information.  
Alpha tagging: If you are using the alpha tagging feature, choose Name. Refer to “Using alpha  
tagging for name display (incoming)” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Auto Called ID  
<check box>  
Select whether you want to see on your display the extension number  
and name of the telephone you call.  
The Auto Called ID set for target lines is the same telephone that has an  
appearance on that target line.  
Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab  
Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones, and how the  
telephones receive calls.  
Note: Not all the fields shown below necessarily appear for any one  
type of telephone. Some fields relate to specific models of telephones.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 53  
Figure 13 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab  
Table 14 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 14 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Handsfree  
None  
None: The handsfree feature is not available on all telephone models (7000  
and 7100 digital phones, 2001 IP phones, DMC portables).(Model 7000  
phones are supported in Europe only)  
Standard  
Auto  
Standard: The handsfree feature is activated by pressing a button on the  
telephone.  
Auto: The handsfree feature is activated when the telephone receives a call.  
Note: Handsfree must be enabled on any telephone that allows headsets.  
For 7316E digital phones, set Handsfree to Auto.  
7406 digital cordless phone: Handsfree must be enabled for this handset to  
work.  
Speaker volume: Note that the speaker volume returns to the telephone  
default setting for each new handsfree call.  
Default: Auto  
Pickup group  
Page zone  
None  
1 to 9  
Assigns this telephone to a pickup group (a group where all telephones ring  
until one is answered).  
Default: None  
Page zone  
(1 to 6)  
Assigns this telephone to a page zone.  
A zone is any group of telephones that you want to group together for  
paging, regardless of their location. You can assign one of six zones to  
each telephone.  
None  
The maximum number of digital telephones in a page zone is 50.  
The maximum number of digital and IP telephones in a page zone is 60.  
Default: 1  
Direct dial  
Set 1 to Set 5 Defines whether you can call the direct dial telephone from this telephone  
using the direct dial digit.  
None  
Default: 1  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
54 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 14 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Intrusion protection  
level  
None  
Low  
If the break-in feature is allowed on any private network MCDN lines (PRI  
SL-1) assigned to the telephone, you must define the level of intrusion for  
each telephone. This determines if the user can use the feature, and to  
what degree.  
Med  
High  
None: feature is turned off, user cannot break in on any calls  
Low: user can only break into calls on other telephones with low level  
protection  
Med: user can break into calls on other telephones with low and  
medium-level protection  
High: user can break into calls on all other telephones with this feature  
Default: None  
HF answerback  
<check box>  
Defines whether you can answer automatically a voice call without lifting the  
receiver, or pressing the Handsfree button.  
Note: The feature is not available on models 2001, 7000 and 7100  
telephones. (Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only)  
Speaker volume: Note that the speaker volume on the telephone returns to  
the default volume setting determined by the telephone for each new  
handsfree call.  
Default: Selected  
DND on Busy  
Paging  
<check box>  
<check box>  
Defines whether an incoming call rings if you are already on another call.  
Default: Cleared  
Defines whether you can make paging announcements from this telephone.  
Default: Selected  
Auto hold for incoming <check box>  
page  
Not selected - If the telephone is active when a page comes in, the page  
does not come through the telephone set.  
Selected - If the telephone is active when a page comes in, the call is  
placed automatically on hold and the page continues.  
Note - 7XXX digital phones:  
•
Condition - When this setting is enabled, an active call is on mute when  
the page comes in.  
•
Results after page - The call is taken off hold, but is no longer muted.  
Default: Cleared  
Priority call  
Auto hold  
<check box>  
<check box>  
Defines whether this telephone can interrupt calls or override Do Not  
Disturb at another telephone.  
Default: Cleared  
This setting determines if the system automatically places an active call on  
hold if you answer or initiate another call.  
If you do not select this box, the system drops the active call, unless you  
press the HOLD button first, when you answer a call or initiate another call.  
The user can change the Auto hold setting at their telephones by pressing  
FEATURE 73.  
SWCA note: Ensure this setting is selected for any telephones with  
configured System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys. Refer to “Sharing  
calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on page 207  
Default: Selected  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 55  
Table 14 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab (Sheet 3 of 3)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Allow redirect  
<check box>  
Define whether this telephone allows assigned lines to be redirected.  
This must be selected to allow call forwarding outside the network (external  
call forward), including calls to a centralized voice mail system over a  
private network.  
Default: Cleared  
Redirect ring  
<check box>  
<check box>  
Define whether the telephone rings briefly when a call on one of its lines is  
redirected by the Line Redirection feature (FEATURE 84).  
Also refer to “Trunk/Line Data, main panel” in the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Default: Selected  
Receive short tones  
Analog equipment, which is connected to the system with an internal or  
external analog terminal adapter (ATA2), responds only to tone dialing  
signals.  
Select this setting only if you have analog equipment connected to a station  
port.  
Default: Cleared  
Silent monitor  
supervisor  
<check box>  
On two-line display telephones only, you can choose whether the telephone  
can be used to allow the Silent Monitor feature. Select the check box to  
allow this feature on this telephone.“Silent Monitor” on page 81“Monitoring  
Hunt Groups” on page 107.  
Default: Cleared  
Capabilities and Preferences - SWCA Call Group tab  
Although System-wide Call Appearance (SWCA) assignments are meant to be assigned to buttons  
with indicators, you can assign SWCA assignments to a telephone without assigning them to  
buttons using the fields on this panel. This is useful if you want to use the full range of SWCA  
assignments.  
Use the SWCA Call Group tabbed panel to enable or disable Call 1 to Call 16 assignments for  
each sets. The administrator can configure the 16 SWCA feature codes on all the sets through  
administration.  
Users can park or retrieve calls on any SWCA assignment, even if the call is not directly assigned  
to their telephone. However, the SWCA support codes (FEATURE *520, FEATURE *537 and  
FEATURE *538) only search for SWCA assignments that are assigned to the telephone where the  
feature is invoked. These codes are required for users who do not have buttons with indicators.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
56 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Figure 14 Capabilities and Preferences - SWCA Call Group tab  
Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab  
The Preferences headings allow you to program the same settings that users can perform at their  
telephones, and the settings for configuring a telephone as a hotline. The telset admin options are  
available only to digital telephones and IP telephones.  
Figure 15 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab panel  
Table 15 describes the headings on the Preferences panel.  
Table 15 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences panel fields (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Language  
Languages displayed Choose the language for the telephone display prompts.  
are based on  
telephone capabilities  
and system software.  
Dialing options  
Standard dial  
Automatic dial  
Pre-dial  
Determine how the telephone handles dialed information.  
Standard: Lift the receiver and dial.  
Automatic dial: Use for devices, such as fax machines where you  
want the number to dial out without external cues.  
Pre-dial: Dial the numbers, then lift the handset to allow the  
telephone to dial the number.  
Note: Not all devices show all three options.  
Default: Standard dial  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 57  
Table 15 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences panel fields (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Contrast  
1 through 9  
Adjust the contrast of the display.  
Default: 4  
Ring type  
1, 2, 3, or 4  
<read-only>  
Select a distinctive ring pattern type for the telephone.  
Default: 1  
Distinct rings in use  
This field indicates the distinct ring patterns, if any, are currently in  
effect on any lines, telephones, or Hunt groups on the system.  
Refer to the Warning below.  
Warning:  
If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a telephone, and that distinctive ring pattern has  
already been assigned to a line, all lines with that ring pattern will be reset to None.  
If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a line, and that distinctive ring pattern has already  
been assigned to a telephone, all telephones with that ring pattern are reset to pattern 1.  
You also can assign a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt group.  
Aux. ringer  
<check box>  
Determine whether an auxiliary ringer (if installed) rings for  
incoming calls at this telephone.  
Default: Cleared  
Call log options  
No autologging  
No one answered  
Unanswered by me  
Log all calls  
Select how you want the telephone to handle logging calls.  
No autologging: No calls are logged automatically.  
No one answered: Unanswered calls are logged.  
Unanswered by me: Unanswered calls are logged.  
Log all calls: All calls are noted in the call log.  
Also refer to “Call log” on page 210.  
Default: No one answered  
Log space  
<numeric>  
<numeric>  
Allocate a number of Call log spaces from a system-wide pool of  
spaces to the telephone. Also refer to “Setting call log space for the  
system” on page 210.  
Log space  
Allocate a number of Call log spaces form a system-wide pool or  
spaces to the telephone. Also refer to “Setting call log space for the  
system” on page 210.  
Available log space  
<read-only>  
<button>  
This setting indicates the total amount of space available for call  
logging on the system.  
Reset Call Log  
Password  
This button resets the password for the call log if users forget their  
password.  
Hotline type  
None  
This feature allows you to define a telephone number that  
automatically dials when you lift the handset or press the Handsfree  
button, on a telephone.  
Internal  
External  
Default: None  
•
Internal  
DN:*  
Define the internal telephone you want to access.  
Direct dial set  
DN:* The DN of the telephone that is automatically dialed when the  
user lifts the handset.  
Direct dial set: Automatically dials a telephone on the system  
defined as a direct dial telephone (direct dial access code).  
Note: If the direct dial telephone is on a remote node of the  
network, ensure that the correct line pools are assigned to the  
telephone to properly route the call.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
58 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 15 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences panel fields (Sheet 3 of 3)  
Setting  
External  
Values  
Description  
•
External number  
Enter the complete call number for the external telephone you want  
to access.  
Pool:A  
Enter the line you want the call to use. (This cannot be a target  
line.)  
Use prime line  
Use routing table  
Pool:A Refer to the line pool assignment for this telephone.  
Use prime line: Refer to the General record for this telephone.  
Use routing table: Refer to the routing tables. The routing code for  
that table must be part of the External number.  
Also refer to:  
•
“Moving IP telephones” in the BCM 4.0 Telephony Device Installation Guide (N0060609).  
Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming table  
Figure 16 Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming Table  
Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab  
The Button Programming and CAP/KIM Button Programming tab panels allow you to program  
the buttons on a telephone with internal and external autodialers, and with programmed feature  
keys.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 59  
You also can use these panels to remove programming from a button, making it blank.  
Figure 17 Button Programming and CAP/KIM Button Programming tabbed panels  
Assigned lines, Hunt group designators, Answer DNs buttons, Intercom buttons, and Handsfree  
buttons cannot be changed through these panels. They appear in read-only format.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 16 describes the possible settings for telephone buttons.  
Table 16 Button programming fields (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Model  
7100  
If you have not yet connected a telephone, choose the model  
of the telephone. This creates a number of defaults based on  
the telephone capabilities.  
7208  
7310/7316  
7316E  
7324  
This setting reflects whatever you set on the main table.  
This field is read-only if the telephone is already attached or  
registered to the system.  
2004/2050  
2001  
•
7310 also refers to the cordless 7406 cordless digital  
phones.  
2002  
•
7316E indicates both a stand-alone 7316E digital phone  
and a 7316E digital phone connected to one or more Key  
Indicator Modules (KIMs)  
2007  
2033  
•
2002, 2004, IP phones connect to the Key Expansion  
Module (KEM)  
DMC prtb  
1120E, 1140E  
2210  
2211  
2212  
ISDN  
These telephones have their own set of DN records.  
ISDN refers to any ISDN equipment  
This heading is used for the following types of devices:  
•
Other  
•
•
analog telephones  
Intl set (European only) is used for other types of  
compatible telephones used in specific non-North  
American markets, such as the 7000 digital phone.  
Button Number (1-24) <1-XX>  
Use the telephone buttons to choose the features you want to  
program.  
Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button.  
Example: New KIM modules have all blank buttons when they  
are first installed.  
Function  
Blank  
Choose the type of feature that you want to program on the  
telephone buttons.  
Feature  
Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button.  
Example: New KIM modules have all blank buttons when they  
are first installed.  
Internal autodial  
External autodial  
Value  
Feature  
<feature code>  
<Internal DN>  
Use the arrow to choose the feature you want to program on  
the button.  
Internal autodial  
Enter the DN number for the internal telephone you want the  
telephone to dial by pressing this button.  
Digits  
Feature  
<feature digits>  
Includes digits for such features as system speed dial codes.  
External autodial  
<dialing codes plus dialout Enter the complete dial sequence for the external call. This  
string>  
sequence depends on what you chose for the route in the  
Value field.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 61  
Table 16 Button programming fields (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Option  
Feature  
<feature options>  
Includes settings such as page zone.  
External autodial  
facility  
Use prime line  
Pool  
Choose the route through which the telephone dials.  
Prime line: the prime line assigned to the telephone.  
Pool X: one of the pools assigned to the telephone.  
Use routing table  
Use line  
Routing table: enter the routing code with the external  
telephone number.  
Use line X: one of the lines assigned to the telephone.  
Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab  
The speed dial numbers enables users to dial a number with fewer button presses than dialing the  
entire dial string.  
Note: User speed dials are only available from that users DN number.  
Figure 18 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab  
Table 17 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 17 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial panel fields (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Speed Dial  
Number  
<71-94>  
The number the user enters to dial the number entered in the External #  
field. To increase the number of speed dials refer to “Configuring system  
speed dial numbers” on page 85.  
External  
Number  
<external telephone  
number>  
Enter the number the telephone automatically dials when the user speed  
dial code is entered.  
Note: Include the access codes for the route you choose.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
62 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 17 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial panel fields (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Facility  
Use prime line  
Select the route you want the dialed number to take out of your system.  
Use routing table  
Note: Any line numbers or line pool codes that you specify must be  
assigned to the telephone where the code is entered.  
If you choose prime line, a prime line must be assigned to the telephone  
where the code is entered.  
Refer to “Line Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 46.  
Actions  
Add  
1. On the Capabilities and Preferences tab, choose the DN record where you want to add User  
Speed dials.  
2. Under the User Speed Dial Numbers table, click Add.  
3. Enter the appropriate speed dial number.  
4. Click OK.  
5. On the User Speed Dial, click the External Number field beside the number you entered.  
6. Enter an external number to dial.  
7. Click the Facility field beside the number you entered.  
8. Enter how the number must be routed out of the system.  
Delete  
1. On the Capabilities and Preferences tab, choose the DN record where you want to delete User  
Speed dial entries.  
2. On the User Speed Dial Numbers table, click the user speed dial code or codes that you want to  
delete.  
3. Click Delete.  
4. Click Yes.  
Capabilities and Preferences - ATA Settings tab  
Analog telephones have some settings that are specific to the analog connection. An analog  
telephone can be connected to the system directly through an analog station port, either on the  
Main Unit (in countries that support Main Unit Analog Stations) or through Analog Station Media  
Bay Modules. These settings apply only when the DN record Model field is set to analog.  
Analog telephones can also be connected by using an Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA2). The  
digital station port can be on the main unit, or on a Digital Station Media Bay Module.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 63  
Figure 19 Capabilities and Preferences - ATA Settings panel fields  
Use the information in Table 18 to configure ATA settings.  
Table 18 ATA settings  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
ATA answer  
timer  
3, 5, 7, 10  
Select the length of delay between the time you dial the last digit and when the  
analog device is ready to receive DTMF tone.  
Default: 7  
ATA tones  
ATA use  
<check box>  
Not selected: No tones occur when a message is received (use for data equipment).  
Selected: Tones occur when a message is received (use for analog telephones).  
Default: Cleared  
On site  
Off site  
Select the location of the ATA2.  
Note: Set the field to On site for all installations, except devices on a long loop. Set  
the field to Off site to increase the audio level to devices that are remote to the  
ATA2. This field has no effect for ASM and ASM8+ devices.  
Note: OPX connections are not supported.  
Default: On site  
Msg indicate  
ATA device  
None  
Tone  
Lamp  
Select Tone to send a Message Tone through the telephone receiver when you  
receive a message.  
Select Lamp to turn on the Message Lamp when you receive a message.  
Default: None  
Modem  
Devices connected to the system through an ATA can have connectivity issues over  
BRI/PRI lines. To alleviate this, you can specify the type of device attached to the  
analog line.  
Telephon  
Modem supports 3.1 kHz audio, which requires a higher quality of service on the  
ISDN trunks that modems and FAX machines require for reliable information  
transfer. If the trunks cannot provide the higher level of service, the call fails.  
Telephon supports speech paths, which require less quality on the trunk; if used for  
FAX and/or modem, information transfer is unreliable.  
Default: Modem  
Disconnect  
supervision  
<check box>  
If you have a modem or fax machine that does not disconnect automatically when  
the caller disconnects, you can select this feature; the system then disconnects the  
line from the device when it receives the disconnect signal from the far end. This  
feature is supported only by ASM8+ modules.  
Note: The line must be configured as supervised/guarded. Refer to “Properties” in  
the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Default: Cleared  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
64 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details tab  
This is a single-terminal display of the terminal information that is also shown in the Telephony  
Resources IP Terminal panel. Refer to “IP telephone set details” in the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606) for a detailed description of the fields and buttons on this panel.  
Figure 20 Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details panel  
The field is described in Table 19.  
Table 19 Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details  
Keep DN alive  
<check box>  
This feature is relevant only to the Nortel IP telephones.  
When selected, the system retains the IP telephone DN record, even if the IP  
telephone becomes disconnected. Retention occurs as long as the IP  
telephone has completed the bootup process. It allows DN-specific features,  
such as Call Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy, to continue to  
function even if the telephone is disconnected.  
WARNING: If the system is reset, and the IP telephone is disconnected, the  
feature remains inactive until the telephone is reconnected.  
Note: A delay of about 40 seconds occurs between the time when the IP  
telephone is disconnected and when Keep DN alive becomes active. During  
this period, incoming calls receive a ring back tone, or are rerouted to the  
prime set, depending on system programming. The delay also occurs when  
the IP telephone is reconnected to the system.  
If Keep DN alive is not selected, and the IP telephone is disconnected, the  
DN record becomes inactive. In this case, a Not in Serviceprompt is  
produced when special features, such as Call Forward, are invoked.  
Default: Cleared  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 65  
Restrictions main tab  
Use the Restrictions settings to control callouts of certain number combinations. These restriction  
filters are then assigned to lines and DN records, as required to prevent callers from making certain  
kinds of calls from a specific telephone, or from lines available at the telephone.  
Modify the restrictions settings by changing the values in the following subpanels:  
•
•
•
Restrictions - Properties  
“Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab” on page 66  
“Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab” on page 67  
Restrictions - Properties  
You can assign restrictions to individual DNs. Select the permission level of the DN user to  
modify features.  
Figure 21 Restrictions - Properties  
Table 20 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 20 Restriction - Set Restrictions tab (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Set Lock  
None  
Partial  
Full  
Choose the option that sets the amount of programming and customizing the  
user can do with this telephone.  
None allows access to all features.  
Partial prevents:  
Full restricts all the Partial settings,  
plus:  
•
•
programming autodial buttons  
programming user speed dial  
numbers  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
changing background music  
changing Privacy  
changing Do Not Disturb  
using Ring Again  
using Call Forward all calls  
using Send Message  
using Trunk Answer  
•
•
•
•
programming feature buttons  
moving line buttons  
changing the display language  
changing dialing modes  
(Automatic, Pre-, and Standard  
Dial)  
activating Services  
•
•
using Voice Call Deny  
saving a number with Saved  
Number Redial  
Allow Last Number <check box>  
Allow or disallow access to the Last Number Redial feature.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
66 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 20 Restriction - Set Restrictions tab (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Allow Saved  
Number  
<check box>  
Select to allow access to the Saved Number Redial feature.  
Allow Link  
<check box>  
Select to allow access to the Link feature, which is a host signaling option.  
Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab  
You can assign restrictions that apply to a specific telephone record. You also can assign a  
different restriction filter for Normal service, and for one or more of six other schedules that  
enables the user to have different access at different times of the day. See “System schedule  
settings and services scheduling” on page 29 for more information about schedules.  
Figure 22 Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab  
Table 21 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 21 Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab fields  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Schedule  
Normal  
The Normal schedule runs when no other schedules are active.  
<Sched 1-6>  
If schedules are being used, select the relevant schedule, and enter the  
required filter.  
Use Filter  
<XX>  
Enter the restriction filter you want to be active for each schedule that you  
use.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6 DN records parameters 67  
Table 22 provides a list of default restriction filters.  
Table 22 Schedule filter defaults  
Schedule  
Restriction filter (defaults)  
Schedule  
Restriction filter (defaults)  
Normal  
02  
11  
Schedule 4  
Schedule 5  
Schedule 6  
00  
00  
00  
Schedule 1 (Night)  
Schedule 2 (Evening) 12  
Schedule 3 (Lunch) 13  
Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab  
Use the Line/Set Restrictions settings to assign a restriction filter to a specific line for outgoing  
calls at a specific telephone. This type of filter replaces any line or set restriction filters that can  
otherwise apply. Line/Set restrictions restrict the numbers the user can dial on a line, but only from  
that telephone. The same line on another telephone can have different restrictions.  
You can apply a different line restriction for normal service, and for each of the six schedules.  
Figure 23 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions panel  
Table 23 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 23 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions fields (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Line  
<XXX>  
A list of lines assigned to this telephone. Define a restriction filter for each line  
under the schedules that you intend to use.  
Restriction filters are defined under Call Security. Refer to “Defining restriction  
filters” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
68 Chapter 6 DN records parameters  
Table 23 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions fields (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Schedule  
Normal  
Night  
Always configure a Normal filter, as this schedule runs if there are no other  
schedules running.  
If your system is using schedules (for example, if you require different  
restrictions on lines at different times of the day), choose an alternate  
schedule that coordinates with the other programmed schedules on your  
system.  
Evening  
Lunch  
Sched 4  
Sched 5  
Sched 6  
Use Filter  
<XX>  
Enter the restriction filter you want activated for this set on this line for each  
schedule that you use.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
Chapter 7  
Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs  
Task: Understanding common tasks  
• “Copying settings to other DNs” on page 69  
• “Renumbering DNs” on page 70  
Copying settings to other DNs  
The Copy command allows you to duplicate programming for a telephone, and apply it to another  
telephone, a range of telephones, or to all the telephones on the system. If information is copied to  
a record with an assigned telephone, the copy information replaces the existing settings.  
Note: Unique configurations, such as the Name, do not copy over.  
To copy telephone configurations  
1
2
3
4
Select Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs.  
Click the DN number for the record that has the settings you want to copy.  
Click Copy.  
Select the DN to which you want to apply the selected settings.  
Note: Select multiple DNs by holding down the control or shift key, and  
clicking multiple records.  
5
Click Paste. The following panel appears:  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
70 Chapter 7 Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs  
Figure 24 Paste Set Data dialog box  
6
7
Select the check boxes for the properties that you want to copy to the new DN.  
Click OK.  
Renumbering DNs  
Your system auto-assigns DNs based on the hardware for digital telephones. In the case of IP  
telephones, you can choose to auto-assign DNs when the telephones register to the system.  
When you change a DN, the DN record retains the same port number, because the telephone is not  
being moved physically. The original DN then assigns to the port vacated by the DN that you  
assign as the new DN. If you fill the DN/Port record in the Programming Records, remember to  
change the entries.  
Change telephone DNs using the Element Manager  
There are two panels in Element Manager from which you can change the DN setting:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets  
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Dialing Plan  
The procedure is the same in both panels.  
To change telephone DNs  
1
2
3
Double-click the DN you want to change.  
Type the number of the DN you want to assign to the set.  
Press Tab, or click in another field, to apply the selection.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
71  
Chapter 8  
Global telephony settings  
There are a number of settings that define telephony operation for the entire system. These have  
been gathered on one panel, separated into sections.  
The following paths indicate where to access global telephony settings in Element Manager and  
through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > System Prgrming  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panels and Details Panels  
Configure Features  
“Feature Settings” on page 72  
“Programming Business name display  
(outgoing)” in the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Feature Settings panel” on page 73  
“Selecting the music source” on page 282  
“Call Park” on page 206  
“Directed Pickup” on page 194  
“Holding calls” on page 200  
“Transfer (unanswered) calls” on page 202  
“Paging” on page 215  
“Receiver volume” on page 189  
“Answer DNs” on page 196  
“Timers” on page 76  
“Camp-on” on page 205  
“External call codes” on page 223  
“Call Park” on page 206  
“Callback” on page 207  
“Configuring an analog telephone” on page 116  
“Advanced Feature Settings” on page 78  
“Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on  
page 207  
“ONN Blocking (North American systems)” on  
page 80  
“Blocking outgoing name display at the  
telephone” in the BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Silent Monitor” on page 81  
“Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab”  
on page 52 (Supervisor sets)  
“Monitoring external hunt group calls” on  
page 107  
“Reset logs” on page 82  
“Capabilities and Preferences main tab” on  
page 50 (Set log space)  
“Call log” on page 210  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
72 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings  
The global telephony settings affect a number of different telephony features.  
•
Business Name: This is part of the CLID feature. It displays the business name on outgoing  
calls for all system telephones, on which CLID is allowed and activated.  
•
Feature settings: These affect different aspects of how various features act, or if they are  
allowed on the system.  
•
•
Timers provides timeout parameters for different types of telephony features.  
System wide call appearance (SWCA) fields determine how the telephones will relate calls to  
SWCA assignments.  
Feature Settings  
Refer to the following for a description of the fields in each segment of this panel.  
•
•
•
•
“Feature Settings panel” on page 73  
“Timers” on page 76  
“System Wide Call Appearances Control” on page 78  
“ONN Blocking (North American systems)” on page 80  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 73  
Feature Settings panel  
These settings affect all telephones. They determine whether the listed features are allowed, or  
how they function.  
Figure 25 System feature settings  
Table 24 describes each field.  
Table 24 Feature settings (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Business Name  
<Maximum of 8  
alphanumeric  
characters>  
Enter a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters.  
Refer to “Programming Business name display (outgoing)” in the  
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Feature Settings  
Background music  
<check box>  
Select to enable the caller to listen to music through your telephone  
speaker after pressing FEATURE 86 on your telephone. A music  
source must be connected to system. Refer to the BCM200/400 4.0  
Installation and Maintenance Guide (N0060612) for information about  
installing an external music source.  
Also refer to “Selecting the music source” on page 282.  
Page tone  
<check box>  
<check box>  
Select to sound a tone before a page begins. Also refer to “Paging” on  
page 215.  
Note: This tone is not heard over external page ports.  
*Conference Tone  
Select to enable a conference tone that is heard by participants at the  
beginning of the conference.  
*Only available in certain profiles, UK, Germany, and Italy.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
74 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings  
Table 24 Feature settings (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Message reply  
enhancement  
<check box>  
Select to enable users to automatically deactivate the message  
waiting indicator on analog telephones connected to an analog  
station media bay module (ASM), if the reply call from the analog  
telephone to the direct dial telephone is answered. Any telephone can  
answer the call.  
This feature also functions if the user invokes the Call pickup feature  
to answer the reply call from the analog telephone. However, it does  
not work with the Retrieve parked call feature.  
Note: ASM (analog station modules) are not supported in all  
countries.  
Tips: Only direct dial telephones can send messages (using F1) to  
analog telephones connected to an  
ASM/GASM. The direct dial set must be the designated direct dial  
telephone for the analog telephone receiving a message.  
Force auto/spd dial  
over ic/conf  
<check box>  
Determine if autodial and speed dial codes can be transmitted during  
an active call. This feature works during either a one-to-one call, or  
during a conference call.  
If selected: When the user presses a programmed autodial or speed  
dial key, the system dials out the number while maintaining the  
current call.  
If not selected: When the user presses a memory key for a speed  
dial, the current call is automatically placed on Hold, and the second  
call is dialed.  
Note: This feature cannot be used for an ad hoc multi-party  
conference.  
On hold  
Silence  
Tones  
Music  
Select what a caller hears on an external line when the line is put on  
hold.  
Silence provides no audio feedback.  
Tones provides a periodic tone.  
Music provides any signal from a source such as a radio connected  
to BCM or streaming audio. See “Selecting the music source” on  
page 282.  
Held line reminder  
Immediate  
Reminds you that an external call at your telephone is still on Hold.  
You periodically hear two tones from your telephone until you take  
the call off Hold.  
After 30 seconds  
After 60 seconds  
After 90 seconds  
After 120 seconds  
After 150 seconds  
After 180 seconds  
Off  
Note: These tones can be heard by the caller.  
Delayed ring transfer  
Off  
Defines whether unanswered external calls are forwarded  
automatically to a prime telephone after this timer expires.  
After 1 ring  
After 2 rings  
After 3 rings  
After 4 rings  
After 6 rings  
After 10 rings  
You must assign a prime telephone for this feature to operate. Refer  
to the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606) for  
information on how to assign a prime telephone.  
Default: After 4 rings  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 75  
Table 24 Feature settings (Sheet 3 of 3)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Park mode  
Lowest  
Cycle  
Determine how the system assigns a retrieval code to parked calls.  
Lowest, the system chooses the lowest code that is available when  
the call is parked.  
Cycle, the system chooses the codes in a sequence, from lowest to  
highest, until all the codes have been used, then start at the lowest  
code again.  
Also refer to “Common dialing plan settings” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606) (Call Park access code)  
and “Timers” on page 76 (Park timeout).  
Default: Lowest  
Maximum CLI per line 30 (read-only)  
This setting indicates the maximum number of telephones that  
displays CLID simultaneously for an incoming call.  
Answer keys  
Basic  
The Answer keys setting allows you to determine what types of calls  
alert at a telephone that has answer DNs assigned. Answer key  
changes do not apply to portables.  
Enhanced  
Extended  
Warning: Do not change the default setting (Basic) if you have  
Contact Center active on your system.  
Refer to “Answer DN answer key levels” on page 76 for attributes of  
each setting.  
Also refer to “Line Access - Answer DNs tab” on page 49.  
Default: Basic  
Receiver volume  
Directed pickup  
Use sys volume  
Use set volume  
Specify if the volume level of a receiver or headset returns to the  
system default level when a call ends or is put on hold, or if it remains  
at the volume level set at the individual telephone.  
Default: Use sys volume  
<check box>  
If selected: allows anyone to answer any calls by specifying the  
internal number (DN) where the call is ringing.  
Directed pickup is useful when not all the telephones have the same  
lines, but you want to allow co-workers to answer a call on any  
external line.  
Note: Do not confuse Directed pickup with the Group pickup feature.  
Group pickup allows you to answer a call at any telephone within a  
specific group, without specifying the internal number (DN) of the  
ringing telephone.  
Default: Selected  
Set relocation  
<check box>  
If selected: Set relocation, after you perform the telephone installation  
and programming, for more flexibility in testing equipment. You can  
move any digital telephone to a new location without losing the  
directory number, autodial settings, personal speed dial codes, and  
any programming for that telephone.  
Not selected: Set relocation while moving a telephone, the internal  
number and programming data remain with the physical port on BCM.  
When you connect the telephone somewhere else, it does not receive  
the original programming. A telephone that is plugged into the original  
jack downloads the programming. If the new telephone is a different  
model, it downloads the part of the programming that is the same for  
both models.  
Default: Cleared  
Alarm set  
DN: <number>  
Assign a device on which alarm messages appear when a problem is  
detected in the system.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
76 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings  
Answer DN answer key levels  
You can determine what type of calls alert at an assigned Answer DN key. This is a system setting,  
so all Answer DNs behave the same.  
There are three answer key levels: Basic, Enhanced, and Extended. If your system supports  
overflow routing of calls (for example, Hunt groups), the setting is Enhanced or Extended.  
Alternatively, if Contact Center telephones are assigned Answer DNs, this setting must be Basic.  
Do not change this setting unless you understand the impact on the other telephone groups in your  
system.  
In Table 25, the X indicates the type of calls that are handled at Answer DNs for each answer key  
level.  
Table 25 DN answer key levels  
Answer DN call response for:  
Basic  
Enhanced  
Extended  
Prime set call capture  
Overflow call routing calls  
Call forwarded calls  
Ringing service calls  
Callbacks  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Blind transferred calls  
Other answer key calls  
Priority calls  
X
X
Voice calls  
All other calls  
X
X
Also refer to:  
•
•
“Line Access - Answer DNs tab” on page 49  
“Telephony features” on page 187  
Timers  
Various system features require timeout parameters to close the feature.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 77  
Figure 26 System Timers  
Table 26 describes the timers.  
Table 26 Timer values  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Camp timeout 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, Assign the number of seconds before an unanswered camped call returns  
or 180  
to the telephone that camped the call. Also refer to “Camp-on” on  
page 205.  
Default: 45 seconds  
Park timeout 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, Assign the number of seconds before a parked call on an external line  
180, 300, or 600  
returns to the telephone which parked the call. This interval is used for  
SWCA lines as well. Also refer to “Call Park codes” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Default: 45 seconds  
Page timeout 15, 30, 60, 120, 180,  
300, 600, or 2700  
Define the period of time after which the paging feature automatically  
disconnects. Also refer to “Paging” on page 215.  
Default: 180 seconds  
Transfer  
callback  
timeout  
After 3 rings  
After 4 rings  
After 5 rings  
After 6 rings  
After 12 rings  
Specify the number of rings before a callback occurs on a transferred call.  
You can estimate the delay in seconds, if you multiply the number of rings  
by six.  
Note: This setting can affect transferred calls from voicemail and must be  
configured accordingly.  
Off  
Also refer to “Line Access tab” on page 44 (Call forward).  
Default: After 4 rings  
*Network  
Callback  
<XX seconds>  
Determine the timeout value when a transfer attempt stops and then  
attempt a retry of the transfer.  
*Not available in all region profiles.  
Host delay  
200, 400, 600, 800,  
Assign the delay between the moment an outgoing line is selected to  
1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, make an external call (for example, by lifting the receiver) and the moment  
1800 or 2000  
that BCM sends dialed digits or codes on the line.This ensures that a dial  
tone is present before the dialing sequence is sent. Minimizing this delay  
provides faster access to the requested features.  
Default: 1000 milliseconds  
Link time  
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, Specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature through a  
600, 700, 800, 900, or  
1000 milliseconds  
remote system.  
Link time depends on the requirements of the host switching system. For  
example, to program external dialing through a Centrex system, a Link  
time of 400 ms is required.  
Note: Link is another name for recall or flash.  
Default: 600 milliseconds  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
78 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings  
Advanced Feature Settings  
The following path indicates where to access advanced feature settings in Element Manager:  
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Advanced Feature  
Settings  
The Advanced Feature Settings panel enables administrators to modify the following features:  
•
•
•
•
System Wide Call Appearances Control  
“ONN Blocking (North American systems)” on page 80  
“Silent Monitor” on page 81  
“Reset logs” on page 82  
System Wide Call Appearances Control  
There are a number of ways that calls can be parked on System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA)  
assignments. Use this panel to set the system feature function.  
Figure 27 System Wide Call Appearances controls  
Table 27 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 27 SWCA controls (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute/Value  
Description  
Auto-associate SWCA key to call  
Manually - while parked  
Manually - life of call  
Select how a call is parked on a SWCA key.  
Default: Manually - while parked.  
Automatically - life of call  
Manually - while parked: The user either presses a free SWCA key on the  
telephone, or dials the feature code for a free key. Once the call is retrieved, it is  
unassigned from the SWCA key.  
Manually - life of call: The user either presses a free SWCA key on the telephone, or  
dials the feature code for a free key. When the call is retrieved, it remains assigned  
to the SWCA key. The key is freed only after the call is terminated.  
Automatically - life of call: When a call is answered, it is automatically assigned to a  
free SWCA key, starting with the lowest available number. When the call is  
retrieved, it remains assigned to the SWCA key. The key is freed when the call is  
terminated.  
Include I/C calls when auto-associating  
<check box>  
Decide if you want intercom calls to automatically park on  
SWCA keys.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 79  
Table 27 SWCA controls (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute/Value  
Description  
If you select the check box...  
Auto-associate SWCA key to call must be set to Automatically - Life of call  
for this feature to work.  
When the user makes a call using the intercom button, the call automatically  
associates with a free SWCA key, and remains assigned for the duration of the  
call.  
If you do not select the check box...  
The user must assign manually an intercom call to a SWCA key.  
The call will behaves otherwise by the rules of the choice made for Associate  
SWCA key to call.  
Invoke SWCA parking by Hold  
<check box>  
Choose whether calls that are placed on hold are assign  
automatically to a SWCA key.  
If you select the check box...  
When the user presses Hold, the system attempts to repark the call on the  
current SWCA key assigned to the call, or on a free SWCA key programmed on  
the telephone.  
If no SWCA is currently associated with the call (Automatically - life of call is not  
turned on), and there is no free SWCA key to assign to the call, the call remains  
on Hold on the line on which it enters.  
Note: In this case, the call is not available to other telephones in the group until  
it can be assigned to a SWCA key, or unless they have the same line  
appearance as the held call.  
If you do not select the check box...  
There is no interaction with SWCA keys. The call remains on Hold on the line on  
which it enters, and is not available to other telephones in the SWCA group,  
unless the user manually assigns the call to a SWCA key, or unless those  
telephones have the same line appearance as the held call.  
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold  
Choose whether intercom calls put on Hold are assigned  
automatically to a SWCA key.  
<check box>  
If you select the check box...  
Invoke SWCA parking by Hold must be checked to activate this feature.  
When the user makes an intercom call, and puts it on Hold, the call works in the  
same manner as described in Invoke SWCA parking by Hold, selected.  
If you do not select the check box...  
Intercom calls are held on the local line, regardless of whether you select the  
Invoke SWCA parking by Hold.  
If the intercom call is assigned to a SWCA key automatically, you can press the  
SWCA key to repark the call, and make it available to other telephones in the  
group.  
If you manually assign the intercom call to a SWCA key, the call is parked  
automatically, and it becomes available to the rest of the group.  
Also refer to:  
•
“Common dialing plan settings” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606)(Call Park codes)  
•
“Timers” on page 76 (Park timeout)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
80 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings  
•
•
“Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on page 207  
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) Features Card  
ONN Blocking (North American systems)  
The outgoing name and number blocking codes for Analog and BRI lines can vary between  
service providers. This panel allows you to enter the code provided, so this feature works correctly  
over the network.  
Figure 28 ONN Blocking codes for Tone, Pulse and BRI trunks  
Table 28 describes these trunks.  
Table 28 ONN Blocking values  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Tone  
<feature digits>  
Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number  
display over an analog tone line.  
Pulse  
BRI  
<feature digits>  
<feature digits>  
Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number  
display over an analog pulse line.  
Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number  
display over a BRI trunk.  
Also refer to:  
•
“Protecting outgoing call privacy” on page 213.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 81  
Silent Monitor  
The features in this dialog box provide the parameters that determine how you can use supervisor  
terminals on your system to monitor Hunt group members (“Monitoring external hunt group calls”  
on page 107).  
Figure 29 Silent Monitor settings  
Table 29 describes the fields in this dialog box.  
Table 29 Silent Monitor system settings  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Monitoring mode  
Non silent  
Silent  
Choose Non silent if you want the hunt group member and the  
caller to hear a conference tone when a supervisor breaks into a  
hunt group conversation.  
Choose Silent if you want supervisors to be able to break into a hunt  
group conversation without giving an indicator of their presence.  
Note: Initial monitoring is muted at the supervisor set. If the  
supervisor wants to speak within the conversation, a display key on  
the two-line display becomes available, once the connection is  
established.  
The default changes based on country profile.  
Number of SM sets <1 to 30>  
SM password XXXXXX  
Indicate the number of two-line telephones in your system that you  
will allow to be used as supervisory telephones. Default: 5  
Enter a six-digit password that must be entered after the supervisor  
presses FEATURE *550. To maintain system security, change this  
password frequently.  
Default: 745368 (SILENT)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
82 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings  
Reset logs  
You can reset the log cache on the system by using the button on the Advanced Features Settings  
panel.  
Figure 30 System log reset  
Table 30 describes the fields in this box.  
Table 30 Silent Monitor system settings  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Reset Logs  
button  
Opens Reset Call Log Space dialog box.  
Reset Call Log Space dialog box  
Space per log  
<Space=number of calls>  
Enter amount of space each telephone that supports logs  
has.  
# of sets with logs  
<digits>  
Indicate the number of telephones that will create call logging.  
Also refer to:  
•
“Monitoring Hunt Groups” on page 107  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
83  
Chapter 9  
Telephony system and device programming  
The following list provides links to the telephone and telephony system programming areas of the  
system.  
Within the context of the network, system telephones act as call end points or call initiation  
devices.  
•
•
To make or receive calls, telephones must be set up with the correct line assignments.  
To make calls, users must know the correct destination codes and dial strings to reach other  
internal or external devices.  
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606) for connections to the  
sections that describe line setup and numbering plans.  
How telephones handle incoming and outgoing call traffic is determined by telephone features.  
Some telephone features are set up for the entire system, while other parameters are configured on  
a per-device basis.  
System-wide telephony feature configuration  
The system telephony settings must be set correctly to ensure that telephones can be  
programmed correctly.  
•
“Global telephony settings” on page 71  
Telephone record configuration  
When the system features are determined, the telephone DN records allow you to refine how  
each telephone interacts with the system. DN record configuration can depend on what  
features you want to allow users to access, or what features the type of telephone can support.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“DN records parameters” on page 41  
“Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs” on page 69  
“Configuring telephones: Digital telephones” on page 119  
“Configuring analog telephones and devices” on page 115  
“DN records: ISDN devices” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Configuring telephones: IP telephones” on page 135  
“Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone” on page 147  
Optional system features:  
There are also several optional telephony system features that you can use to enhance the  
telephone system.  
— “Configuring system speed dial numbers” on page 85  
— “Creating ring groups” on page 95  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
84 Chapter 9 Telephony system and device programming  
— “System schedule settings and services scheduling” on page 29  
— “Configuring Hunt Groups” on page 99  
— “Configuring Hospitality services” on page 109  
— Voice mail, if applicable  
Also refer to:  
•
“Telephony features” on page 187  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
Chapter 10  
Configuring system speed dial numbers  
System speed dial codes are assigned to external numbers. You can use then the two- or three-digit  
code to dial the number, or assign the code to a memory button, instead of dialing the entire string.  
These assignments are the same for all users in the system.  
The following paths indicate where to access system speed dial programming in Element Manager  
and through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > System Speed Dial  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > System Speed dials  
Panels/Subpanels  
Configuring features and tasks  
“System Speed Dial panel” on page 85  
“Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)” in the  
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab” on  
page 58  
“Programming memory buttons” on page 222  
“Speed dialing” on page 221  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services.  
System Speed Dial panel  
This panel allows you to determine the number of speed dial codes on the system, and what each  
code dials.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
86 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers  
Figure 31 System Speed Dial table  
Table 31 describes each field on this panel.  
Table 31 System Speed Dial (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Values  
Description  
Number of speed  
dials  
70  
Choose the number of speed dial codes you want available to your  
system users.  
255  
If you are using alpha tagging, you can choose the larger list to  
accommodate your incoming call requirements. Also refer to “Using  
alpha tagging for name display (incoming)” BCM 4.0 Networking  
Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
CLID match length <3-8>  
None  
Indicate the number of digits, starting from the right of the dial  
string, that the system needs to match between an incoming call  
and a system speed dial listing to prompt the alpha tagging display.  
When a match is made, the system provides a name or number  
display for any calls coming in over analog lines that allow number  
CLID.  
Also refer to “Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)”  
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Default: 8  
System Speed Dials table  
Speed Dial  
Number  
<001-070 or 001-255>  
Displays dial codes for the System Speed Dial list.  
External Number  
<dial string (max. 24  
digits)>  
Displays the number the system dials when the code is entered.  
Remember to include required destination codes.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers 87  
Table 31 System Speed Dial (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Facility  
Use prime line  
Use line  
Select the route you want the dialed number to remove from your  
system.  
Note: Any lines or pool codes that you specify must be assigned to  
the telephone where the code is entered.  
If you choose prime line, a prime line must be assigned to the  
telephone where the code is entered.  
Pool code  
Use routing table  
Refer to “Line Access tab” on page 44.  
Display  
Name  
Digits, Name  
Digits = the speed dial number displays  
Name = the first 16 characters of the name defined for the speed  
dial displays  
<alphanumeric>  
Enter a descriptive name for the owner or business code dials.  
Note: For alpha tagging, this is the name that the system displays if  
there is a number match with an incoming call.  
Bypass restrictions <check box>  
Disabled = the dialed number uses the line and set restrictions  
Enabled = the dialed number bypasses any line and set restrictions  
Notes about the System Speed Dial list  
The following provides general notes about using the System Speed Dial panel.  
Choose the size of the speed dial list  
•
•
The default list consists of 70 speed dial codes from 01 to 70.  
If you set Number of speed dials to 255, the codes are 001 to 255.  
If you want to use alpha tagging (see “Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)” in  
the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)), you can increase the number of  
codes to allow for more matching possibilities for incoming calls.  
Note: If the number of speed dial numbers is increased from 70 to 255,  
the system speed dial codes are three digits. For example speed dial  
numbers 01-40 become, 001-040. The user speed dial numbers remain  
two digits.  
Programming System speed dials  
System speed dials are programmed under Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings >  
System Speed Dial, where you specify the internal or external dialed number, a name, and  
whether you want the system to ignore dialing restrictions.  
System Speed Dials:  
•
Provide a list of codes and numbers to your users.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers  
Working with speed dial list entries  
To add, change, or delete System Speed Dial records, click the field you want to alter, and type in  
the change required.  
Caution: Resource issue  
Entering a large number of system speed dials at one time can impact system performance.  
Therefore, it is best to perform this activity during low-user periods, whenever possible.  
Next steps  
Speed dial codes can be programmed onto memory keys by the installer during button  
programming. Refer to “Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab” on page 58.  
Also, each user can assign speed dial codes directly to memory buttons on the telephone. Refer to  
the “Programming memory buttons” on page 222 for instructions on using memory keys.  
For information on using speed dials, and for programming speed dial codes at the telephone, refer  
to “Speed dialing” on page 221.  
Ensure that you publish a list of system speed dial codes for the users. The Programming Records  
( **session save selected data) allow you to keep a record of these codes.  
Also refer to:  
•
“User speed dials” on page 132  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
Chapter 11  
DMC Feature List  
The Digital Mobility Controller (DMC) Feature list enables you to arrange the order of the features  
that appear as soft keys on a Digital Mobility 7420/7430/7440 handset. This is a system-wide  
feature that enables users to access frequently used features.  
The following paths indicate where to access the DMC Feature List in Element Manager and in  
telset administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > DMC Feature List  
Telset Admin: **CONFIG > System Programming > DMC Feat List  
The following features are available in the following default positions:  
•
•
•
•
•
Position 1: PARK (Call Park, F74)  
Position 2: PAGE (General Page, F60)  
Position 3: VM (Voicemail login, F981)  
Position 4: CFAC (Call Forward, F4)  
Position 5: PKUP (Group Pickup, F75)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
90 Chapter 11 DMC Feature List  
Arranging the DMC Feature list using Element Manager  
Figure 32 DMC Feature List panel  
To arrange the DMC Feature list using Element Manager  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > DMC Feature List.  
The Digital Mobility Controller Feature List panel appears.  
2
In the Position 1 field, select the feature from the list.  
Note: The feature currently in that position swaps positions with the  
selected feature.  
3
Select the order of the features in Positions 2 through 5.  
Note: If you do not want to program all five features, None is also an  
option.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
91  
Chapter 12  
Setting up central answering positions  
A CAP (Central Answering Position) station acts as a central answering and monitoring point for a  
group or a business.  
The following paths indicate where to set up a CAP in Element Manager and through Telset  
Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > CAP Assignment  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > System prgrming > CAP/KIM assignment  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panels  
Tasks  
“Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs)” on page 92 “Programming CAP/KIM buttons” on page 93  
“Managing lines on a KIM” on page 94  
“DN records parameters” on page 41  
“Moving line buttons” on page 189  
See also:  
“Hunt Group members and lines” on page 103  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management.  
CAPs become enhanced CAPs (eCAPs) when you identify the telephone DN under the CAP/KIM  
assignment. You can configure a maximum of 12 CAPs as eCAPs on the system.  
All CAPs can be programmed with quick dial numbers that allow the person at this station to  
monitor and answer call traffic into the group. If you program the CAP to be an eCAP, lines, hunt  
group appearances, and line appearances can also be moved to the module.  
Also refer to the following topics:  
•
•
•
“Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs)” on page 92  
“Managing lines on a KIM” on page 94  
“Programming CAP/KIM buttons” on page 93  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
92 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions  
Figure 33 7316E with KIM  
7316E digital phone  
with one KIM  
Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs)  
Use the CAP Assignment panel to designate 7316E+KIM units as eCAPs. The following  
procedures describe how to use the fields on the CAP Assignment panel.  
Figure 34 CAP Assignment panel  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions 93  
To create CAP stations  
1
Ensure that the telephone you want to use is configured and working on the system.  
Note: CAPs are available only on T7316E and M7324 digital sets and  
2002, 2004, and 2007 IP sets.  
2
Ensure that the KIM is installed on the appropriate telephone.  
Refer to the installation user card that came with the module, if necessary.  
3
4
On the CAP Assignment table, click the line for the CAP you want to configure as an eCAP.  
Select the Set DN field and type the DN for the telephone.  
CAP notes  
•
If CAPs are not designated as eCAPs, the system can support as many CAPs as the system  
resources can support. The modules on these caps are referred to as ordinary KIMs (OKIMs),  
and the buttons on the module support only memory button programming.  
•
A Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) is not required for 7316E digital phones attached to  
four or fewer KIMs. If the KIMs are designated as eKIMs, you can only attach a maximum of  
four modules to a 7316E. If the KIMs are designated as OKIMs, you can attach up to nine  
modules to the 7316E. You must add a SAPS if more than four KIMs are added to the 7316E.  
Note also that the line loop to the CAP cannot be greater than 304.8 m (1000 feet).  
•
•
If a KIM module is relocated with the telephone, the settings are retained on the module.  
Replacing CAPs: If you replace a legacy eCAP (7324+CAP) with a 7316E+eKIM, the line  
assignments are copied to the new telephone, but not to the eKIM. The telephone  
programming reverts to the default settings for other buttons. Also, if you move an eKIM from  
one 7316E to another, programming does not follow.  
If you move an OKIM from one 7316E to another, the KIM retains memory button  
programming.  
•
Legacy equipment notes: A SAPS is required for 7324 digital phones that have one or more  
CAP modules attached.  
Programming CAP/KIM buttons  
Designating features or autodial numbers to the eKIM buttons can be performed using the  
CAP/KIM Button Programming panel.  
To program module buttons  
1
2
3
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets:  
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
Select the DN for the CAP you want to configure.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
94 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions  
4
5
6
In the lower panel, click the CAP/KIM Button Programming tab.  
Select the line for the button number that you want to program.  
Configure the feature or autodial on the button.  
For a detailed description of each field, refer to “Capabilities and Preferences - Button  
Programming tab” on page 58.  
Note: You cannot assign lines, target lines, or Hunt group indicators using button  
programming. These must be performed through assigning lines to the telephone (“Line  
Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 46), and, for hunt groups, configuring the  
telephone as a Hunt group member (“Hunt Group members and lines” on page 103). These  
lines are either moved to the modules, or overflow to the module, if the telephone buttons  
cannot accommodate the new settings.  
You cannot assign Hunt group DNs as an autodial button on the KIM modules.  
Managing lines on a KIM  
If the 7316E+KIM is configured as an eCAP, you can move lines onto the module using  
FEATURE *81 on the telephone. You can also reassign Hunt group designators to the KIM  
module by using the same feature.  
You can also force lines onto the KIM by assigning more lines than the telephone buttons can  
support. Extra lines automatically flow over to the module; however they flow sequentially,  
starting on the top left at button 01. Also, they overwrite any existing programming on the KIM,  
except existing line or hunt group (KIM) assignments.  
Any of the buttons, without assigned lines, can be programmed to dial internal or external numbers  
automatically, or to access a feature. Refer to “Programming CAP/KIM buttons” on page 93.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
95  
Chapter 13  
Creating ring groups  
Assigning telephones to ringing groups provides a way to ensure that all calls can be answered,  
regardless of the time of day, or day of the week. The most common use of this feature is when a  
security desk telephone rings for incoming lines after 5:00 p.m., a practice often called night  
service.  
The following paths indicate where to configure ring groups in Element Manager and through  
Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Ring Groups  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Services > Ringing service > Ringing Groups  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panels  
“Ring Groups - Members” on page 96  
“Ring Groups - Line Settings tab” on page 97  
Configure Tasks or Features  
“Configuring scheduled service” on page 31  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management.  
Each non-auto-answer line and target line can be assigned a ringing group for each schedule. If no  
schedule is set for ringing services, lines ring at any telephones with the lines assigned.  
Note: VoIP trunking lines and PRI lines are set automatically to auto-answer  
and, therefore, require target lines. BRI lines set to auto-answer also ring at  
target lines. Therefore, by specifying target lines in a ring group, all  
auto-answer lines can be forwarded to the telephones indicated.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
96 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups  
Ring Groups - Members  
The Ring Groups table on the Group Membership tab in the top frame of this panel is a read-only  
list of the 100 ring groups available to the system.  
When you click a ring group in the table, the Members table appears in the bottom panel.  
The Group Membership panel allows you to define which telephones belong to each ring group.  
A DN can be associated with multiple ring groups.  
Figure 35 Adding members to ring groups  
Table 32 describes the fields on this panel.  
Table 32 Ring groups panel (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Ring Groups  
Ring Group  
Members  
DN  
<read-only>  
<DN digits>  
This is a list of the available ring groups for the system.  
These are the DNs for the telephones that are part of the ringing group selected  
in the table in the top frame.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 13 Creating ring groups 97  
Table 32 Ring groups panel (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Actions  
Add  
1. In the top panel, click the ring group where you want to add telephones.  
2. In the bottom panel, click Add.  
The Add Member dialog box appears.  
3. Enter a DN that you want to associate with the ring group.  
4. Click OK to save the new members setting.  
Delete  
1. In the top panel, click the ring group where you want to delete telephones.  
2. On the Members table, click one or more DNs that you want to delete from the group.  
3. Click Delete.  
4. Click Yes.  
Ring Groups - Line Settings tab  
The Line Settings tab allows you to schedule where calls coming in on a specific line, or target  
line, ring during a scheduled period.  
The following paths indicate where to configure line settings for ring groups in Element Manager  
and through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Ring Groups  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Lines  
There are two frames on this panel:  
•
•
The top panel displays all lines that are available for programming as part of the ring group.  
This does not include VoIP trunks and PRI lines. For both these types of lines, you would use  
target lines.  
When you select a line on the top panel, the Lines Settings panel appears in the bottom of the  
panel. Use this table to specify schedule settings for each line.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
98 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups  
Figure 36 Ring Group lines  
Table 33 describes the headings on both these panels.  
Table 33 Ringing group schedule line values  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Lines Settings tab:  
Line  
XXX  
This list includes all analog and digital lines plus the target lines (PRI and  
VoIP lines). Program only those that are active on the system.  
Line Settings panel:  
Schedules  
Ring Group  
<read-only>  
You only need to configure the schedules that you use for your system.  
Ring Group <XXX> Type in a ring group number (001-100).  
Only one ring group can be assigned to a line for each schedule. To combine  
groups of ringing sets, you must create a new Ring Group that contains all the  
sets you want to ring, and assign it to the line.  
Aux. Ringer  
<check box>  
This variable indicates whether the auxiliary ringer (if installed) also rings  
when Ringing service is on.  
Tips:  
•
The default ringing telephone is 221 (Start DN). This means that all lines  
ring at telephone 221 when Ringing service is on.  
•
If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external  
line, and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer,  
the auxiliary ringer rings for the call transfer.  
Also refer to:  
•
“Configuring scheduled service” on page 31  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
99  
Chapter 14  
Configuring Hunt Groups  
The Hunt Groups panel allows you to set up call groups that are assigned a common hunt group  
DN for incoming calls. The calls then are distributed to the member telephones.  
The following paths indicate where to configure hunt groups in Element Manager and through  
Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Hunt Groups  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > System prgrming > Hunt Groups  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panel tabs  
Tasks  
“Hunt Groups system setup” on page 100  
“Hunt Group members and lines” on page 103  
Also refer to:  
“Configuring the Hunt Group general settings” on page 103  
“Monitoring Hunt Groups” on page 107  
“Programming name display (outgoing)” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Silent Monitor” on page 81  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
100 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups  
Hunt Groups system setup  
The main panel shown in Figure 37 lists the Hunt Groups and the parameters that define Hunt  
Group features.  
Figure 37 Hunt Groups  
Table 34 describes the fields found on the Hunt Groups main panel. Refer to “Configuring the  
Hunt Group general settings” on page 103 for notes about working with this table.  
Table 34 Hunt Group settings (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
HG  
<01-30>  
This number identifies the hunt group to the system. This is also  
the number assigned to the telephone, when you add the  
telephone as a Hunt Group member.  
Name  
DN  
<alphanumeric>  
Enter a logical name that describes the group function. This name  
also acts as calling line display for incoming calls.  
Read-only (625-654)  
Hunt Group DNs begin at 625 by default.  
The DN value can be changed under Configuration >  
Telephony > Dialing Plan > DNs. The DN number can be  
assigned to memory buttons on telephones that are not part of  
the hunt group.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 101  
Table 34 Hunt Group settings (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Mode  
Broadcast  
Sequential  
Rotary  
Select how you want the line to present to the group.  
Broadcast — simultaneously rings at each non-busy telephone  
in the hunt group. All telephones receiving the call also display  
the calling line identification from the line, if the telephone or line  
is configured to offer that service. Any of the alerted telephones  
can access the call.  
Only one call is presented to a hunt group at a time. Other calls  
are queued until the first call is answered. Then the next call rings  
on the remaining non-busy telephones. This feature allows the  
call load to be continuously spread across the entire member  
group.  
Default: Broadcast  
Sequential — rings the first telephone in the hunt group list. If  
that telephone is busy, the system continues down the hunt group  
priority list until a non-busy telephone accepts the call. In this  
case, all incoming calls are processed simultaneously, and are  
delivered based on the priority list.  
With this feature, you can program your top salesperson to be the  
first member of the Hunt group to receive incoming calls.  
Rotary — the call starts at the member telephone that appears  
on the list after the telephone that answered the last call. If that  
telephone is busy, the system proceeds down the priority list until  
a non-busy telephone is reached. As many incoming calls can be  
processed as there are available telephones to accept the call,  
each call being presented in the described round-robin fashion.  
Hunt Delay  
If Busy  
<1-10>  
If Mode is either Sequential or Rotary, Hunt Delay specifies how  
much time to delay offering a Queued call to a member telephone  
when that telephone becomes available.  
This is to provide a break period for the users between calls.  
Default: 4 seconds  
Busy tone  
Queue  
Select how you want the system to respond if all lines appear as  
busy.  
Busy tone: If all lines are busy, the user receives a busy tone.  
Queue: If all lines are busy, the user hears ring back until an  
agent is available.  
Default: Busy tone  
Queue timeout  
15, 30, 45, 60, 120, or 180  
(seconds)  
Select the time for a call to remain in the Hunt Group.  
This value defines the maximum time a call remains queued, and  
the maximum time to offer a call before sending it to overflow if it  
is not answered.  
If the queue times out before the call connects to a member  
telephone, the call is terminated.  
If the call has been offered to a member telephone, but is not  
answered when the queue times out, the call is rerouted to the  
overflow DN.  
Default: 60  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
102 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups  
Table 34 Hunt Group settings (Sheet 3 of 3)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Overflow  
<any system DN> (including This setting determines where unanswered calls are routed after  
a Hunt Group DN)  
the Queue timeout occurs.  
If a call overflows back to the same Hunt Group, the call goes to  
the bottom of the queue, and is treated as a new call.  
Answer DNs: A linear hunt group that has defined an overflow  
telephone does not support having the overflow telephone  
assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member. If this  
occurs, the Answer DN does ring at the hunt group telephone  
when an overflow condition occurs. Answer DNs are set up under  
the Line Access heading for each DN. Refer to “Answer DNs” on  
page 196. Answer key must be set to Extended for overflow to  
work correctly. Refer to “Answer DN answer key levels” on  
page 76.  
Default: Hunt Group DN  
Aux. Ringer  
Distinct ring  
<check box>  
If selected, defines whether an auxiliary ringer (if installed) rings  
for incoming calls to a hunt group.  
If cleared, the control of the auxiliary ringer falls back to the  
control defined on a per telephone or per line basis.  
None  
Select a ring pattern for the hunt group.  
Default: None  
Pattern 2, 3 or 4  
Warning:  
If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group, all calls offered to telephones in the  
group will use the assigned ring pattern. If no pattern is assigned, or if the ring pattern is lower in  
status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone setting, the call uses the ring pattern with  
the highest status setting.  
Refer to the sections that describe configuring Lines (“Trunk/Line Data, main panel” in the  
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)) and DNs (“Line Access tab” on page 44)  
for information about assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 103  
Configuring the Hunt Group general settings  
When you first set up a Hunt Group, you must identify how calls are handled among the group.  
The following paths indicate where to modify hunt group general settings in Element Manager and  
through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Hunt groups  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > System prgrming > Hunt groups  
To configure hunt groups  
1
2
On the Hunt Groups table, select the hunt group you want to configure.  
Fill out the columns across the table as required. Refer to the table in the previous section for  
details about each field.  
Programming note: A linear hunt group DN assigned as the overflow telephone does not  
support having the hunt group DN assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member. If  
this occurs, the Answer DN does not ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow  
condition occurs. If the hunt group DN overflow telephone whether assigned as an Answer  
DN to a non-group member, ensure that the Answer key for your system is set to Extended.  
•
Aux. Ringer: If an external ringer is installed, indicate if the hunt group calls use it (select  
check box).  
•
Distinct Ring: Define if incoming hunt calls have a different ring than other calls received  
by the member.  
Programming note: If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group, all calls  
offered to telephones in the group use the assigned ring pattern. If no pattern is assigned,  
or if the ring pattern is lower in status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone  
setting, the call uses the ring pattern with the highest status setting.  
Refer to the sections that describe configuring Lines and DNs for information about  
assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones.  
Hunt Group members and lines  
The lower frame of the Hunt Group panel shows a list of DNs that are assigned as members of the  
group, and the lines assigned to the hunt group.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
104 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups  
Figure 38 Hunt Group Members and Line Assignment tables  
Table 35 describes the fields found on the Details for Hunt Groups tables.  
Table 35 Hunt Group tables (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Hunt Group Members subpanel  
Seq. No.  
DN  
<read-only>  
<DN>  
This is the position of the telephone on the list. This is particularly  
important for linear calls, which start at the top of the list, and  
move sequentially through the list.  
This is the DN of the telephone assigned to this hunt group.  
Appearance Type Ring only  
Appr&Ring  
Select the setting that suits the telephone and the environment.  
Ring only: Telephone rings when a call comes in. (7000 and  
7100 digital phones and telephones that have no available  
programmable memory buttons with indicators)  
Appr only  
(model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only.)  
Appr&Ring: Appears on a button with indicator, which flashes  
when a call comes in, and it also rings.  
Appr only: Appears on a button with indicator, which flashes  
when a call comes in.  
Action  
Add  
1. On the Hunt Groups panel, select the group where you want to add members.  
2. In the Members subpanel in the lower frame, click Add.  
3. Enter the DN for the telephone you want to add as a member.  
4. Select an Appearance Type from the drop-down list.  
Delete  
1. On the Hunt Groups panel, select the hunt group where you want to delete members.  
2. In the Members subpanel in the lower frame, click the DN row to be removed.  
3. Click Delete located under the Hunt Group Members subpanel.  
4. Click Yes.  
Up  
Member order within a Hunt group is important. The member order determines how a call routes  
through a Hunt group when the group is set to either linear or rotary mode.  
Down  
1. Click a member from the member list.  
2. Click either the Up or the Down button. The system automatically reorders the list.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 105  
Table 35 Hunt Group tables (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Line Assignment  
Lines  
<line #>  
These are the lines/target lines that are assigned to the hunt  
group. Ensure that they also are not assigned to any of the  
member telephones.  
Action  
Add  
Multiple lines can be assigned to Hunt groups. However, a line can only exist in one Hunt group.  
Programming note: Lines assigned to line buttons on individual telephones take precedence  
over the lines assigned to Hunt group buttons. Therefore, Nortel recommends that you do not  
assign lines to individual telephone DN records for telephones that are part of a Hunt group.  
1. On the Hunt Groups Members subpanel, select the hunt group where you want to add lines.  
2. In the Line Assignment subpanel in the lower frame, click Add.  
3. Enter line numbers.  
4. Click OK.  
Delete  
1. On the Hunt Groups Members subpanel, select the hunt group where you want to delete  
lines.  
2. In the Line Assignment subpanel in the lower frame, click Delete.  
3. Click Yes.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
Chapter 15  
Monitoring Hunt Groups  
Task:  
• Monitor external Hunt group calls (“Monitoring external hunt group calls” on page 107).  
Monitoring external hunt group calls  
Use the Silent Monitor feature to monitor external hunt group calls within a hunt group. Any  
two-line display telephone can be assigned as a supervisor telephone to allow this feature.  
There are two places in the Element Manager where the feature configured:  
•
Silent Monitor settings are configured on the Global Settings panel. Refer to “Silent Monitor”  
on page 81.  
•
Supervisor terminals are configured on the System DNs record. Refer to “Capabilities and  
Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 52.  
On the Telset, there are three places to set up this feature:  
•
•
•
SM supervisor  
SM password  
DN records, capabilities  
To use a silent monitor  
Perform the following using a two-line display telephone designated as a supervisor telephone.  
1
2
3
Enter FEATURE *550.  
Enter the Silent Monitor password. (Default: SILENT (745368))  
Enter the DN for the Hunt group member you want to monitor.  
If there is an active external Hunt group call at that telephone, you are connected to the call.  
Once the session is established, a number of display key prompts allows the supervisor to  
silently monitor the call, or to break into the call to provide support or instruction. Refer to  
“Common display prompts” on page 233.  
4
The display commands under the prompts allow you to use the display keys to break into the  
call or exit and move to another DN.  
Note: Some countries require that all monitoring is preceded by a tone  
before monitoring begins.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
108 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt Groups  
Note: If an agent is on conference call, you cannot monitor the hunt  
group call.  
Monitoring with IP telephones: On calls over an VoIP trunk, where both the Hunt group call and  
the monitoring call are from IP telephones (full IP domain calls), the agent hears a click when the  
supervisor starts and ends a monitor session.  
Note: For information on reporting Hunt Group metrics, refer to the  
BCM 4.0 Call Detail Recording Guide (N0027926).  
Also refer to:  
•
•
“Configuring Hunt Groups” on page 99  
“Monitoring external hunt group calls” on page 107  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
109  
Chapter 16  
Configuring Hospitality services  
The following information describes how to set up the Hospitality services feature.  
The following paths indicate where to configure hospitality services in Element Manager and  
through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Hospitality  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > System prgrming  
These records allow facilities such as hotels, motels, and hospitals to control telephone access to  
external lines, to provide alarm clock services on internal telephones, and to monitor room  
serviced status:  
Panels  
Tasks  
“Hospitality - General” on page 109  
“Hospitality - Rooms” on page 111  
“Setting up your hospitality system” on page 112  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services.  
Hospitality - General  
The Hospitality - General panel contains the administration programming for the Hospitality  
Services feature. The panel is shown in Figure 39.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
110 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services  
Figure 39 Hospitality panel, General tab  
The Administration heading provides fields that allow you to:  
•
•
•
enter the time when occupied rooms change state from Service done to Service required  
enter the password that needs to be entered before hospitality features can be changed  
(optional) enter a password that the room service people need to enter to allow them to  
indicate when the room is ready.  
Security Note: Change the desk and room condition passwords regularly.  
!
Table 36 explains the possible settings for the hospitality record.  
Table 36 Hospitality main settings (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Administration  
Service change time  
<24-hour digital time>  
Identify when the occupied rooms change  
from service done to service required.  
Format: HHMM, i.e. 1400 = 2 p.m. where  
HH = 0 to 23; MM = 0 to 59  
Desk password  
<up to six digits>  
Enter the password required to access all the  
Hospitality administrative features.  
Default password: 4677 (HOSP)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 111  
Table 36 Hospitality main settings (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Field  
Values  
Description  
Room condition password <up to six digits>  
Set the password that allows access to the  
Room condition feature (FEATURE 876).  
Default password: None  
Nortel strongly recommends that you change the default password, and  
frequently change the desk password to prevent unauthorized entry.  
!
Call Restrictions  
Vacant filter  
<two-digit filter #>  
<two-digit filter #>  
<two-digit code>  
Enter a code that indicates which calls are  
allowed when a room is empty (for  
example, 911).  
Basic filter  
Mid filter  
Enter a code that indicates which calls are  
allowed for a basic room telephone. (for  
example 911, and internal calls only)  
Enter a code that indicates which calls are  
allowed for a telephone with mid service. (for  
example 911, internal calls, and 1-800  
numbers only)  
Full filter  
<two-digit code>  
Enter a code that indicates which calls are  
allowed for a telephone with full service. (i.e.  
no restrictions)  
Wake-Up Call Settings  
Attempts  
<1-5>  
Select the number of times the Alarm time  
feature attempts to alert the occupant before  
cancelling.  
Default: 3  
Retry interval  
2, 4, 6, 8 (minutes)  
Select the interval between each attempt to  
send the alarm.  
Default: 4  
Alarm duration (sec.)  
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, Select the period that a telephone rings for  
50 (seconds)  
each alarm attempt.  
Default: 15  
Expired Wake-Up Call Settings  
Notify DN  
None/DN: <telephone DN>  
Enter a telephone DN if you want to notify a  
specific telephone when an alarm expires.  
Use tone  
<check box>  
Select if you want the user to hear a tone  
when the alarm expires.  
Hospitality - Rooms  
The Hospitality - Rooms panel allows you to assign telephones to a room. You can assign a  
maximum of five telephone DNs to a room.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
112 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services  
Figure 40 Hospitality - Rooms tab panel  
Table 37 describes the fields in the list on this panel.  
Table 37 Room settings  
Field  
Values  
Description  
DN  
<Read-only>  
DN of a telephone assigned to a room.  
Name assigned to a DN.  
Name  
<Read-only>  
Model  
<Read-only>  
Model name from the DN record.  
Room Number  
<any digit from 1 to 32767>  
Enter the room that contains the telephone with  
this DN.  
Requires Desk  
Password  
<check box>  
If selected, the telephone requires a password to  
access administrative-level hospitality features  
(FEATURE 877, FEATURE 878, or  
FEATURE 879).  
If cleared, the telephone does not require any  
passwords to access the features.  
Desk passwords are created using the main  
Hospitality command.  
Setting up your hospitality system  
Use the Hospitality panels to set up room telephones, and determine how they function. Once the  
system is set up, you can change settings through the telephone using the Desk password. Service  
personnel change the service state of the room using the Room condition password (optional).  
To set up hospitality service  
1
Determine a time each day when the telephones switch to indicate that the rooms require  
servicing.  
2
In the Services change time field, enter a 24:00 time designator for the service time.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 113  
3
4
In the Requires Desk Password field, change the default password to a one- to six-digit  
number. Keep this password in a secure place. Change the password frequently.  
If you want service personnel to enter a password when they dial in to indicate a room has  
been serviced, enter a one- to six-digit password into the Room condition password field. This  
field can be left blank also.  
To set up call restrictions  
1
Determine what type of calls you want to allow from telephones using the fields in the call  
restrictions box.  
2
Click Configuration > Telephony > Call Security > Restriction Filters, create four new  
restriction filters that reflect the levels of service you want to allow. For instance, if a room is  
vacant, you can allow only emergency calls, whereas, in a suite, you can allow a full range of  
call services.  
3
4
Make a note of the restrictions that you create.  
On the Hospitality - General panel, in the Call Restrictions subpanel, enter the appropriate  
filter numbers beside each field.  
To set up wake-up services  
You can set up the room telephones to ring at preset times to act as an automatic wake-up call.  
In the Wake-Up Call Settings and Expired Wake-Up Call Settings boxes, determine the  
following:  
1
In the Attempts field, select the number of times the alerter sounds, without the telephone  
handset being lifted, before the alarm service automatically cancels.  
2
In the Retry interval field, select a time period (in minutes) that the system waits between  
repeating the wake-up alerter.  
3
4
In the Alarm duration field, select the length of time the alert sounds each time it repeats.  
In the Notify DN field, enter the DN of an administration telephone, such as the front desk  
telephone. When a wake-up call expires at any of the room telephones, an indication appears  
on the display of the telephone.  
5
If you also want a tone to sound when a wake-up call expires, select the Use tone check box.  
To assign a room to a telephone  
The Rooms context panel displays all telephones currently connected or registered to the system.  
1
2
Select the telephone DN you want to assign to a room.  
Click in the Room Number column, and enter the room number.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
114 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services  
3
Select or clear the Requires Desk Password check box, as required.  
Note: If you select the Requires Desk Password check box, ensure that  
a valid desk password exists.  
To delete a room assignment from a telephone  
To delete a room assignment, simply click the Room Number column, and delete the number.  
Next step: Using the features  
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Hospitality Features Card.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
115  
Chapter 17  
Configuring analog telephones and devices  
Refer to the following information for attributes that are specific to analog telephones and devices.  
Refer to “Configuring an analog telephone” on page 116.  
Task: Setting up each analog device attached to your system  
Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached to analog station  
modules or to digital station modules through an analog terminal adapter (ATA) module.  
•
“Configuring an analog telephone” on page 116  
Analog telephones and devices have a limited feature set. They do not have programmable  
buttons, access to remote voice mail systems, or user preferences. These telephones also do not  
support Answer DNs.  
As well, specific ATA settings are required. These settings depend on how the telephone is  
connected to the system (ASM, ASM8+, or ATA).  
Prerequisite programming:  
The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration:  
•
•
•
Numbering plan  
Lines programming  
Analog or digital module installation, configuration and wiring to the devices (ATA module, if  
required).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
116 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices  
Analog device DN record overview  
Configuring an analog telephone  
On each panel on the DNs list, add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations. The  
following headings correspond to each panel.  
Refer to the Programming notes in each section for configurations that are unique or specific for  
ISDN telephones.  
Table 38 Analog telephone customization (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Affected field  
Setting  
Panel name and link to common procedures  
Model  
Name  
Other  
“System DNs - Line Access tab” on page 121  
Unique to each device or  
device loop  
Appearance Type  
Caller ID Set  
Ring only  
“Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 124  
Select check box (connected  
to ASM8+ modules or target  
lines)  
Answer DNs  
Ring only  
Intercom keys  
Two: not configurable  
“Configuring Capabilities and Preferences” on  
page 125.  
The following settings are the only capability settings that are valid for analog devices.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices 117  
Table 38 Analog telephone customization (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Affected field  
Setting  
Panel name and link to common procedures  
ATA answer timer  
Keep short for modems and “Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 126.  
fax machines  
ATA tones  
ATA use  
check box  
On site  
Off site works for devices  
connected to ATA modules  
only  
Msg indicate  
ATA device  
modem/telephone  
Disconnect supervision  
Select for auto-answer  
modems and fax machines  
Do not select for telephones  
The following settings are common settings that are specific to analog telephones.  
Handsfree/HF Answerback  
Page settings  
Do not select  
“Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 126  
Select check box  
Can send pages but cannot  
receive pages  
Receive short tones  
Hotline  
Select check box (analog  
telephones only)  
“Assigning a pause for  
external dialing for data  
devices” on page 118  
The following settings are not valid (N/V) or are limited on analog devices.  
Keep DN Alive  
SM Supervision  
DND on Busy  
Priority Calls  
N/V  
“Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 126  
Do not select  
Do not select  
Do not select  
Auto hold for incoming page Do not select  
Set Link  
Select check box (telephones “Outgoing call restrictions” on page 132  
only)  
All other settings are variable, based on your system requirements.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices  
Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices  
The external Hotline feature provides automatic access to a line when an analog device goes  
off-hook.  
To assign a pause for external dialing  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets.  
Select the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom panel, select the Preferences tab.  
In the Hotline type drop-down list, select External.  
Set the Facility field to Use prime line.  
Enter F78 in the External number field. This feature code inserts a 1.5-second pause before the  
device dials out.  
Next step:  
•
Test telephones.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
119  
Chapter 18  
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
Digital telephones support the most comprehensive use of the DN records panels. For detailed  
panel descriptions, refer to “DN records parameters” on page 41.  
The following paths indicate where to configure digital telephones in Element Manager and  
through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Terminals and Sets  
The list of procedures below are the common DN record configuration procedures.  
Task: Setting up digital telephones wired to system station ports  
Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached directly to digital  
media bay modules, or the fixed digital ports on the main chassis.  
“Digital telephone DN record overview” on page 120  
“System DNs - Line Access tab” on page 121  
“Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 124  
“Configuring Capabilities and Preferences” on page 125  
“Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 126  
“Configuring Preferences” on page 129  
“Telephone memory button programming” on page 131  
“User speed dials” on page 132  
“Outgoing call restrictions” on page 132  
There are a number of different models of digital telephones. The Norstar legacy telephones are  
supported by the BCM. The current models of digital telephones include the 7000, 7100, 7208,  
7316, 7316E, and 7316E+KIMs digital phones, and the 74XX cordless digital phones.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
120 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
Digital telephone DN record overview  
Prerequisites  
Ensure the following has occurred before you start this procedure:  
Modules are installed, and you understand which ports and DNs can be assigned  
to your telephones.  
Lines and routes programming are created for dialing the local PSTN. Target lines  
are created where required by the type of trunks you are using. Note: The line  
must be configured as supervised/guarded. Refer to “Properties” in the BCM 4.0  
Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Appropriate restriction filters are created to allow or disallow out-dialed calls. (“Call  
Security: Restriction filters” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606))  
Telephony system features have been programmed, and you understand which  
features are not available to all users. (“Global telephony settings” on page 71)  
Using the DN panels  
On each panel on the DNs list, add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations.  
For a detailed description of the fields on each panel, refer to “DN records parameters” on page 41.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 121  
System DNs - Line Access tab  
References: “Job aid: Notes about assigning lines to telephones” on page 121.  
To assign a line to a telephone  
1
2
3
4
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets.  
Select the line listing the appropriate DN for the telephone.  
Select the field that you want to modify.  
Name: Enter a name that identifies the user or the location (maximum of seven digits).  
Under the Properties tab:  
5
6
7
8
9
Pub. OLI: Enter or confirm the number that displays at the far end for calls going out over the  
public network (only on digital and VoIP trunks).  
Priv. OLI: Enter or confirm the number that displays at the far end for calls going over the  
private network. This number is usually the same as the DN (only on digital and VoIP trunks).  
Fwd No Answer: Enter the number of the device that receives calls when this telephone does  
not answer. The device can be another telephone or a voice mail service.  
Fwd Delay: Confirm or change the number of rings you want to occur at the telephone before  
a call is forwarded. (Default: 4).  
Fwd Busy: Enter the number of the device you want to receive calls when this telephone is  
busy. This can be another telephone or a voice mail service.  
10 Fwd All: Enter the number of the device where all calls to this telephone are forwarded.  
11 Next step: “Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 124.  
Job aid: Notes about assigning lines to telephones  
Read these notes for more information about assigning lines to telephones.  
•
Nortel recommends a maximum of four line buttons per telephone. You can program more  
than four line buttons on a telephone by programming less than four on other sets. For  
example, you might program 20 line buttons on a receptionist telephone equipped as a CAP  
station, and only two lines on all other telephones.  
•
•
•
You can program a maximum of 93 telephones with a line appearance for a specific line,  
including VoIP and target lines. Above this maximum, you can configure more than one  
appearance per telephone of a target line.  
Do not assign auto-answer loop start trunks, auto-answer T1 E&M trunks, and T1 DID trunks  
to telephones. These trunks are used to monitor incoming call usage, or to place outgoing calls  
(auto-answer loop start and T1 E&M trunks).  
A line that is configured as private cannot be assigned to another telephone.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
122 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
•
•
Each line assigned to a telephone must appear to a button with an indicator. The maximum  
number of available buttons is 8 for the 7208 digital telephones, 10 for the model 7310, 10 for  
7316 digital telephones, 16 for the 7316E digital telephone, and 24 for the model 7324 digital  
telephones.  
In addition to lines, buttons have other uses, for example, intercom or handsfree operation.  
Line programming does not overwrite assigned Intercom, Answer DN, Handsfree, or Hunt  
group buttons. Refer to Figure 41. However, intercom buttons overwrite anything. (Figure 42).  
Note: You need at least two intercom buttons to use the conference  
feature.  
•
Answer DNs also overwrite line programming, but not Intercom buttons. Answer DN buttons  
appear above Intercom buttons; if an Intercom button is added after Answer DN buttons are  
assigned, the Intercom button pushes the Answer DNs up. The top Answer DN overwrites  
whatever is above it. (Figure 43)  
Figure 41 7316E digital telephone display button assignment protocol  
Lines and hunt  
group appearances  
assign to first  
Answer DNs assign starting above the assigned  
intercom buttons (maximum of 8). Answer DNs  
overwrite line programming.  
Line  
Line  
available button  
#
from top, left  
HG XX  
Line  
Line  
Answer DN  
Answer DN  
Intercom  
Intercom buttons assign starting from the bottom,  
right* (maximum of 8). Intercom buttons overwrite  
line programming, and push up Answer DNs.  
#Different models of  
telephones may start at  
other buttons  
Intercom  
* Other types of telephones may have a Handsfree key assigned  
to the lowest key. In that case, intercom buttons start above that  
key.  
Figure 42 Adding an intercom button  
If you add an intercom button, the  
Answer DNs move up.  
In this case, giving you one less line  
button.  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
HG XX  
HG XX  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Answer DN  
Answer DN  
Line  
Line  
Answer DN  
Answer DN  
Intercom  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Intercom  
Intercom  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 123  
Figure 43 Adding an Answer DN  
If you add an Answer DN, the system  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
overwrites the button above the last  
assigned Answer DN. In this case, giving  
you one less line button.  
HG XX  
HG XX  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Answer DN  
Answer DN  
Answer DN  
Answer DN  
Intercom  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Line  
Answer DN  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Intercom  
•
•
If you set a line to Ring only, incoming calls appear on an intercom button.  
The 7000, 7100 digital telephones, are exceptions, they have no line buttons; therefore, you  
can assign any number of lines, but only two lines can be answered at any one time. Assign the  
lines on these telephones to ring; otherwise, you cannot detect incoming calls on the lines.  
An enhanced central answering position (eCAP), with one or more modules, provides extra  
line button support, if the number of lines to assign exceeds the number of available buttons  
with indicators. The remaining lines assign to buttons on the module. The eKIM also supports  
hunt group designators, and multiple appearances of the same target line, which flow to the  
module if there are no available buttons with indicators on the 7316E digital phone.  
Warning: eCAP programming issue on cold start reboot.  
If you do a Backup/Cold Start/Restore sequence on your BCM, button programming on an  
enhanced CAP (eCAP) module is lost, and the lines assigned to those buttons are assigned  
to the buttons on the telephone. These assignments displace any programming on the  
telephone buttons, except Answer DN buttons, intercom buttons, handsfree buttons, or  
Hunt group appearances. In the case where there are more reassigned lines than buttons,  
the system still assigns the lines to the telephone, and the telephone rings when a call  
comes in on that line (given that Appr&Ring is configured on the line).  
To resolve this situation, access the DN records for the telephone and the CAP/KIM  
button programming. Enter the required programming.  
•
By using FEATURE *81 at the telephone, lines can be moved to other buttons on the  
telephone, except intercom, Answer DN, or handsfree positions, or the lines can be moved to  
buttons on the modules on an eCAP. On telephones, the feature or line, assigned to the button  
where the line is moved, moves to the original line button position. On eCAP modules, moved  
lines overwrite feature programming.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
124 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
Line Assignment and Line Pools  
Programming references: “Job aid: Answer DN notes” on page 124  
To add line assignments  
1
2
3
4
5
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets.  
Select the Line Access tab.  
Select the Line Assignment tab in the bottom panel.  
Click Add to add line assignments for the telephone.  
Determine how the line behaves at the telephone.  
Note: Not all of these fields apply to all types of lines.  
•
•
•
•
•
Appearance Type/Appearances (target lines)  
Caller ID Set (target lines)  
Vmsg Set  
Priv. Received #  
Pub. Received #  
6
7
8
9
Click the Line Pool Access tab.  
Click Add to add line pools for the telephone.  
Click the Answer DNs tab.  
Click Add to add a maximum of eight Answer DNs to the telephone.  
Programming note:  
•
If the telephone does not have any buttons with indicators available to provide an Answer  
DN appearance, ensure that Appearance Type is set to Ring only.  
•
Answer DNs, which are assigned to buttons, can also be used to autodial that telephone.  
Job aid: Answer DN notes  
You can assign a maximum of eight Answer DNs to a telephone. You can also determine the types  
of calls alert at the telephone where the answer DNs are assigned. Refer to “Answer DN answer  
key levels” on page 76.  
Note: You cannot assign Answer DNs to 7000 or 7100 telephones,  
because they do not have memory buttons. (Model 7000 phones are  
supported in Europe only)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 125  
Warning: Contact Center restrictions: If you assign Answer DNs, ensure that the Answer  
keys field (Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings) is set to  
Basic.  
Mobility sets: On 7406 cordless digital telephones, you can twin desk sets with the portable sets  
by assigning one or more handset DNs to a desk set Answer DN.  
Hunt group note: A linear Hunt group, which has an overflow telephone defined, does not  
support the overflow telephone being assigned as an Answer DN for any hunt group member. If an  
overflow situation occurs, the Answer DN does not ring a hunt group telephone.  
Autodial function: Answer DNs can also act as an internal autodial link to the assigned telephone.  
The Answer DN must be idle for this feature to work; that is, there must be no active indicator  
showing beside the button.  
The system still interprets the key as an Answer DN, and any key press still interacts with other  
features. Therefore, even though you are making an internal call, other autodial actions do not  
occur. As well, none of the autodial visual prompts occur. The button only prompts if a call is  
alerting at the other telephone, based on the answer key level assigned to the system. Refer to  
“Answer DN answer key levels” on page 76.  
You can program both an Answer DN and an autodial key for the same DN on the same telephone.  
Configuring Capabilities and Preferences  
The following paths indicate where to configure capabilities and preferences in Element Manager  
and through Telset Administration:  
•
•
Element Manager: Configuration >Telephony > Sets > All DNs  
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Terminals and Sets  
Programming reference:  
•
•
“Capabilities and Preferences main tab” on page 50  
“Job aid: Assigning intercom (I/C) buttons (keys)” on page 126  
To configure capabilities and preferences  
1
2
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
Select the DN that you want to modify.  
Properties tab:  
3
Prime Line: Enter the facility that you want the telephone to use if no line, line access code, or  
routing code is dialed before an outgoing dial string.  
4
Intercom Keys: Confirm or change how many intercom keys you want the telephone to have.  
The default is 2.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
126 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
Programming note: At least one intercom key must be defined to allow internal calls. Two  
intercom keys are recommended for conference calling. Model 7000 and 7100 telephones are  
automatically assigned two intercom keys, so users can alternate between two active calls.  
5
6
Control Set: If the telephone uses any schedules other than the Normal schedule, ensure that a  
DN for a control set is entered.  
First Display: Choose Name if you want the caller’s name to be the first information  
displayed. Set this field to Number to display the caller’s telephone number first, or to Line,  
to display the calling line number first.  
7
8
Auto Called ID: Select the check box if you want the user to see the name and number display  
of the telephone they call.  
Next Step: “Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 52  
Job aid: Assigning intercom (I/C) buttons (keys)  
The Intercom keys attribute assigns the number of intercom buttons on a telephone. Intercom  
buttons provide access to a maximum of eight internal or external lines and line pools. The user  
presses the intercom key to answer internal calls, or to select a line or line pool to place a call.  
Lines configured for Ring only also appear on intercom buttons.  
•
If you assign a prime line to an intercom key, you are immediately connected to a line when  
you press the button or lift the handset. A line indicator appears beside the intercom button.  
•
When you assign an intercom button during programming, the assignment automatically  
appears on the telephone. Assignment starts at the lower-right button, or one button above if  
the handsfree feature is available. Any feature or line programming that existed previously on  
that button is overwritten, except for Answer DNs that are pushed up one button.  
•
•
A telephone requires two intercom buttons to establish a conference call with two other BCM  
telephones.  
You require only one intercom button if the button is used to place and receive internal calls,  
and to access line pools.  
•
•
You require two intercom buttons for a telephone with several lines assigned to Ring only.  
Model 7000 and 7100 telephones and analog telephones are automatically assigned two  
intercom buttons. This allows users to toggle between two active calls using the Hold button.  
Caution: PRI and VoIP Lines  
Users cannot access PRI and VoIP lines directly through line appearances.  
PRI and VoIP lines must be part of a line pool.  
If you change a digital trunk module (DTM) to PRI, the system automatically removes all  
existing line appearances for that module.  
Configuring telephone capabilities  
Programming reference:  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 127  
•
•
“Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 52  
“Job aid: Line redirection notes” on page 128  
To configure telephone capabilities  
1
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom frame, on the Capabilities tab, confirm or change how the telephone functions  
with system features.  
2
Handsfree settings:  
•
Handsfree  
Select the setting that is appropriate for the type of telephone.  
•
HF answerback  
Select the check box only if the telephone allows handsfree, and is in an environment  
where speakers do not cause disruption.  
3
Page settings:  
•
Page zone  
If you have various areas that receive different page announcements, place the telephone  
in the appropriate zone.  
•
Paging  
Select the check box if the telephone can send or receive page messages.  
Programming note: Telephones without speakers, such as models 7000 and 7100, allow  
page messages to be sent, but not to be received.  
4
Interrupting calls:  
•
•
•
DND on Busy  
Select the check box if you want the caller to receive a Do Not Disturb message when the  
telephone is busy. Ensure this feature is selected, when the Fwd Busy field has a value.  
Priority call  
Select the check box if you want the user to be able to forward calls that alert at the  
telephone where the call was forwarded, even when that telephone is busy.  
Intrusion protection level  
Select an intrusion level if you want the user to be able to break into calls on other  
telephones. The intrusion level must be the same or higher than the telephone being  
interrupted.  
5
6
Auto hold  
Select the check box if you want calls coming into the telephone to be placed on hold  
automatically when the user answers another call, or dials out while an incoming call is active.  
Redirect settings:  
•
Allow redirect  
Select the check box if you want the user to be able to redirect active lines to other  
telephones.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
•
Redirect ring  
Select the check box if you want calls coming into a redirected line to give a short alert.  
7
8
Receive short tones  
Do not select this for digital telephones.  
Administrative capabilities:  
•
•
•
Pickup group  
If you want to allow this telephone to be answered by other telephones in a defined group,  
choose the appropriate group. Otherwise, leave the field blank.  
Direct dial  
Select the direct dial telephone assignment that you want this telephone to be able to dial  
with one digit (direct dial access code).  
Silent monitor supervisor  
Select this check box to enable the telephone to monitor hunt group calls.  
9
Next step: “Configuring Preferences” on page 129.  
Job aid: Line redirection notes  
This feature enables you to send your external calls to a telephone outside the office. You can  
decide to redirect all, or just some, of your external lines.  
Warning: Be careful about redirection loops. For example, if you redirect your  
lines to your branch office, and your branch office redirects its lines to you, you  
can create a redirection loop. If these calls are long distance, significant toll  
charges can result.  
Warning: While programming Line Redirection, there is no indication of calls to  
that telephone, except a call that rings the telephone.  
You can redirect only lines that appear as line buttons on your telephone. Since 7000 and 7100  
telephones do not have line buttons, they do not support line redirection. Also, line redirection is  
not supported on telephones connected to an ATA2 or ASM/GASM (analog station modules).  
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are programming line redirection. However,  
call handling features are not available until the programming wait period times out. If you need to  
use a feature to process the call, quit line redirection programming by pressing FEATURE. If you  
press RELEASE, the call is disconnected.  
In some conditions, callers can experience lower volume levels when you redirect calls to an  
external location.  
DPNSS notes (UK only)  
DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch, perform call redirection using the Call Forward  
feature. The feature creates a tandem link back to the switch.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 129  
Before you program Call Forwarding on lines on an Embark switch line, ensure that:  
•
•
•
•
The DTM is configured to DPNSS, and the Host Node switch connection is set to Embark.  
Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned.  
Routing code or line pool code are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link.  
Allow redirect check box must be selected. This field is also located under the Capabilities  
tab.  
During telephone programming for Fwd No Answer and Fwd Busy, when you enter the Forward  
to digits, the system performs a validation check with the designated switch. If the validation does  
not succeed, the system displays one of the messages shown in Table 39.  
Table 39 Embark validation error messages  
Message  
Description  
The number is invalid or the destination has The destination telephone has DND programmed, or it is in a  
been rejected. programming session.  
There are no free virtual channels available Either there are not enough channels set up, or no more  
for validation.  
channels are available.  
Destination may be out of service; no  
response received.  
The system cannot connect to the remote system.  
Configuring Preferences  
The following paths indicate where to configure preferences in Element Manager, and through  
Telset Administration:  
•
Element Manager: Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Top panel Capabilities and  
Preferences tab > Bottom panel - Preferences tab  
•
Telset interface: **CONFIG > Terminals and Sets  
Programming reference:  
•
•
“Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab” on page 56  
“Job aid: Call log notes” on page 130  
Use this panel to specify operational attributes. These attributes can also be set at the telephone.  
Settings at the telephone override Element Manager settings.  
To configure preferences for a telephone  
1
2
3
4
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active DNs > Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
Click the Preferences tab in the bottom panel.  
Call log options: Determine when calls are logged.  
Dialing options: Determine how the user dials numbers.  
Programming note: Some telephones do not allow all dialing options.  
Contrast: Adjust the contrast level of the display.  
5
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
130 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
6
7
Ring type: If you want incoming calls to produce a specific type of ring (for example, to  
differentiate between two telephones that are in close proximity), select one of the four ring  
types. If you select None, the default ring is used.  
Next step: “Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab” on page 58  
Job aid: Call log notes  
If your system has the appropriate equipment, and you subscribe to the call information feature  
supplied by your service provider, you can record information about calls received from an  
external line. ISDN service packages that come with calling line identification (CLID) can supply  
the same feature.  
Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls to a telephone, even if the telephone does not  
have that line assigned. For each call, the log can contain:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sequence number in the Call Log  
name and number of the caller  
indication if the call is long distance  
indication if the call was answered and by whom  
time and date of the call  
number of repeated calls from the same source  
name of the line carrying the call  
Call Log can help to:  
•
•
•
•
keep track of discarded calls, or calls not answered  
track patterns for your callers (for example, volume of calls and geographic area of calls)  
record caller information quickly and accurately  
build a personal telephone directory from log items  
Information, such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number, may not show in the  
log. The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone  
company, and the local telephone company at the caller end.  
Call logging limitations:  
•
A total of 600 log spaces are shared by all telephones assigned with call log space. To ensure  
that this list does not fill up and start rejecting logs, ensure that autobumping is enabled  
(FEATURE 815).  
•
•
If you answer the call and then forward it, the call logs only at the forwarding telephone.  
If call forward is set, calls log at both the forwarding telephone and the target telephone,  
providing the target telephone answered the call.  
•
If the call is released by the telephone to which the call is forwarded, only the forwarding  
telephone logs the call.  
•
•
Hunt group calls are logged only when a call is answered.  
If a call is redirected to and answered at the prime telephone, then the call is logged at both the  
redirecting telephone and the prime telephone. If the call is answered by the intended  
telephone, then the call is logged only at that telephone.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 131  
•
•
If the telephone experiences a warm-reset, all log entries are flushed.  
If a line has been redirected, calls are not logged.  
Telephone memory button programming  
Use this panel to assign features to available buttons on the telephone.  
Programming reference:  
•
•
“Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tab” on page 58  
“Job aid: Notes about button programming” on page 131  
To program telephone buttons  
1
2
3
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active DNs > Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
Click the Button Programming tab in the bottom panel.  
The model shown in the model field determines the number of available buttons.  
Programming note: Assigned lines, answer DNs, hunt group designators, and intercom keys  
cannot be overridden using this template.  
4
5
6
Select the field beside the button you want to configure or change.  
Select the feature, internal or external autodial you want to assign.  
Select from a list of available values to choose from.  
Next step: “User speed dials” on page 132.  
Job aid: Notes about button programming  
•
The number of available button positions depends on the model of telephone that you are  
programming.  
•
New button programming overwrites memory button programming performed at the  
telephone. Conversely, changes to memory button programming, performed at the telephone,  
overwrites memory keys programmed under Button programming or CAP/KIM button  
programming. The panels reflect changes made at the telephone.  
•
•
The 7316 telephone has disjointed button numbering; it is because patterned after the legacy  
7310, but has fewer buttons than the 7310. However, Button programming shows the 7310  
button array. Refer to the default button programming section to ensure that you program the  
correct button numbers.  
IP telephones have three (2001), nine (2002), and twelve (2004) programmable memory keys,  
as well as a display feature list that can contain up to ten items. The 2033 phone has three  
physical soft keys; however, the UTPS programs the soft keys as though four keys existed.  
Refer to “IP feature list” on page 139 for information about setting up this list. The 2001 IP  
telephone has an additional five non-visible buttons that can be programmed with Answer DNs  
or SWCA controls.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
132 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
Button labeling  
T-series telephones have a paper strip of labels that can be customized and printed using the  
Desktop Assistant or Desktop Assistant Pro application. These applications are located under the  
Client Applications button on the first Element Manager web page. Desktop Assistant Pro requires  
a LAN CTE keycode before it can be used.  
IP telephones also have soft display labels. Refer to “IP feature list” on page 139.  
User speed dials  
Use this tab to assign telephone numbers to speed dial codes. These codes are available to all  
telephones in the system. The number of available codes is determined under system feature  
programming.  
Programming references:  
•
“Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab” on page 61  
To program user speed dials  
1
2
3
Click Add to enter the external number to dial and the facility to use when the selected speed  
code is entered.  
Enter a unique name for each speed dial. This name displays for incoming calls that match the  
external number.  
Program the speed dial code onto telephone buttons, and label the buttons.  
Next step: “Outgoing call restrictions” on page 132  
Outgoing call restrictions  
Restriction filters determine what dialing strings are allowed or blocked from the user. You can  
specify restriction filters specific to the telephone, as well as filters that are specific to a line  
assigned to the telephone.  
Programming reference:  
•
•
•
•
“Restrictions main tab” on page 65  
restriction filters  
line restrictions  
CoS passwords  
To program outgoing call restrictions  
1
Under the Restrictions tab in the top panel, select the DN that you want to modify.  
Under the Properties tab:  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 133  
2
3
Set Lock: Determine how much programming the user is able to perform at their telephone.  
(None, Partial, Full)  
Refer to “Restrictions main tab” on page 65 for a description of what is allowed for each level.  
Allow Last Number: Select the check box if you want to allow Last-number redial for numbers  
dialed from the telephone.  
4
5
Allow Saved Number: Select the check box if you want to allow redialing a saved number.  
Allow Link: Select this check box only for analog telephones.  
Set restrictions  
Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect this telephone.  
Programming reference:  
•
•
“Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab” on page 66  
Restriction filters  
To set restrictions  
1
2
Select the field you want to change.  
Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule. You will always need a filter specified  
for the Normal schedule.  
3
Repeat for each schedule.  
Line/Set restrictions  
Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect the lines assigned to this telephone.  
Programming reference:  
•
•
“Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab” on page 67  
Restriction filters  
To set line/set restrictions  
1
2
3
Select the line you want to modify.  
Select the field you want to modify on that line.  
Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule. You always need a filter specified for  
the Normal schedule.  
4
Repeat for each line.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
134 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones: Digital telephones  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
Chapter 19  
Configuring telephones: IP telephones  
IP telephones have a very similar DN configuration to digital telephones. Refer to “Configuring  
telephones: Digital telephones” on page 119 for detailed procedures.  
There are several models of i-series telephones, and each telephone has a different number of  
programmable buttons. Refer to the Nortel i-series telephone user cards for details.  
Task: Setting up IP telephones  
Determine the programming for individual IP telephones. Refer to “Configuring an IP telephone” on  
page 136.  
Register each IP telephone to the system. Refer to “Registering Nortel 20XX and 11XX IP telephones” in  
the BCM 4.0 Telephony Device Installation Guide (N0060609).  
Prerequisite programming  
The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration:  
•
•
•
•
Numbering plan  
Lines programming  
Telephony system feature programming  
IP telephony network setup and prerequisites checklist  
Note: IP sets that do not have integrated switches must be connected to  
the LAN through an Ethernet switch.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
136 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones: IP telephones  
IP telephone DN record overview  
Configuring an IP telephone  
On each panel on the DNs list, add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations.  
Table 40 lists the fields and settings for IP telephones.  
Table 40 Line Configuration  
Affected field  
Setting  
Panel name and link to common procedures  
Model  
2004, 2002, 2001, 2007,  
2033, 1120E, 1140E  
“Line Access tab” on page 44  
Name  
Unique to each handset  
Line appearances  
Ring only (if not assigned to a “Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 124  
button)  
Caller ID set  
Answer DNs  
Intercom keys  
Selected (connected to target  
lines)  
Ring only (if not assigned to a  
button)  
At least one  
“Configuring Capabilities and Preferences” on  
page 125  
Handsfree  
Auto  
Auto  
“Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 126  
“Configuring Preferences” on page 129  
Dialing Options  
All other settings are variable, based on your system requirements.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 19 Configuring telephones: IP telephones 137  
PVQM - Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring  
PVQM monitors and reports on call quality in process, not just after the end of the call. This  
enables more timely and accurate resolution of potential call quality problems, especially on more  
lengthy calls. A call quality threshold is set so that an exception is reported if the quality drops  
below a configurable value.  
PVQM is fully supported on Phase 2 IP sets. Phase 1 IP sets support only the following PVQM  
metrics: packet loss, inter arrival jitter, and round trip delay.  
The following path indicates where to set PVQM thresholds in Element Manager:  
•
Element Manager: Administration > Telephony Metrics > PVQM > Threshold Settings  
Panel  
The following is a description of the metrics:  
•
Packet Loss: Packet loss can be viewed as an extreme case of delay. There are a number of  
reasons that a packet could be lost in transit. If a network failure occurs, packets may be lost  
during the time that traffic is rerouted through alternate facilities.  
•
Inter Arrival Jitter: Packet jitter refers to a variable delay on a packet –to –packet basic as it  
traverses a network. For data applications it has a minor impact but voice is quite different. It  
is a synchronous service and an exact relationship must be maintained between source and  
recipient of the information.  
•
•
RTCP Round Trip Delay: Round trip delay is an important measurement of network  
performance.  
Listening R Factor: A direct measure of the call quality or transmission quality, and  
incorporates the effects of CODEC type, packet loss, discard, burstiness, delay etc. This metric  
describes the segment of the call that is carried over this RTP session.  
There are two thresholds for PVQM metrics: Warning, and Unacceptable. A violation of the  
Warning threshold indicates that the voice quality is reduced but is still within an acceptable range.  
A violation of the Unacceptable threshold indicates a severe degradation in voice quality.  
If an alarm is generated to report a threshold violation, additional information will be included in  
the alarm to tag the source of the alarm and provide other information that may be helpful in  
monitoring voice quality on the system and across the network.  
For an explanation of the Metrics tab and the default PVQM threshold settings refer to the  
BCM 4.0 Administration Guide (N0060598).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
138 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones: IP telephones  
Figure 44 PVQM threshold settings  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
Chapter 20  
Global VoIP features  
The two global IP feature panels provide a quick access feature menu and customized display  
labels for IP telephone memory buttons.  
Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:  
Panels  
Tasks/Features  
“IP feature list” on page 139  
“Assigning the list to a button” on page 141  
“To use the Services button to access features” on page 141  
“IP telephone feature display  
labels” on page 141  
“To define a key label” on page 142  
Other IP global features:  
“Hot desking IP telephone configurations” on page 143  
“Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone” on  
page 146  
“Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone” on page 147  
Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management.  
IP feature list  
You can add and modify the features that display on the IP telephone feature list, which is  
accessed through the Services button or by using FEATURE *900. To view and modify these  
features in Element Manager, navigate to Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > IP  
Terminal Settings > Feature List tab.  
Table 41 describes the fields on the two records on this panel.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
140 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features  
Figure 45 Feature List tab fields  
Table 41 Feature List field description  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Seq #  
<read-only>  
List number only.  
Feature  
Name  
<alphanumeric>  
Label for the feature code.  
Feature Code <alphanumeric>  
Code for the feature.  
Actions  
Add  
1. Click Add.  
2. In the Add Feature dialog box enter a feature name.  
3. Enter the feature code.  
4. Click OK to save the new setting.  
Delete  
1. Select one or more feature lines.  
2. Click Delete.  
3. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.  
Note: This only deletes the feature from the list.  
Up  
1. Select a feature line.  
2. Click the Up button until the line moves up to the desired location.  
Down  
1. Select a feature line.  
2. Click the Down button until the line moves down to the desired location.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 141  
Assigning the list to a button  
The services list defaults to the Services button  
to one of the other feature buttons.  
. However, you can assign the display list  
The user can also assign the display list as a memory button at a telephone, using FEATURE *3.  
If you move the feature to another memory button, the Services button no longer accesses the  
menu.  
To use the Services button to access features  
1
2
Press the Services button  
(or the button to which the list is assigned).  
Use the up and down directional buttons on the telephone, or the Page + and Page - display  
keys, to move through the list to find the feature you want.  
3
4
Press the Select display key to activate the feature.  
Use the feature as you would on any other telephone.  
For example, if you selected Call Forward, enter the number you to which you want to forward  
the call. Or, if you select speed dial (FEATURE 0), enter the speed dial code for the number  
you want the telephone to dial.  
IP telephone feature display labels  
When your IP telephone acquires a DN record, the default settings are applied to the telephone,  
including assigning features to the memory keys on the telephone. These features all have  
predefined labels, and the telephone automatically displays the appropriate labels beside the  
programmed buttons. This screen enables you to change the soft display label for features assigned  
to the memory keys beside the displays for IP telephones.  
Use this screen to define custom labels for 24 features. The system comes with sixteen default  
labels, which are feature- and language-specific, depending on the system-assigned country or  
region profile. Typically, the default labels are messaging and call attendant features.  
You can change any other feature label by adding to this list, or by deleting any of the default  
settings and inserting new codes and labels.  
The labels can be changed in Element Manager at the following location: Configuration >  
Telephony > Global Settings > IP Terminal Settings > Key Labels.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
142 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features  
Figure 46 IP telephone Key Labels  
Table 42 describes the headings on the table.  
Table 42 IP Terminal Features - Key Labels  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
No.  
<read-only>  
System number; identifies a label.  
Assignable feature code.  
Feature Code <Feature code>  
Key Label <text label>  
Each code has a default label. To change a label, click the field, then enter a  
maximum of eight characters, including spaces.  
To define a key label  
1
2
3
Select the number of the feature you want to label.  
Enter the feature code to program for that key.  
Enter the text to appear on the label.  
Some features, such as Page and System Wide Call Appearances (SWCA), have several variations  
of feature invocation that you can customize for users.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 143  
Paging can be F60, F61x, F62, and F63x. SWCA has 16 codes (*521 to *536). Table 43 shows  
examples of labels to which page codes and SWCA codes can be changed.  
Table 43 Relabeling examples  
Feature code  
New label  
Feature code  
New label  
60  
Gen Page  
*521  
*522  
*523  
*524  
*525  
SW Call 1  
SW Call 2  
SW Call 3  
SW Call 4  
SW Call 5  
610  
61  
Pg Every  
Zone <digit from 1-9>  
Speak Pg  
62  
630  
Speak, All  
Note: Line names are defined when you configure the line, and can be  
changed through the Lines menus.  
Hot desking IP telephone configurations  
You can transfer your IP telephony configuration temporarily from one IP telephone to another  
using the Hot desking feature. This feature is described in detail in the BCM 4.0 Telephone  
Features User Guide (N0027160). You use FEATURE *999 to enter the feature. To perform Hot  
desking, you are prompted for a password, which is specified at the telephone, before you can  
complete the task.  
Notes about Hot desking  
•
The Hot Desking feature allows a user to divert calls and signals from one IP telephone to  
another. For example, if a user is temporarily working in another office, they can retain their  
telephone number by Hot desking their usual telephone to the IP telephone in their temporary  
office.  
•
•
The Hot desking code defaults to the first item on the services list.  
Once Hot desking occurs between two IP telephones, no activity is allowed on the originating  
telephone, except to cancel Hot desking. The display on the originating telephone indicates  
where it has been diverted.  
•
•
Call forwarding to voice mail continues as normal. Voice mail can be accessed from the  
diverted IP telephone in the same way as from the originating telephone.  
Using headsets with Hot desking: If you use the headset feature on your IP telephone, and you  
want to hot desk your telephone to another IP telephone, ensure that the target telephone also  
has a headset installed, before you enter the Hot desking feature.  
•
If the target telephone does not have a headset, the headset feature from the first telephone  
does not transfer during Hot desking. Adding a headset to the target telephone, after Hot  
desking is enabled, does not correct the situation. To enable headset function in this situation,  
you must cancel Hot desking, plug a headset into the target telephone, and then re-establish  
Hot desking.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
144 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features  
•
If the target telephone has a headset, but the originating telephone does not, when Hot desking  
is activated, the headset on the target telephone no longer works. To correct this situation, you  
must cancel Hot desking, plug a headset into the originating telephone, then re-establish Hot  
desking at the target telephone.  
Head set feature active on target set after  
Originating telephone  
Target telephone  
Hot desking?  
Yes  
No  
No  
Using the Hot desking feature  
Hot desking requires that you set up a password and permission on the originating telephone, and  
activate Hot desking from a target telephone.  
Setting up a password and allowing Hot desking  
Set up the password on the originating telephone. This process also allows you to determine if you  
want the telephone to be able to be diverted.  
To set up a password and allow Hot desking  
1
2
3
Enter FEATURE *999.  
Press ADMIN.  
Enter a new password, or change an existing password, and press OK.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 145  
4
5
6
Confirm the password, and press OK.  
Press CHANGE to toggle between allowing or disallowing Hot desking.  
Press QUIT to exit.  
Resetting the Hot desking password  
Reset the Hot desking password through system programming. This enables users who forget their  
passwords to re-enter Hot desking and to reset their password.  
Note: This process also cancels Hot desking for the telephone, if the  
application is currently active.  
Also refer to “Notes about Hot desking” on page 143.  
To reset the Hot Desking password field for a specific IP  
telephone  
1
You can access the reset button from two locations:  
•
Configuration > Resources > Telephony Resources > IP & App Sets module >IP  
Terminal Details tab  
•
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences > IP  
Terminal Details tab  
2
3
4
Select an IP telephone from the list.  
Click Reset Hot Desking Password.  
Click OK on the dialog box to reset the password.  
The password resets to Null. The user can enter Hot desking again to enter a new password.  
Using the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration  
You perform this procedure on the target telephone at which the diverted calls are to be answered.  
To use the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone  
configuration  
1
2
3
Ensure both telephones are on-hook before attempting to activate this feature.  
Enter FEATURE *999.  
Press DIVERT.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
146 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features  
4
Enter the DN of the telephone you want to divert to this telephone.  
Note: If the originating telephone does not allow Hot desking, a Not  
allowed prompt displays. This prompt also occurs if the originating  
telephone is on a call when the diversion command is issued.  
5
Enter the password of the diverted telephone.  
The buttons on your telephone mimic the buttons configured on the diverted set. The diverted  
telephone indicates that it is diverted, and it cannot be used until Hot desking is cancelled.  
Cancelling Hot desking  
You can cancel Hot desking from the originating or target telephone.  
To cancel Hot desking  
1
Ensure that both telephones are on-hook before cancelling Hot desking.  
Note: There can be up to a ten-second delay after the call ends before  
the system allows you to cancel Hot desking. This period can vary,  
depending on the call type.  
2
Cancel the feature:  
Diverted telephone: Press the display key under the CANCEL prompt.  
Live telephone:  
a
b
c
Access FEATURE *999.  
Enter the password.  
Press CANCEL.  
Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone  
If the IP telephone connects to the system from a different time zone than the system, you can reset  
the telephone to display the correct local time.  
To configure a new time zone on a remote IP telephone  
1
2
3
At the telephone, enter FEATURE *510.  
Press CHANGE.  
Press * to toggle between + (plus) and - (minus). Use + if local time is ahead of system time;  
typically, you use + when the system is west of the local site.  
4
Enter the number of hours difference.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 147  
5
Press OK.  
Offset time zones: For areas, such as Newfoundland, Canada, where the time zone is offset from a  
full hour, press the # key to add 0.5 to the number of hours, then press OK.  
Note: The telephone is still configured to change when Daylight  
Savings Time occurs, if the host system is programmed to change.  
Therefore, if the telephone is in an area that stays on Standard Time year  
round (for example, Saskatchewan, Canada), you must readjust the time  
on your IP telephone at each time change. You must also readjust the  
time if the IP telephone is in a time zone that changes, and the system is  
not (for example, if the telephone is in Alberta, Canada, and the system  
is located in Saskatchewan).  
Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone  
Firmware is the software stored in the telephone. When the system is upgraded with a new IP  
telephone firmware load, this firmware load automatically downloads into the IP telephones when  
the telephones next connect to the system.  
The IP Terminal Details subpanel has a Force firmware download button that enables you to  
initiate an immediate download to a telephone. You force a download in situations where  
troubleshooting suggests that a particular telephone has corrupted firmware. Refer to  
“IP telephone set details” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606) for  
details.  
To force a firmware download to a Nortel IP telephone  
1
You can access the reset button from two locations:  
•
Configuration > Resources > Telephony Resources > Terminal Details  
•
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences > IP  
Terminal Details  
2
3
Select an IP telephone from the list.  
Click Force firmware download.  
The system drops any active call on that telephone, and downloads a new firmware load into the  
selected telephones. The telephone is unusable until the download is complete, and the telephone  
has reset.  
Note: In order not to saturate the IP network with download packets, the  
system only downloads to a maximum of five IP telephones at any given  
time. Telephones requiring download show an Element Manager status  
of Download Pending. The UNISTIM Terminal Proxy Server (UTPS)  
initiates download as resources become available.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
148 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
Chapter 21  
Default memory button programming for telephones  
Button programming allows you to program the buttons on a telephone with internal and external  
autodialers, and with programmed feature keys. Assigned line, Hunt group designator, answer  
DNs buttons, intercom buttons, and handsfree buttons cannot be changed through button  
programming. These latter features appear in read-only format on the Button Programming table.  
During startup, the installer chooses one of the available telephony template (PBX or DID). Each  
profile has a default features set that assigns automatically to the programmable buttons on  
telephones plugged into the system, unless you configure different settings in the DN record. The  
default features are listed by telephone model in the following sections:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Rules of default button assignment” on page 149  
“7316E digital phone button defaults” on page 150  
“7316 digital phone button defaults” on page 152  
“7406 digital phone button defaults” on page 155  
“7208 digital phone button defaults” on page 153  
“7100 digital phone button defaults” on page 154  
“7000 digital phone button defaults” on page 154  
“IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults” on page 155  
“IP telephone 2002 button defaults” on page 157  
“IP telephone 2001 button defaults” on page 157  
“IP telephone 2007 button defaults” on page 158  
“IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults” on page 162  
“IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E” on page 166  
“WLAN handset 2210/2211/2212 button defaults” on page 171  
“DMC Portables (413X/414X) (Europe only)” on page 174  
Rules of default button assignment  
•
Line and intercom buttons assigned by default templates can be changed in programming.  
Handsfree and Answer DN buttons are not assigned by default. When these features are  
programmed, however, they are automatically assigned to specific buttons.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
150 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
•
Telephones can have a maximum of eight intercom buttons. When Answer DNs are assigned,  
they appear above the handsfree button, if there is one, at the bottom right-hand corner on the  
telephone. The model 7000 and 7100 digital phones and analog telephones are automatically  
assigned two intercom lines.  
•
•
Default line button assignment starts on or near the top of the left column, and descends.  
Default button programming does not necessarily provide default line assignments.  
Line assignments can be moved by the user to more convenient buttons.  
7316E digital phone button defaults  
The default button assignments for the 7316E depend on the template applied. Refer to your  
Programming Records to identify the current button programming for each telephone or group of  
telephones.  
•
•
•
This telephone has individual handsfree, mute and headset buttons, located under the dialpad.  
Handsfree must be set to Auto for these buttons to work.  
The current incoming call on this telephone defaults to the voice path last used. For example, if  
you answered the previous call using your headset, the next call comes in over your headset.  
Line numbering starts on button 09.  
Note: The 7316E digital phone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 digital  
phone buttons. Therefore, if you replace a 7316 digital phone with a 7316E digital phone,  
the button programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E, losing any keys  
programmed by the user at the telephone. Also, settings copied from one telephone to the  
other can be in a different location on the 7316E. This is consistent with how the system  
behaves if you switch any telephone model for a different model on the same connector.  
Table 44 7316E digital phone upper button defaults  
7316E digital phone upper button defaults  
Btn #  
Btn #  
05  
Blank  
Contrast  
Show time  
Blank  
01  
02  
03  
04  
06  
(DID only) Sys Park  
Send Message  
Speed dial  
07  
08  
Blank  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 151  
Figure 47 7316E digital phone lower button mapping  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Table 45 7316E digital phone lower button defaults  
18  
19  
20  
7316E lower button defaults  
Btn # PBX  
DID  
Btn # PBX/DID  
09  
Sys Park Target  
line  
17  
Call Timer  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Saved No.  
Call Fwd  
Pick-up  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Ring Again  
DND  
21  
22  
Transfer  
Last No.  
Voice call  
Intercom  
Intercom  
23  
24  
Page  
Transfer  
Time/Date  
Receive Msg.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
7316 digital phone button defaults  
Button mapping for the 7316 digital phone is unique. Although the button programming follows  
the 7310 digital phone button mapping, the 7316 does not have a second level on its upper button  
group. Because of this, the numbering for the 7316 is not consecutive. As well, the top three  
buttons on each column of the bottom button group refer to the 7310 upper button programming.  
This means that line assignment starts on the fourth button down on the left column, rather than on  
the top button, as with all other 7XXX digital phones. Refer to the diagrams below.  
Internal autodial numbers are assigned to buttons 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, and 21 on the main button  
group. Programmed external line buttons descend down the lower left buttons, starting with  
button 01. When more than five external lines are programmed, assignment continues on the  
lower right buttons, starting at button 06.  
Note: The 7316E telephone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 telephone.  
Therefore, if you replace a 7316 telephone with a 7316E telephone, the button  
programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E.  
Figure 48 shows the default button number assignments on the 7316 telephone.  
Figure 48 7316 digital phone upper button defaults  
7316 upper buttons (PBX and DID) default button settings  
Btn #  
23  
Btn #  
31 Autodial to 231  
Autodial to 227  
Autodial to 228  
Autodial to 229  
Autodial to 230  
25  
33 Autodial to 232  
24 Autodial to 239  
26 Autodial to 240  
27  
29  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 153  
Figure 49 7316 digital phone button assignment  
11  
13  
15  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
17  
19  
Table 46 7316 digital phone lower button defaults  
7316 lower button defaults  
21  
06  
Btn PBX DID  
#
Btn # PBX  
DID  
11 Autodial 221  
13 Autodial 222  
15 Autodial 223  
01 DND Target line  
02 Transfer  
17 Autodial to 224  
19 Autodial to 225  
21 Autodial to 226  
06 Conference  
07 Last No.Redial  
08 Intercom  
07  
08  
09  
10  
03 Call Forward  
04 Pick-Up  
09 Intercom  
05 Page-General  
10 Handsfree  
7208 digital phone button defaults  
The default button assignments for the 7208 digital phones differ for the PBX and DID telephony  
templates. Refer to Figure 50.  
Figure 50 7208 digital phone button mapping  
01  
Table 47 7208 digital phone button defaults  
02  
7208 default button mapping  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
PBX  
Btn #  
01  
DID  
Pick-Up  
Transfer  
Target line  
Transfer  
02  
Last No. Redial 03  
Last No. Redial  
Page-General  
Conference  
Intercom  
Page-General  
Conference  
Intercom  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Handsfree  
Handsfree  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
154 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
7100 digital phone button defaults  
The 7100 digital phone is a basic-function digital telephone with a single-line display. For all  
templates assigned to 7100 digital phones, the one programmable button defaults to Last Number  
Redial.  
This telephone cannot use features that require a speaker, such as Page.  
Note: The default Page feature activates the External Page option  
(FEATURE 62).  
7000 digital phone button defaults  
Note: The 7000 phone is available only in limited markets.  
Figure 51 7000 digital phone button mapping  
This digital basic-function telephone has four  
programmable memory keys that default to the  
features shown in Table 48. This telephone has no  
display, and does not support features that require a  
speaker or a display.  
01  
Table 48 7000 digital phone button defaults  
02  
03  
04  
7000 button defaults  
PBX  
DID Btn #  
Last Number Redial  
Call Forward  
Transfer  
1
2
3
4
Conference/Transfer  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 155  
7406 digital phone button defaults  
Note: The 7406 phone is available only in limited markets.  
Figure 52 7406 digital phone button defaults  
The 7406 cordless handset is based on the 7316  
digital phone button numbering. However, the  
7406 handset has only six memory buttons. These  
buttons map to specific 7316 button numbers: 01,  
02, 03, 07, 08, 09.  
Ensure that when you fill out the DN record, which  
shows 24 buttons for the 7316 digital phone, that  
you program only these buttons. The handset can  
access any system features, except for features that  
require a speaker, such as handsfree.  
01  
02  
03  
07  
08  
09  
Table 49 7406 digital phone button defaults  
7406 lower button defaults  
Btn PBX  
#
DID  
Btn PBX/DID  
#
01  
DND  
Target line  
07  
Last No.  
Redial  
02  
03  
Transfer  
Call Forward  
08  
09  
Intercom  
Intercom  
IP telephone button defaults  
The IP telephone 20XX models have fewer programmable buttons than the 7316 or 7316E;  
however, they have access to a feature menu through the Services key (FEATURE *900) that  
expands quick access to call features. Additionally, IP telephones support the Hot Desking feature,  
which allows the user to transfer telephone settings from one IP telephone to another, allowing  
mobility without relocating the physical telephone.  
IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults  
The 2004 and the 2050 telephones have six memory buttons beside a display that provides soft  
labels for the buttons. These telephones also have six other buttons that can be programmed as  
memory buttons without display.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
156 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Figure 53 2004/2050 default button programming  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
Table 50 2004 button defaults  
2004 default button assignment  
Btn # PBX  
DID  
Line XXX  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
Call Forward  
Conference/Transfer  
Last # Redial  
Page - General  
Intercom  
11  
07  
12  
08  
09  
10  
Intercom  
Blank  
Voice mail login  
Express Messaging  
Service menu  
Blank  
Blank  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 157  
IP telephone 2002 button defaults  
The 2002 has four memory buttons beside a display that provides soft labels for the buttons. This  
telephone also has five other programmable buttons with no display.  
Figure 54 2002 default button assignment  
Table 51 2002 button defaults  
01  
02  
03  
04  
2002 default button mapping  
Btn #  
PBX  
DID  
Line  
01  
Call Forward  
XXX  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
Conference/Transfer  
Intercom  
05  
09  
06  
08  
07  
Intercom  
Blank  
Voice mail login  
Express Messaging  
Service menu  
Blank  
IP telephone 2001 button defaults  
Figure 55 2001 default button formatting  
The 2001 is a simple version of the IP telephone.  
None of the programmable buttons have indicator  
displays, so all incoming calls must be set to Ring  
only. Figure 55 shows the positions of the three  
programmable buttons, and which button number  
corresponds to each of the three buttons.  
Feature  
Display menu  
commands  
Directional  
Services  
02  
(programmable)  
Although two intercom lines are assigned to the  
telephone, there is no visible indicator of the lines.  
However, a light at the top of the telephone blinks.  
The user presses the Hold key to toggle between two  
active calls, or to put one call on hold to make a  
second call.  
03  
Mail box in  
(programmable)  
Goodbye (Release)  
Hold  
01  
Ringing call  
(programmable)  
Handsfree and mute are not available, since this  
telephone does not have an external speaker. It also  
does not support a headset. The only indicator on the telephone is the message waiting indicator  
(MWI) lamp.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
158 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Model 2001 feature buttons:  
•
Four display buttons appear under the telephone display screen. The first button defaults to act  
as the Feature button (green button). The other buttons provide access to menu commands that  
appear on the display, as with the other types of telephones on the system.  
•
•
•
The IP telephone Features list is accessible through the button that defaults to Services  
(FEATURE *900). This button can be programmed to another feature.  
One of the buttons defaults to the voice mail login (FEATURE 981). This program can be  
programmed to another feature, such as the dial string for a remote voice mail system.  
The Hold and Goodbye (release) features are automatically programmed above the Ringing  
call button, which is also programmable. The Ringing call button (FEATURE 807) provides  
call send and receive access, allows users to toggle between two calls using the Hold key, and  
is required if the Conference feature is allowed on the telephone.  
•
The telephone has an additional five hidden button assignments that can be programmed with  
Answer DNs or SWCA assignments. All assignments on the virtual buttons are Ring only.  
SWCA calls are accessed by using the feature code for each assigned button.  
2001 default button mapping  
Btn # PBX DID  
Hidden button assignments:  
Btn #  
04*  
PBX  
DID  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
01  
02  
03  
Ringing Call (F807)  
IP Services List (F*900)  
Voice message access (F981)  
05*  
06*  
07*  
08*  
* These buttons only support  
Answer DNs or SWCA controls.  
•
There are only two directional buttons (Up and Down) on this telephone. Use these buttons to  
scroll through the Features list, which is accessed through the Services button, or by entering  
FEATURE *900.  
IP telephone 2007 button defaults  
The Nortel IP Phone 2007 brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local  
Area Network (LAN) through an Ethernet connection.  
The IP Phone 2007 provides all the functionality of the IP Phone 2004, using a graphical user  
interface (GUI). In addition, advanced text and graphic-based web-centric applications are  
supported.  
Not all features are available on all telephones. Consult your system administrator to verify which  
features are available for your use.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 159  
The IP Phone 2007 supports the following features:  
12 programmable feature soft keys  
Shared LAN access with a PC  
Headset jack with On/Off key  
Four soft keys (self-labeled) providing  
access to a maximum of ten features  
Your IP Phone 2007 might not be  
Automatic network configuration  
configured to support soft key functionality.  
Consult your system administrator.  
Speaker for on-hook dialing or on-hook  
listening  
Hearing-aid compatibility  
Volume control bar for adjusting ringer,  
speaker, handset, and headset volume  
Large, color touch panel display screen  
Web-based applications support  
Four call processing fixed keys:  
•
•
•
•
Hold  
Goodbye  
Handsfree  
Mute  
Remote firmware download  
USB mouse and keyboard support  
The IP Phone 2007 provides a color touch panel display (see Figure 57) that supports color XML  
and HTML content through an external application server.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Figure 56 IP Phone 2007  
Use the Volume control bar to adjust the  
volume of the ringer, handset, headset,  
speaker, and the Handsfree feature. Press  
the right side of the rocker bar to increase  
volume; press the left side to decrease  
volume.  
Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active  
call.  
Press the Hold key to put an active call on  
hold. Tap the flashing line (DN) soft key to  
return to the caller on hold.  
Use the Navigation keys to scroll through  
menus and lists appearing on the LCD  
display screen. The key rocks for up, down,  
left, and right movements.  
Press the Headset key to answer a call  
using the headset or to switch a call from the  
handset or handsfree to the headset.  
Press the Speaker key to activate  
handsfree. The speaker LED indicator lights  
to indicate when handsfree is active.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 161  
Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving  
party without transmitting. Press the Mute  
key again to return to two-way conversation.  
The Mute key applies to handsfree, handset,  
and headset microphones. The Mute LED  
indicator flashes when the Mute option is in  
use.  
When a message is left for the user, the  
Message waiting indicator flashes. Also,  
this indicator flashes when the set ringer is  
ON.  
The two keys on either side of the navigation  
key are context-sensitive soft keys, with  
labels on the LCD.  
IP Phone 2007 display screen  
The IP Phone 2007 features two programmable areas:  
•
•
Application area  
Tools/Navigation area  
Figure 57 2007 display screen button formatting  
The Application area provides:  
•line and feature soft key status  
•information items such as caller  
number, caller name, feature prompt  
strings, user-entered digits, date and  
time information, and set information  
•feature soft keys  
•soft keys  
The Tools/Navigation area provides:  
•controls for navigating between  
features and selecting tools.  
•area is visible and functional at all  
times.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
162 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
In the Feature area within the Applications interface, the soft keys can show either text or icons.  
The text labels are displayed by default and are changed using the Tools menu.  
Table 52 Feature Key text and icon displays  
Text display  
Icon display  
The Tools/Navigation area has five main elements presented as touchable soft keys.  
Table 53 Tools/Navigation area buttons  
Tap this icon to determine which external  
applications are registered (for example,  
My Call Pilot), and launch them by tapping  
on the appropriate icon.  
Tap this icon to access the Telephone  
screen.  
Tap this icon to go to the primary external  
application. The icon of the application is  
displayed.  
Tap this icon to access the tools used on  
the IP Phone 2007.  
Tap this icon to display a virtual keyboard  
(pop-up keyboard) for text entry.  
IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults  
The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 brings voice and data to the tabletop audio conference  
environment by connecting directly to a Local Area Network (LAN) through an Ethernet  
connection.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 163  
The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has the following features:  
•
three soft keys (self-labeled) that, when required, map to four soft keys (the >> soft key is used  
to navigate between the first two and last two soft keys)  
•
•
•
•
multifield LCD display screen  
up to two extension microphones to provide microphone coverage in large rooms  
volume control buttons for adjusting ringer and speaker volume  
two specialized fixed keys:  
— Services  
— Messages  
•
•
three call processing fixed keys:  
— Line  
— Hold  
— Release  
automatic network configuration  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Figure 58 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting  
Table 54 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting  
Use the Volume control buttons to adjust  
the volume of the ringer and speaker.  
Press the Mute button on the main unit or  
any extension speaker to mute the ringer  
and speaker.  
Press the Mute key on the extension  
microphone to toggles the mute state of the  
entire telephone, not just that microphone.  
Press the Line (DN) key to access the  
single line and activate on-hook dialing. No  
status icon or LED is provided.  
Press the Release key to terminate an  
active call.  
Press the Hold key to put an active call  
on hold. Press the Line (DN) key to return  
to the caller on hold.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 165  
Table 54 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting  
Press the Messages key to access the  
callers list.  
Use the Navigation keys to scroll through  
menus and lists appearing on the LCD  
display screen.  
A small arrow appears on the right side of  
the display when there is additional text or  
prompts to be displayed.  
Press the Services key to access the main  
Menu. You can also use this key to access  
the following features, if they are available  
on your telephone:  
•
•
•
•
Call Transfer  
Call Park  
Call Forward  
3-way and 6-way Conference Call  
Soft keys (self-labeled) are located below  
the LCD screen display. The LCD screen  
display above the key changes, based on  
the active feature.  
Press the >> soft key to toggle between the  
first and second row of soft keys.  
LCD screen display  
The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has two display areas:  
•
•
The upper display area contains single-line information for items such as the caller number,  
caller name, feature prompt strings, digits entered by the user, date and time information, and  
set information.  
The lower display area provides soft key label information.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
166 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Figure 59 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 LCD screen display  
Status Indicators  
The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 uses three bi-color LED lights, located around the speaker,  
to indicate the telephone status.  
Table 55 Status indicators  
LEDs  
Status  
Solid green  
Solid red  
Active call  
Message waiting  
Incoming call  
Mute  
Flashing red  
Blinking red  
The idle telephone display indicates if there is a message waiting or missed call.  
Each extension microphone has an LED indicator, indicating the mute status of the telephone.  
IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E  
IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E bring voice and data to the desktop by connecting  
directly to a Local Area Network (LAN) through an Ethernet connection. Refer to the IP  
Phone 1120E User Guide (NN-10300-062) and the IP Phone 1140E User Guide  
(NN-10300-064) for additional information.  
Your IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E support the following:  
•
four user-defined feature keys with labels and indicators on the IP Phone 1120E, six  
user-defined feature keys with labels and indicators on the IP Phone 1140E  
•
four soft keys  
Note: Some IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E phones are not configured to support  
soft key functionality. Consult your system administrator.  
•
•
•
graphical, high-resolution LCD display, backlit, with adjustable contrast  
high-quality speaker phone  
volume control keys for adjusting ringer, speaker, handset, and headset volume  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 167  
•
six specialized feature keys:  
— Quit  
— Directory  
— Message/Inbox  
— Shift/Outbox  
— Services  
— Copy  
•
six call-processing fixed keys:  
— Mute  
— Handsfree  
— Goodbye  
— Expand to PC  
— Headset  
— Hold  
•
•
•
•
•
•
gigabit Ethernet ports  
built-in gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access  
headset jack with an On/Off key  
USB port to support a keyboard or mouse  
automatic network configuration  
hearing-aid compatibility  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Figure 60 IP Phone 1120E  
User-defined feature keys  
Visual Alerter/Message Waiting  
indicator  
Feature Status Lamp*  
Handset  
Speaker  
High-resolution  
graphical display screen  
Soft keys  
Navigation keys  
Copy key  
Services key  
Quit/Stop key  
Message/Inbox key  
Shift/Outbox key  
Directory key  
Goodbye key  
Expand to PC key  
Headset key  
Hold key  
Volume control  
Mute key  
Handsfree key  
Dialpad  
*Note: If supported by your server, the Feature Status Lamp provides a user-defined alert.  
Contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is available for you.  
Note: The IP Phone 1140E has wireless headset support using a Bluetooth® 1.2  
compliant Audio Gateway (Headset Profile, Bluetooth Power Class 2). For information on  
configuring Bluetooth® refer to the IP Phone 1140E User Guide (NN-10300-064).  
To enable Bluetooth® on an IP Phone 1140E  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Double-press the Services key.  
Use the navigation keys to scroll to Network Configuration.  
Press the Send/Enter key to select the Network Configuration menu.  
Scroll to the Enable Bluetooth field using the navigation keys.  
Press the Send/Enter key to modify the Enable Bluetooth field.  
Scroll through the options to Auto.  
Press Send/Enter to confirm selection.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 169  
Figure 61 IP Phone 1140E  
User-defined feature keys  
Visual Alerter/Message Waiting  
indicator  
Feature Status Lamp*  
Handset  
Speaker  
High-resolution  
graphical display screen  
Soft keys  
Copy key  
Services key  
Quit/Stop key  
Message/Inbox key  
Shift/Outbox key  
Directory key  
Goodbye key  
Volume control  
Expand to PC key  
Headset key  
Hold key  
Mute key  
Handsfree key  
Navigation keys  
Dialpad  
*Note: If supported by your server, the Feature Status Lamp provides a user-defined alert.  
Contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is available for you.  
Table 4 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Button  
Description  
Soft keys are located below the display area. The LCD label  
above each key changes based on the active feature.  
Fwd  
The keys on either side of the display area are user-defined  
feature keys, with labels on the LCD display.  
A steady LCD light beside a line (DN) key indicates that the line  
is active. A flashing LCD light indicates the line is on hold or the  
feature is being programmed.  
A steady LCD light beside a feature key indicates that the feature  
is active. A flashing LCD light indicates that the feature is being  
programmed.  
GrpCl Z  
Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the  
ringer, handset, headset, speaker, and the Handsfree feature.  
Press the top button to increase the volume, and press the  
bottom button to decrease volume.  
(Volume +)  
(Volume -)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
170 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Table 4 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Button  
Description  
Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without  
transmitting. Press the Mute key again to return to two-way  
conversation. The Mute key applies to handsfree, handset, and  
headset microphones.  
(Mute)  
The Mute LED indicator, located on the Mute key, flashes to  
indicate that the microphone is muted.  
Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree.  
The Handsfree LED indicator, located on the Handsfree key,  
lights to indicate when handsfree is active.  
(Handsfree)  
Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists  
appearing on the LCD display screen. The outer part of this key  
cluster rocks for up, down, left, and right movements.  
Use the Send/Enter key, at the center of the Navigation key  
cluster, to select a field to edit and to confirm menu selections.  
In most menus, you can use the Send/Enter key instead of the  
Select soft key.  
Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold. Tap the flashing  
line (DN) soft key to return to the caller on hold.  
(Hold)  
Use the Expand to PC key to access external server  
applications.  
(Expand)  
(Headset)  
Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to  
switch a call from the handset or handsfree to the headset.  
The Headset LED indicator, located on the Handsfree key, lights  
to indicate that the headset is in use.  
Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active call.  
(Goodbye)  
When a message is waiting, the red Visual Alerter/Message  
Waiting indicator flashes. Also, when the ringer sounds, this  
indicator flashes.  
When your IP Phone 1140E firmware is being updated, the blue  
Feature Status Lamp indicator flashes.  
To find out if additional features are supported, contact your  
administrator.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 171  
Table 4 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons (Sheet 3 of 3)  
Button  
Description  
Press the Copy Key to copy entries to your Personal Directory  
from other lists, such as the Caller List, Redial List, and  
Corporate Directory.  
(Copy)  
Press the Services key to access the scrollable Feature Display  
menu (FEATURE *900), including the hot desking feature  
(programmable memory button).  
(Services)  
Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu,  
and use the navigation keys to access the following items:  
1. Preferences  
(Services)  
(Services)  
2. Local Diagnostics  
3. Network Configuration  
4. Lock Menu  
Note: This menu offers access to the same options that are  
accessible through the start-up menu.  
Your system administrator can establish a password for the  
Tools menu. If you attempt to access the Tools menu and a  
dialog box appears prompting you for a password, contact your  
system administrator.  
Press the Quit/Stop key to close an active menu or dialog box.  
Pressing the Quit/Stop key does not affect the status of active  
calls.  
(Quit)  
Press the Express messaging key (FEATURE 980;  
programmable memory button) to send voice mail messages.  
For more information about voice mail messaging, refer to your  
CallPilot Quick Reference Card.  
(Shift/Outbox)  
(Msg/Inbox)  
Press the Mailbox in key (programmable memory button) to  
open your CallPilot mailbox. For more information about mailbox  
options, refer to your CallPilot Quick Reference Card.  
Programmable memory button  
(Default: Blank)  
(Directory)  
WLAN handset 2210/2211/2212 button defaults  
The Nortel WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212 are fully functional wireless handsets specifically  
designed for the busy office environment.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
172 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
WLAN handset buttons and keys  
Figure 62 shows the WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212 buttons and keys.  
Figure 62 WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212 buttons and keys  
G
C
G
C
G
H
C
D
D
B
A
D
B
A
I
A
I
B
J
I
J
J
E
F
E
F
E
F
WLAN Handset 2210  
WLAN Handset 2211  
WLAN Handset 2212  
The following table describes the WLAN handset buttons and keys.  
Table 56 WLAN handset buttons, keys, and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Button  
Description  
Power On/Start Call key  
Turns on the handset. This key also affects some of the states of  
the handset.  
A
B
Power Off/End Call key  
Ends an active call and turns off the handset.  
The user must end every call to release system resources and  
allow the handset to function properly.  
Feature and Display soft keys  
Ftre  
C
D
The first of the four soft keys is the Feature soft key, which starts  
or ends a feature. The next three soft keys are Display keys,  
which show feature options.  
Menu key  
Displays the full description of the Display soft keys  
abbreviations and accesses the handset features.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 173  
Table 56 WLAN handset buttons, keys, and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Button  
Description  
Function key  
Accesses handset functions when in active (idle) state.  
E
The Function key also provides access to the User Option  
menu in the standby state.  
Line key  
Accesses the Feature menu.  
F
Up, Down, and Select buttons  
Enables you to navigate and activate the various menu options.  
Adjusts the speaker and ringer volume.  
G
Push-to-Talk button  
Push-to-Talk is available on the WLAN Handset 2211 only.  
Activates the Push-to-Talk feature on the WLAN Handset 2211.  
H
WLAN handset display  
There are three areas to the WLAN handset display:  
•
•
•
“Status area” on page 173  
“Information area” on page 174  
“Feature options area” on page 174  
Figure 63 shows an example of the WLAN handset display.  
Figure 63 WLAN handset display  
Status area  
Information area  
Feature options area  
Ftur  
Aaaa  
Bbbb  
Cccc  
Status area  
The status area displays the handset status. It can include:  
•
•
•
status indicators (see Table 57)  
left and right arrows  
a series of dots representing the line keys, which change to a number when active  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
174 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Table 57 describes the status indicators on your WLAN Handset.  
Table 57 Status indicators  
You are outside the coverage area and cannot receive or place calls. An audible alarm  
also sounds. Return to the coverage area to reestablish the connection.  
No Service  
Your battery pack charge is low. An audible beep also sounds. Replace your battery  
pack within two minutes.  
You have a new voicemail message.  
A melody is played when the WLAN handset is turned on for the first time following a  
completed charge.  
Melody  
The No Service status indicator appears in the information area of the handset display.  
Information area  
The Information area shows:  
•
•
•
the extension number of the handset  
a line for general information  
features and call information when the handset is in use  
Feature options area  
When a feature is activated, or when you are on an active call, the Feature options area shows you  
the action you must take to proceed.  
For example: Pswd. This means you must enter your mailbox password.  
The Feature options area shows the label for the Ftre soft key and for the three display soft keys.  
These button labels appear directly above the Feature and display soft keys and to the right of the  
Ftre label on the display. These button labels vary depending on the feature in use.  
The WLAN Handset does not support scrolling. Therefore, any features that require the ability to  
scroll are not supported.  
DMC Portables (413X/414X) (Europe only)  
The DECT Handset 413X/414X is a DECT based handset, designed to be used in connection with  
Nortel wireless communication solutions in potentially explosive environments. The DECT  
transmitter frequencies of the apparatus are harmonized for these services in the European  
Community.  
X represents the frequency variant of the models:  
2 = (1900 - 1920 MHz frequency band)  
3 = (1880 - 1885 MHz frequency band)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 175  
5 = (1880 - 1900 MHz frequency band)  
Refer to the DECT 413X/414X Handset User Guide (N0028550) and the DECT 4145Ex/4146Ex  
Handset User Guide (NN40110-103), for more information.  
Figure 64 413X/414X handset  
A
C
B
D
F
H
G
I
J
L
J
K
E
Table 5 413X/414X handset (Sheet 1 of 3)  
Message indicator light  
A
Flashes when you have a message waiting.  
Volume control  
B
C
Adjusts the handset and ringer volume.  
Display  
Shows call information, handset status icons, and guides you through  
features and option menus.  
Headset connector  
D
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
Table 5 413X/414X handset (Sheet 2 of 3)  
Keys F to L activate different functions when your handset is on hook or off  
hook.  
E
On hook: Handset is idle (not in use).  
Off hook: Handset is active, call or feature in progress.  
Menu key  
F
On hook (idle)  
Enters the Handset Options menu.  
Activates a feature option.  
Off hook (active)  
< (  
) key  
G
On hook (idle)  
Enters the Redial List menu.  
Activates a feature option.  
> ( ) key  
Off hook (active)  
H
On hook (idle)  
Off hook (active)  
Enters the Telephone Book menu.  
Activates a feature option.  
3 ( ) key  
I
On hook (idle)  
Turns the handset off with a long (four second) key press.  
Turns the microphone off or on when you are on a call.  
Feature key  
Off hook (active)  
J
On hook (idle)  
Turns the display on for three seconds with two rapid key presses.  
OR  
Starts a feature session.  
Off hook (active)  
Starts or ends a feature session.  
OR  
Turns the loud speaker on with a long key press.  
R ( ) key  
K
On hook  
(idle)  
Opens your message list with a short key press.  
OR  
Enters the text message (MSF-MAIL) menu with a long (three second) key  
press.  
Off hook  
(active)  
Places calls on hold.  
On/Off hook key  
L
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 177  
Table 5 413X/414X handset (Sheet 3 of 3)  
On hook  
(idle)  
Turns the handset on.  
Ends an active call.  
Off hook  
(active)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
Chapter 22  
Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant  
portfolio  
Element Manager supports the programming of button functions for the digital and IP telephone  
sets. Use the Desktop Assistant family of products to customize button programming and to  
generate labels for telephone sets. Download the Desktop Assistant family of applications  
(including the LAN CTE Client) from the BCM web page. The application interface includes  
documentation for these applications.  
The Desktop Assistant family of products consists of:  
•
•
•
Desktop Assistant  
Desktop Assistant Pro  
Desktop Assistant Pro AE (Administrator Edition)  
Note: To run Desktop Assistant Pro AE, the LAN CTE Client must be running.  
Table 6 lists a comparison of the main features of each application.  
The Desktop Assistant Pro AE is the administrator tool. It requires the user to log onto the BCM  
using the BCM security system for authentication. It provides features that the Element Manager  
does not currently have — designing and printing labels, saving a definition for a set, and applying  
that definition to another set. This application allows users to program the keys on a set, and then  
print the corresponding labels. The application also allows access to all the sets on the system.  
Refer to the following topics for additional information:  
•
•
•
•
“Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro — Administrator Edition” on page 183  
“Button programming” on page 186  
“Button labeling” on page 186  
“Menu bar commands” on page 184  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
180 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio  
Table 6 Feature matrix (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Features/Functionality  
Overview  
Desktop Assistant  
Desktop Assistant Pro  
Desktop Assistant Pro AE  
Target user  
Purpose  
End user  
End user  
Network administrators  
Print labels for the buttons Print labels for T or M series Print labels for T and M  
of the T-series phones.  
phones, and program  
button functions for digital  
and IP phones.  
series phones, and  
program button functions  
for digital and IP phones.  
This is a stand-alone client  
application installed on the  
user's PC.  
The scope of this  
application is sets  
associated with the DN of  
the user.  
The scope of this  
application is all sets that  
require labeling or button  
programming attached to a  
specified BCM.  
This application requires  
LAN CTE to connect to the This application requires  
BCM to program telephone LAN CTE to connect to the  
set buttons. It can also run BCM to program telephone  
in offline mode without  
being connected to a BCM, in offline mode without  
for stand-alone support of being connected to a BCM,  
set buttons. It can also run  
label creation and printing. for stand-alone support of  
label creation and printing.  
Creating paper labels for  
telephone set buttons  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Programming telephone set No  
buttons  
Yes  
Yes  
Phones supported  
T7100 (L)  
T7208 (L)  
M7100 (L+P)  
M7100 (L+P)  
M7208 (L+P)  
M7208 (L+P)  
*Sets requiring paper labels T7316 (L)  
indicated by (L)  
M7310 (L+P)  
M 7310 (L+P)  
M7324 (L+P)  
T7406 (Wireless) (L)  
M7324 (L+P)  
T7316E (L)  
T24 KIM (L)  
M7324 CAP (L+P) -  
labeling in online mode only labeling in online mode only  
M7324 CAP (L+P) -  
*Sets in which buttons can  
be programmed using the  
application indicated by (P)  
M7100N (L+P)  
M7310N (L+P)  
M7324N (L+P)  
T7100 (L)  
M7100N (L+P)  
M7310N (L+P)  
M7324N (L+P)  
T7100 (L)  
T7208 (L+P)  
T7208 (L+P)  
T7316 (L+P)  
T7316 (L+P)  
T7316E (L+P)  
T7406 (Wireless) (L+P)  
T7316E (L+P)  
T7406 (Wireless) (L+P)  
T24 KIM (L+P) - labeling in T24 KIM (L+P) - labeling in  
online mode only  
online mode only  
2001 (P)  
2001 (P)  
2002 (P)  
2002 (P)  
2004 (P)  
2004 (P)  
1120 (P)  
1120 (P)  
1140 (P)  
1140 (P)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio 181  
Table 6 Feature matrix (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Features/Functionality  
Desktop Assistant  
Desktop Assistant Pro  
Desktop Assistant Pro AE  
Language Support  
Multilingual labels —  
French, Spanish  
English only  
English only  
Accessing Desktop Assistant features  
Application download  
Download Desktop  
Assistant client from the  
User Applications selection client from the User  
Download LAN CTE and  
Desktop Assistant Pro  
Download LAN CTE and  
Desktop Assistant Pro AE  
client from the  
on the BCM web page.  
Applications selection on  
the BCM web page.  
Administrator Applications  
selection on the BCM web  
page.  
Steps and procedures to  
launch and use the  
application  
Install Desktop Assistant  
client application on User  
workstation.  
Install Desktop Assistant  
Pro client application on  
User workstation  
Install Desktop Assistant  
Pro AE client application on  
User workstation  
User starts Desktop  
Assistant application.  
Install LAN CTE client on  
User workstation if button  
programming required.  
Install LAN CTE client on  
User workstation  
User selects telephone set  
model from List of Phones. User starts Desktop  
User starts Desktop  
Assistant Pro AE Client  
Assistant PRO application application  
Log on to the BCM is  
implicit through LAN CTE  
client  
User logs on to a BCM  
using BCM administrator  
account  
If the PC is unable to  
User selects phone device  
connect to the BCM through (DN) from a menu  
LAN CTE, then the  
application opens in offline  
mode (not connected).  
If you cannot connect the  
PC to the BCM through  
LAN CTE, then the  
application opens in offline  
mode (not connected)  
Access to locally connected No. Not needed. This  
Yes. Access to all sets  
associated with DNs  
associated with your  
No. This is an administrator  
tool, not an end user tool.  
telephone sets (on user's  
desk)  
application is not  
programming buttons; it is  
only providing a printout of workstation (through LAN  
labels that can be applied to CTE)  
the sets.  
Operates in offline mode  
(not connected to BCM)  
Yes  
Yes - label creation only  
Yes - label creation only  
Operates in online mode  
(connected to BCM)  
No  
Yes - label creation and  
button programming for  
own sets only  
Yes - label creation and  
button programming  
Can switch between  
different BCMs  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio  
Table 6 Feature matrix (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Features/Functionality  
Desktop Assistant  
Desktop Assistant Pro  
Desktop Assistant Pro AE  
Access to networked  
telephone sets - online  
programming  
No  
Yes, limited. Access to all  
sets associated with DNs  
associated with your  
Yes. All sets managed by  
the BCM  
workstation (via LAN CTE)  
Features  
Selection of Telephone  
set(s)  
User selects from menu  
User selects from menu  
User selects DN from list  
Set associated with the DN  
is presented by the  
application  
Can select only one DN at a  
time  
Pictorial View of Phone  
Programmable Features  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
None  
Messaging  
Paging  
Messaging  
Paging  
Call Logging  
Set Options  
Call Initialization  
Call Logging  
Set Options  
Call Initialization  
Call Answering/Modification Call Answering/Modification  
Voice Mail  
Voice Mail  
Call Centre  
Call Centre  
Hospitality  
Hospitality  
IP Features  
IP Features  
Application Features  
Application Features  
Others (All end-user  
programmable features)  
Others (All end-user  
programmable features)  
Save to File  
Yes, label definitions only  
Yes  
Yes  
Save for a DN/Set combo.  
Save for a DN/Set combo.  
Label, font, bkgd color,  
button programming.  
Label, font, bkgd color,  
button programming.  
Load Settings to phone  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Can retrieve a saved file  
Can retrieve a saved file  
and apply to a different set and apply to a different set  
of same type  
of same type  
One at a time; bulk  
operation not supported  
One at a time; bulk  
operation not supported  
Customize fonts for labels  
(text size, text color,  
Yes  
Partial. Text color cannot be Partial. Text color cannot be  
changed.  
changed.  
background fill color)  
Print Labels  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes (N/A for IP Phones)  
Yes (N/A for IP Phones)  
Yes (N/A for IP Phones)  
Yes (N/A for IP Phones)  
Print Preview  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio 183  
Table 6 Feature matrix (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Features/Functionality  
Desktop Assistant  
Desktop Assistant Pro  
Desktop Assistant Pro AE  
Print Multiple Sets  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Help Features/  
Documentation  
Yes - Integrated with  
application. Includes  
Yes - Integrated with  
application. Includes  
bubble help over button on bubble help over button on  
diagram of set type. diagram of set type.  
Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro — Administrator  
Edition  
The Nortel Desktop Assistant Pro AE is a LAN CTE-based application that the system  
administrator can use to manage the configuration of desktop telephones. The following functions  
are available:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
button labeling including font, font size, and background color control  
label printing  
button programming of end-user accessible features (requires CTE access to devices).  
saving a telephone configuration.  
telephone feature help system.  
ability to switch between systems without exiting the program.  
Desktop Assistant Pro — Administrator Edition main window  
The main window shows the following:  
•
•
•
•
menu bar  
toolbar  
telephone being programmed/labeled  
status bar  
See Figure 65.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
184 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio  
Figure 65 Desktop Assistant Pro - Administrator Edition  
Menu bar commands  
The menu bar in the Desktop Assistant Pro AE offers the following options for configuring your  
telephone set and printing your labels:  
•
•
•
“File menu”  
“Labels menu” on page 185  
“Phone menu” on page 185  
File menu  
The file menu offers the following commands:  
•
•
System — Change systems.  
To open the System dialog box, click File > System. From this dialog box, you can select a  
different BCM system.  
Phone Device — Select a device to view or program.  
To open the Phone Device dialog box, click File > Phone Device. From this dialog box, you  
can select one of the accessible BCM phone devices available.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio 185  
•
•
Save Current Settings — Save the settings from a current device in a designated file.  
Click File > Save Current Settings to open the Windows Save As dialog box. From this dialog  
box, you can select the filename under which the current device settings are saved. The default  
file extension for this file is pcf (Phone Configuration File).  
Load Settings — Load a previously saved configuration into the current device.  
Click File > Load Settings to open the Windows file open dialog box. From the file open  
dialog box, you can select the phone configuration file (pcf) to load into the currently selected  
phone device. The device that you load is accepted only if the saved device type is the same as  
the current device. Also note that Line appearances, Answer Keys, Hunt Group keys,  
Handsfree keys and Intercom keys are not end-user programmable features and, therefore, are  
skipped.  
The Load Settings command is available for offline button labeling and online phone device  
programming.  
•
Exit — Exit the Desktop Assistant Pro AE.  
Labels menu  
The labels menu offers the following commands:  
•
Print Preview — Previews the label before printing.  
To open the Print Preview window, click Labels > Print Preview.  
From this window, you can preview the labels for the current device and print them from here  
or close the dialog box.  
•
Print — Prints the label from the current device to the selected printer.  
To open the Print window, click Labels > Print. From this window, you can select the printer  
and number of copies of the current label set to print.  
Phone menu  
Use the phone menu to switch between the different phone types. In offline mode, the entire list of  
supported phones (except for the 2007,2004,2002, 2001, 1140e, 1120e, and 2033 sets) are  
available for labeling. In programming mode, you can select only those phones in the same class as  
the current one. The classes of phones are as follows:  
•
M7100  
M7100N  
T7100  
•
•
M7208  
T7208  
M7310  
M7310N  
T7316  
T7406  
•
M7324  
M7324N  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
186 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets: Desktop Assistant portfolio  
•
2004  
2007  
1140e  
•
•
2002  
1120e  
2001  
2033  
This menu also offers a set refresh command. Select this command to reset all labels to blank in  
offline mode. In programming mode, all buttons are queried from the set, and all labels are set to  
the programmed values.  
Button programming  
With Desktop Assistant Pro AE, you can program buttons on a set so there is no need to memorize  
feature codes.  
You can program buttons on any valid device by right-clicking the appropriate label. At this point,  
you see a list of all the features you can program. Scan the list or sub-lists, and select the feature to  
program on that button.  
Button labeling  
In addition to button programming, Desktop Assistant Pro AE provides the capability to label  
buttons on a set. You can label buttons in offline mode or during button programming.  
To label a button  
1
Click the appropriate label.  
A cursor appears in the label area.  
2
Change the text, font size, font type, or background color.  
You can view the current font size, font type, and background color in the toolbar at the top of  
the window.  
Note: This application does not retain labels, font size, font type or  
background color between sessions. To save or restore this information,  
use the Save Current Settings and Load Settings on the File menu.  
Button Labeling does not apply to the 2007, 2004, 2002, 2001, 1140E,  
1120E, and 2033 sets because they do not have printable labels.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
187  
Chapter 23  
Telephony features  
Feature programming has two aspects. Some features are set for all telephones and devices, and  
some features are set on an individual basis in the DN record.  
The following divides system features in terms of how they are used. Each feature section contains  
both system programming and how the feature is used at the telephone.  
•
•
Features to set up telephone set features  
“Feature configuration: Answering calls” on page 193“Feature configuration: Making calls”  
on page 213“Global VoIP features” on page 139  
“Using telephones for special features” on page 225Refer to the BCM 4.0 Telephone Features  
User Guide (N0027160) for a quick reference about using the system features.  
Also refer to:  
•
•
“System features and feature codes” on page 33 (quick reference list of codes)  
“Relocating telephones” in the BCM 4.0 Telephony Device Installation Guide (N0060609)  
Features to set up telephone set features  
These features are available only on digital and IP telephones. You can block the user from using  
these feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to Partial or Full (Configuration >  
Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab > Properties tab, Set Lock drop-down list).  
Contrast adjustment  
The following path indicates where to access the contrast adjustment:  
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs > top panel - Capabilities  
and Preferences > bottom panel - Preferences  
•
Telset Admin: **CONFIG > Terminals and Sets > User prefernces > contrast  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
188 Chapter 23 Telephony features  
•
At the telephone:  
1
2
3
Press FEATURE *7.  
Press a number from 1 to 9 (depending on your telephone).  
Press HOLD to set your choice.  
Select how you dial your calls  
Digital telephones provide three methods for dialing calls:  
•
Standard dial: allows you to make a call by selecting a line and dialing the number. If you  
have a prime line, it is selected automatically when you lift the handset, or press the Handsfree  
button.  
•
•
Automatic dial: allows you to dial a number without selecting a line. Your Prime line is  
selected when you start dialing a number. Your Prime line must be free to make a call.  
Pre-dial: allows you to enter a telephone number, check it, then change it before making the  
call. The call does not dial until you select a line or line pool, or lift the handset. You can  
pre-dial both external and internal numbers. However, you must select the correct type of line  
(external or internal) for the type of number you have entered.  
•
Using the system:  
(Note that not all telephones allow all three types of dialing).  
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs > top panel - Capabilities  
and Preferences > bottom panel - Preferences  
•
•
Using the telset interface:  
Telset Admin: Terminals and Sets > User prefernces > dialing opt’ns  
At the telephone:  
1
2
3
Press FEATURE *82.  
Press # to select the mode.  
Press HOLD to store the mode.  
Choosing the language for the telephone display  
•
Using the system:  
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs > top panel - Capabilities  
and Preferences > bottom panel - Preferences  
•
Using the telset interface:  
Telset Admin: Terminals and Sets > User prefernces > Language  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 23 Telephony features 189  
•
At the telephone:  
— FEATURE *501 to select Primary Language for the telephone display.  
— FEATURE *502 to select Alternate Language for the telephone display.  
— FEATURE *503 to select Alternate Language 2 for the telephone display.  
— FEATURE *504 to select Alternate Language 3 for the telephone display. (Not available  
in all country profiles.)  
Moving line buttons  
Change the position of your line or hunt group line buttons.  
To move line buttons  
1
2
3
4
Press FEATURE *81.  
Press the line button that you want to move.  
Press the button to which you want to move the line.  
Press RLS.  
The two buttons are exchanged.  
5
Update the button label strip on your telephone.  
Note: Line buttons cannot be exchanged with intercom, Answer DN, or  
Handsfree buttons.  
You can block the user from using these feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to  
Partial or Full (Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab).  
Receiver volume  
•
Using the system (determine if the handset or headset volume returns to a volume level set by  
the system, or to the volume set by the user):  
Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings > Receiver volume  
•
At the telephone:  
Use the rocker switch under the dialpad to change the sound levels heard through your  
handset. This also changes the volume levels during handsfree calls.  
Programming note: Handsfree speaker volume returns to the default value set at the telephone,  
after each call ends.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
190 Chapter 23 Telephony features  
Programming distinctive ringing  
You can program a line or a telephone to use a distinctive ring, when alerting at a telephone. Ring  
types are ordered in a hierarchy. Hence, an incoming call, on a line with a higher priority ring than  
that assigned to the telephone, uses the line distinctive ring. If the telephone has the higher ring  
priority, the call uses the ring defined by the telephone.  
Distinctive ring can also be defined for hunt group calls.  
•
Using the system:  
For lines – Configuration >Telephony > Lines > Active Sets > Preferences tab  
For DN records – Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Top panel -  
Capabilities and Preferences tab > Bottom panel - Preferences tab  
For hunt groups: Configuration > Telephony > Hunt groups  
Using the telset interface:  
•
•
Lines > Trunk/line data > Distinct ring  
Terminals and Sets > Capabilities > Distinct ring  
System progrming > Hunt groups > Distinct ring  
At the telephone (for set distinct ring, only):  
1
2
3
Press FEATURE *6.  
Enter the ring type number (1 to 4).  
Press HOLD.  
Note: There are only four distinct ring patterns in the system.  
Ring volume  
Adjust the volume of your telephone any time it rings.  
Press FEATURE *80 until the ring is at the volume you want.  
Auxiliary ringer  
This optional device can be connected through the RJ21 connection to your system. The auxiliary  
ringer is suited to locations that require loud ringing bells or horns (for example, factories or  
construction sites).  
Enabling or disabling the feature for:  
•
lines — Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Lines > Preferences - bottom  
panel  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 23 Telephony features 191  
•
telephones — Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets >  
Capabilities and Preferences - top panel > Preferences - bottom panel (“Capabilities and  
Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 52)  
•
•
ring groups — Element Manager: Configuration > Ring groups > Line settings > Aux.  
Ringer (“Ring Groups - Line Settings tab” on page 97)  
hunt groups — Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Hunt Groups > Aux.  
Ringer (“Hunt Groups system setup” on page 100 )  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192 Chapter 23 Telephony features  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
Chapter 24  
Feature configuration: Answering calls  
Incoming calls can be answered or handled in a number of ways.  
Refer to the following methods:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Answering calls directed to your telephone”  
“Answering calls not directed to your telephone” on page 194  
“Configuring privacy” on page 197  
“Holding calls” on page 200  
“Parking or transferring calls” on page 201  
“Call information” on page 209  
Answering calls directed to your telephone  
If a call comes into a designated line button, you press that button to answer the call.  
If there are no line buttons on your telephone, or the call rings but no line buttons light up, choose  
one of three ways to answer a call at your telephone:  
There are three ways you can choose to answer a call that rings at your telephone:  
•
•
lift the receiver.  
press the Handsfree button and speak through the external speaker.  
Note: This feature is not available on all telephones. Refer to  
“Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback” on page 193.  
•
answer through a headset.  
Note: This feature is not available on all telephones.  
Calls can also have special ring tones, depending on distinctive ring values for the lines and the  
telephone. Refer to “Programming distinctive ringing” on page 190.  
Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback  
Enable Handsfree (HF) to use the telephone speakers or a headset.  
Enable HF answerback to allow users to answer a call without lifting the handset, or to use a  
headset.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
194 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
This feature is set on a per-telephone basis through the Element Manager.  
Note: The handsfree and handsfree answerback feature is not available  
on telephones with no speakerphone capability (2001, 7000, 7100),  
To configure handsfree and handsfree answerback  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to enable or disable handsfree.  
2
3
4
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom frame, click the Capabilities tab.  
Set the Handsfree and HF answerback fields.  
Handsfree speaker volume: The handsfree speaker volume returns to the telephone volume  
default setting, after a call is released.  
Listen to a call as a group: This feature (FEATURE 802) allows more than one person to listen  
to a telephone, without the caller hearing everyone in the group (the handset is off-hook).  
For general information about how handsfree and mute works, refer to the overview information.  
Through the **CONFIG telset interface  
Terminals and Sets > Capabilities > Handsfree and HF Answerback  
Answering calls not directed to your telephone  
There are a number of features you can use to answer incoming calls that do not come directly to  
your line or intercom buttons.  
Refer to the following features:  
•
•
•
•
“Call Queuing”  
“Directed Pickup”  
“Pickup Group” on page 195  
“Answer DNs” on page 196  
Call Queuing  
This feature allows you to answer the next incoming call on your telephone, based on call priority.  
Call priority is based on waiting time. The caller that has waited the longest is answered first.  
To use call queuing: Press FEATURE 801.  
Directed Pickup  
This feature allows a user to answer any ringing telephone in the system.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 195  
Enter FEATURE 76, and the DN of a ringing telephone, to answer any telephone in the system.  
Enabling the feature:  
In Element Manager (Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings), select  
the check box to enable the feature for the entire system.  
Pickup Group  
This feature allows the user to answer calls on another telephone in the same pickup group.  
To add a telephone to a pickup group  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs, select the DN record for the telephone  
for which you want to enable or disable Pickup Group.  
2
3
4
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom frame, click the Capabilities tab.  
In the Pickup group field, enter a group number.  
Using the feature  
Enter FEATURE 75. The external call that has been ringing the longest is answered first.  
Trunk Answer  
This feature is only active when a ringing service schedule is running. It allows a user to answer a  
ringing call in any area in the system, from any telephone in the system. The line being answered  
does not have to appear, or ring, at the telephone being used to answer the call.  
Press FEATURE 800.  
To allow trunk answer  
1
2
Assign the telephone to a ringing group.  
Create a ringing group schedule, if necessary.  
When the schedule is active, this feature is active.  
To block user access  
You can block the user from using the feature keys by setting the telephone set lock to Full.  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to restrict trunk answer.  
2
Click the Restrictions tab.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
196 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
3
4
Click the Set restrictions tab in the bottom frame.  
Beside the appropriate schedule, enter Full.  
Answer DNs  
Telephone DNs can be assigned to indicator buttons on other telephones to provide backup  
answering. You can assign a maximum of eight answer DNs to a telephone. You cannot assign  
Answer DNs to analog telephones, or to Model 7000 or 7100 telephones.  
Determining which calls alert  
You can also determine which calls alert at Answer DNs.  
Under Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings, beside Answer keys,  
choose the level of support. Refer to “Answer DN answer key levels” on page 76.  
Warning: This setting affects all Answer DNs on the system. Some features,  
such as Hunt group overflow, require the setting to be either Enhanced or  
Extended. However, if you assign Answer DNs to Contact Center telephones, the  
setting must be Basic. Therefore, you must coordinate how your system uses  
Answer DNs.  
Assigning Answer DNs to telephones  
Answer DNs are assigned on a per-telephone basis by the system administrator.  
To assign an Answer DN  
1
Ensure that the telephone you want to assign with Answer DNs has available memory buttons  
with indicators.  
2
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, under the Line Access tab, choose  
the DN record for the telephone where you want to add Answer DNs.  
3
4
5
In the bottom panel, click the Answer DNs tab.  
Use Add to enter a valid DN, and indicate how the call alerts at the telephone.  
Click OK to save the record.  
Answering a call coming to an Answer DN  
The Answer DN button presents an incoming call as a flashing indicator.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 197  
To answer the call, lift the handset, use handsfree or headset, and press the button beside the  
indicator. The call is transferred to your telephone, freeing up the line on the originating telephone.  
Note: The Answer DN also can be used as an autodial button to the  
assigned telephone. The indicator beside the Answer DN button must be  
idle to enable this feature.  
Note: If call logging is enabled for the telephone, then calls received  
through Answer DN are logged at the receiving telephone that answers  
the call.  
Configuring privacy  
To maintain your privacy, or if you do not want to be disturbed, you can choose not to answer a  
call, or you can use one of the features described below.  
If you choose not to answer the call, the Delayed ring transfer setting determines how many rings  
occur before the call is transferred to the prime telephone. (Configuration > Telephony > Global  
Settings > Feature Settings).  
Refer to the following methods to configure privacy:  
•
•
•
•
“Do Not Disturb”  
“DND on Busy”  
“Turn Privacy on or off” on page 198  
“Intrusion controls” on page 200  
Do Not Disturb  
Forward your calls to a designated prime telephone, when there is no other telephone assigned  
with the line. An internal caller receives a display indicating that the telephone has Do Not Disturb  
active. They can either call back, or use the Priority call feature to override the feature.  
DND on Busy  
When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in, your telephone alerts you to the second  
call with a light ring. If you find this second-call ring disruptive, assign Do Not Disturb (DND) on  
Busy to prevent a second call.  
If this feature is active, the line indicator for an external incoming call flashes, but your telephone  
does not ring.  
•
Internal and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when you are on the  
telephone.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
198 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
•
External callers are transferred to the Prime set used in your system, or to your voice mail.  
Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy. If an external call uses a target line, the  
call is processed according to the programming of the target line. If the target line is busy, the  
caller hears a busy tone, or the call is routed to the Prime set for the target line or to the voice  
mail system, even if DND on Busy is programmed.  
Programming a telephone for DND on Busy  
This feature is programmed on a per-telephone basis.  
To program a telephone for DND on Busy  
1
2
Ensure that target lines are programmed to route the unanswered call correctly.  
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone to which you want to reroute second calls.  
3
4
5
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom panel, click the Capabilities tab.  
Select the DND on Busy check box.  
Allowing Do Not Disturb on a telephone  
This feature is programmed on a per-telephone basis.  
Using the feature  
Press FEATURE 85 to activate the feature.  
Use FEATURE #85 to cancel DND.  
Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your telephone. Voice calls appear as  
normal intercom calls.  
Blocking user access  
You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to Full.  
(Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs > Restrictions tab > Set Lock drop-down list).  
Turn Privacy on or off  
When you have lines assigned to more than one telephone, anyone with the line appearance can  
answer a call, or join a call in progress. To provide exclusive access for a user, you can program  
privacy on a line, in which case, only one person at a time can use the line. (This does not apply to  
target lines.)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 199  
Programming privacy on a line  
The privacy setting only applies to lines that are assigned individually to telephones.  
Lines in line pools do not have this feature.  
To program privacy on a line  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Lines > Active Physical Lines, choose the line for  
which you want to assign privacy.  
2
3
In the bottom panel, click the Preferences tab.  
Beside Trunk mode, choose Unspr (unsupervised) from the drop-down list.  
Programming a line to automatically enable privacy  
You can program some lines to make a call private automatically.  
To automatically enable privacy on a line  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Lines > Active Physical Lines, select the line for which  
you want to automatically enable privacy.  
2
3
4
In the bottom panel, click the Preferences tab.  
Select the Auto privacy check box.  
If the line is part of a line pool, ensure that all other lines in the pool also have this feature  
enabled.  
Using the Privacy feature  
Press FEATURE 83 to change the privacy setting on the line.  
•
•
•
If a line normally has privacy, this permits another telephone, which shares the line, to join  
your call by selecting the line while you are using it.  
If a line normally has privacy disabled, this prevents another telephone, which shares the line  
from joining your call by selecting the line while you are using it.  
The privacy setting is re-established when you end your call, or when you enter the Privacy  
feature code again.  
Note: Privacy control cannot be used for internal or conference calls.  
When another telephone joins a call on a non-private line, the participants on the call hear a tone,  
and a message appears on the display.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
200 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
Blocking user access  
You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the telephone set lock to Full.  
(Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs > Restrictions tab > Set Lock drop-down list).  
Intrusion controls  
If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian call attendant on a centralized  
voice mail system, the attendant can use the break-in feature to interrupt a call, regardless of any  
other settings on your line. The exception is if you have a higher intrusion priority than the  
attendant. If this is the situation, the attendant is forced to camp the call at your telephone, or  
redirect the call elsewhere in the system.  
Setting intrusion controls  
This feature is set on a per-telephone basis.  
To set intrusion controls  
1
2
Determine the intrusion level of the attendant telephone.  
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to change the intrusion level.  
3
4
5
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom panel, click the Capabilities tab.  
Select a level from the Intrusion protection level drop-down list.  
Holding calls  
After you answer a call, you can transfer the call, look up some information, or answer another  
call. Use the Hold feature to place a call on hold.  
Refer to the following methods to place a call on hold:  
•
•
•
“Using Hold”  
“Hold automatically (autohold)”  
“Hold a call exclusively” on page 201  
Using Hold  
Place a call on hold by pressing HOLD.  
If you have system wide call appearance (SWCA) keys defined, this can also place the call on a  
SWCA key, and allow others to answer the call. Refer to the SWCA section for more details.  
To retrieve the call, press the held line button, or press the Hold button a second time if there is no  
line button.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 201  
There is no system programming for this feature: it is always active if the telephone has a Hold  
button.  
Hold automatically (autohold)  
A line or the telephone can be programmed to automatically place an active call on hold while  
answering another call, or placing a call.  
Model 7100 and 7000 telephones, which do not have line keys, also use the HOLD key to toggle  
between active calls.  
FEATURE 73 activates this feature. FEATURE #73 cancels the feature.  
To program full autohold on a line  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Lines > Active Physical Lines, select the line record for  
which you want to enable Full autohold.  
2
In the bottom frame, under the Preferences tab, select the Full autohold check box.  
To program auto hold on a telephone  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to enable auto hold.  
2
3
4
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom panel, click the Capabilities tab.  
Select the Auto hold check box.  
Hold a call exclusively  
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that the calls can be retrieved only at your telephone.  
To program Exclusive Hold  
FEATURE 79 or FEATURE HOLD  
There is no system programming for this feature.  
Parking or transferring calls  
Calls coming in can be transferred after they are answered, or automatically transferred if they are  
not answered at the target telephone.  
These features include:  
•
•
“Transfer (answered) calls” on page 202  
“Transfer (unanswered) calls” on page 202  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
202 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Line redirection” on page 203  
“Call forward (unanswered) calls” on page 204  
“Camp-on” on page 205  
“Call Park” on page 206  
“Callback” on page 207  
“Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on page 207  
Transfer (answered) calls  
When you answer a call, you can transfer the call either to a telephone within the system, or to a  
telephone external to the system, such as a receptionist on another system in a private network.  
Note: You may not be able to transfer a call on an external line to an external telephone,  
depending on the capabilities of the lines.  
Setting up a transfer callback timer  
If an external call is transferred to a busy internal or network extension, or is not answered after a  
number of rings (preset), the call automatically rings you back. A system timer determines how  
long the system waits for a transferred call to be answered, before it returns the call to the original  
answering telephone.  
System settings: Transfer callback timeout  
To use the transfer feature  
1
2
3
4
5
Make or answer a call.  
Press FEATURE 70. The call is placed on temporary hold.  
Enter the number to which the call is to be transferred.  
Stay on the line to speak to the person first.  
Press RLS to complete the transfer.  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #70, or simply press held line.  
Transfer (unanswered) calls  
Telephones which do not use call forward to a voice mail system, can be programmed to forward  
unanswered external calls to a designated prime telephone.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 203  
To transfer unanswered calls  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Line Access tab, select the DN of  
the set to which you want to transfer the calls.  
2
In the Fwd No Answer field under the Properties tab in the bottom panel, enter the number of  
the telephone to which incoming calls are to be redirected.  
Line redirection  
When you answer a call, you can redirect the line to an external number. When redirected, all  
incoming calls on that line are directed to the external number. You can configure a tone to sound  
on your telephone when a redirection occurs.  
Lines can also be redirected through system programming. In this case, redirection can be removed  
only through system programming.  
To redirect lines from the system  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Lines > Active Physical Lines, select the line you want  
to redirect (ensure that the line is not in a line pool).  
2
3
4
5
In the bottom panel, click the Preferences tab.  
In the Redirect to field, enter the number to which to redirect the calls.  
Enter a remote number. Ensure that the routing codes are included.  
To turn off redirect, delete the remote number from the field.  
Allowing redirect  
You can enable the redirect feature on a telephone-by-telephone basis.  
To allow redirect  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to allow the redirect feature.  
2
3
4
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom panel, click the Capabilities tab.  
Select the Allow redirect check box.  
Setting a redirect tone  
You can cause a short ring to occur when a line is redirected using FEATURE 84. This is set for  
each telephone.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
204 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
To set a redirect tone  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to create a redirect tone.  
2
3
4
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
In the bottom panel, click the Capabilities tab.  
Select the Redirect ring check box.  
To redirect lines at the telephone  
1
2
Press FEATURE 84.  
Enter the external telephone number where you want the call to transfer.  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #84  
Note: Model 7000 and 7100 digital telephones, and 2001 IP telephones, do not support  
this feature.  
Call forward (unanswered) calls  
You can set up a telephone to send calls to another telephone automatically, or to a voice mail box  
if the telephone is not answered, or if it rings busy. This feature can be programmed from the  
system for each telephone, as well as at the telephone.  
Programming call forward on the system  
Using system programming, you can forward calls internally or externally if the telephone is  
unanswered, if the telephone is busy, or you can forward all calls to an external number.  
To program call forward on the system  
1
2
3
Determine the dial string for the telephone to which the calls are to be forwarded. Include  
routing codes if the telephone is external to the system.  
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Line Access tab, select the DN  
record for the telephone for which you want to configure call forward.  
In the bottom panel, under the Properties tab, enter the dial string where to forward the call.  
Note: Ensure that this entry is less than the Delayed ring transfer  
setting (Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature  
Settings).  
Fwd No Answer: Calls are forwarded to the entered dial string after a set number of  
rings.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 205  
Fwd Delay: Enter the number of rings before the system forwards the call.  
Fwd Busy: Calls are forwarded to the entered dial string immediately, if the target  
telephone is busy.  
Fwd All: All calls are forwarded to the indicated number immediately.  
Call Forward and voice mail  
Note: If the call forward destination is external, ensure the DN has  
Allow Redirect enabled.  
If you want a voice mail system to pick up unanswered calls:  
•
•
•
•
if you program Fwd No Answer and Fwd Busy, use the internal number of your voice mail as  
the destination.  
if your voice messaging system or service automatically retrieves calls, make the ring delay  
greater than the delay used by your voice mail system.  
if the voice mail system is on a remote system, ensure that the correct destination codes are  
added to the voice mail forwarding dial string.  
if calls are being forwarded to telephones or voice mail outside the system, ensure that Allow  
redirect is selected for the telephones.  
To use Call Forward at the telephone  
1
Get the DN (internal), or the destination code and telephone number (external private  
network), for the destination telephone.  
2
3
Enter FEATURE 4.  
Enter the dial string of the telephone to which you want your calls transferred.  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #4  
To block user access  
You can block the user from using the call forward feature by setting the Set Lock for the  
telephone to Full. (Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab > Set  
Lock drop-down list).  
Camp-on  
Use this feature to reroute an answered call to another telephone, and to park the call at the other  
telephone if all lines to the telephone are busy. The target telephone displays a message, indicating  
a camped call, and a tone occurs. When a line becomes available, the call is uncamped and  
transferred to the available line.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
206 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
Centralized voice mail, Meridian: If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian  
call attendant as part of a centralized voice mail system, the attendant can use camp-on to camp a  
call on any telephone in any system on the network.  
Setting the timer  
The system camps a call for a specified length of time before it returns the call to the original  
answering telephone. Set the timer under Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings >  
Feature Settings.  
To use Camp-on  
1
2
Press FEATURE 82.  
Dial the extension of the receiving telephone.  
Call Park  
You can park a call on the system that can be accessed from any telephone on the system.  
Calls are parked on a three-digit park code. The first digit of the code is a system access code. The  
last two digits range from 01 to 25. (FEATURE 74)  
You can also set a delay period for when the call returns to the telephone from which it was  
parked; under Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings. You can also  
determine the order used to assign the codes (Park mode).  
Setting up the call park access code  
The park prefix must be unique from any other access code (Default: 1).  
Configuration > Telephony > Dialing Plan > General (Access Codes subpanel)  
Setting up park timeout  
Determine how many minutes the system waits between parking a call and returning the call to the  
original answering telephone.  
Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings > Timers subpanel  
Determining the order in which call park codes are assigned to calls  
Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings > Park mode  
To park a call  
1
2
3
Enter FEATURE 74.  
The display shows a three-digit retrieval code (*X01-X24).  
Note the code, and inform other users about the parked call.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 207  
*X is the assigned access code.  
To retrieve a parked call  
1
2
On any system telephone, press an intercom button.  
Dial the retrieval code (*X01-X024).  
On the model 7000 and 7100 digital telephones and 2001 IP telephones, lift the handset, and  
dial the retrieval code *X25.  
*X is the assigned access code.  
Callback  
When you direct an answered call to another telephone, the system monitors the call to ensure it is  
answered. If no one answers the call within a set length of time, the system returns the call to you.  
To set the number of rings before the call is transferred back:  
Click Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings, in the Timers subpanel,  
select the number of rings from the Transfer callback timeout drop-down list.  
Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons  
System wide call appearance (SWCA) keys allow you to control call park and retrieval features on  
any type of line across the local system. These features expand the BCM call park and call retrieve  
features by providing visual indications of the status of any call parked on an SWCA button with  
indicators. The calls can also be controlled by directly entering the SWCA feature codes.  
You can use SWCA programming to define logical groups of telephones. Each group can be  
assigned a set of the SWCA codes, which allows them to pass calls within the group. Each  
telephone in the group also displays the current status of the call, so users can determine which  
calls are being handled.  
Configuring SWCA system controls  
The following procedure describes how to perform the system configuration for the SWCA  
feature.  
To configure the SWCA system controls  
1
Check that the Call Park Access code has a digit entered as a value.  
Programming note: If the value is set to None, the SWCA feature does not work.  
2
Choose one of the following configurations for the SWCA controls for your system  
(Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Advanced Feature Settings > SWCA  
panel).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
208 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
Configuration one  
If you want all incoming calls to auto-associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving  
telephone:  
a
b
c
d
To auto-associate SWCA key to call, select Automatically - life of call.  
To include I/C calls when auto-associating, select the check box.  
To invoke SWCA parking by Hold, select the check box.  
To include I/C calls when invoked by Hold, select the check box.  
Configuration two  
If you want incoming calls to auto-associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving  
telephone, but you want calls on hold to remain on hold at the receiving telephone, unless the  
user presses a SWCA button, or enters a SWCA code:  
a
b
c
d
To auto-associate SWCA key to call, select Automatically - life of call.  
To include I/C calls when auto-associating, select the check box.  
To invoke SWCA parking by Hold, clear the check box.  
Include I/C calls when invoked by Hold is not applicable in this configuration.  
Configuration three  
If you want external incoming calls to auto-associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving  
telephone, but you want all intercom calls to require manual parking:  
a
b
c
d
To auto-associate SWCA key to call, select the Automatically - life of call.  
To include I/C calls when auto-associating, clear the check box.  
To invoke SWCA parking by Hold, select the check box.  
To include I/C calls when invoked by Hold, clear the check box.  
Configuration four  
If you want all calls to require the user to press a SWCA button, or enter a SWCA code:  
a
To auto-associate SWCA key to call, select either Manually- while parked or Manually  
- life of call.  
b
c
d
Include I/C calls when auto-associating is not applicable in this configuration.  
To invoke SWCA parking by Hold, clear the check box.  
To include I/C calls when invoked by Hold is not applicable in this configuration.  
3
4
Configure the SWCA keys to indicator memory buttons on the telephones.  
Refer to “Programming memory buttons” on page 222 for details about programming memory  
buttons at the telephone.  
Label the buttons.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 209  
5
Let the users know how the SWCA buttons work, and which SWCA codes are available to  
them.  
Note: A user can park a call on any SWCA code; however only SWCA codes assigned to  
a telephone can be used to retrieve SWCA calls.  
Using the SWCA  
Refer to the System-wide Call Appearance (SWCA) Features Card.  
Call information  
You can view, or track, call information using these features:  
•
•
“Malicious Caller ID (MCID)”  
“Call log” on page 210  
Call display information  
If the telephone is programmed to allow CLID, the telephone displays the name, number, or line  
name of a ringing or active call. If the call is redirected, you can view redirection information.  
To allow call display  
1
Press FEATURE 811.  
Displays the CLID of the active or ringing call.  
2
Press # to move through the information displays.  
Call duration timer  
Briefly displays the approximate length of your current or most recent call.  
Activate feature: FEATURE 77  
Time and date display  
•
Static display changes the first line of the display to show the current time and date (based on  
system time).  
Activate feature: FEATURE 806.  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #806  
•
Active call display briefly displays the time and date.  
Activate feature: FEATURE 803  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
210 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
Malicious Caller ID (MCID)  
Note: This feature is available only on an ETSI ISDN line.  
This feature records caller information at the central office for the last external call on the active  
ETSI ISDN line. This feature must be available from your service provider before you can activate  
it in your system.  
If this service is active on the line, you must press FEATURE 897 within 30 seconds after a caller  
hangs up, and before you hang up.  
Enabling the feature on the system:  
Configuration > Telephony > Dialing Plan > Private Network > ETSI > MCID  
Call log  
If your system has the appropriate equipment, and you subscribe to the call information feature  
supplied by your service provider, you can record information about calls received on an external  
line. The line does not need to be assigned to the telephone that receives the call in order for the  
information to be logged, nor does an assigned line need to be a ringing line to log a call. ISDN  
service packages that come with calling line identification (CLID) can supply the same feature.  
Refer to “Setting call log space for the system” on page 210 and “Using the Call Log feature” on  
page 212.  
Setting call log space for the system  
The call log space heading allows you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in  
your system.  
Warning: Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space  
to all the telephones in your system.  
Reallocating Call log space can destroy Call log data at telephones that lose space.  
There are 600 Call log spaces available in the system. There are no spaces allocated by  
default. Changing the space allocation using Log defaults defines the log space  
available to all telephones in the system.  
To reset call log space  
1
2
Click Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Advanced Feature Settings.  
Click the Reset Logs button.  
The Reset Call Log Space dialog box appears.  
3
4
Enter the Space per log, and the # of sets with logs.  
Click OK.  
A dialog box appears, warning you that all existing logs are cleared if you reset logs.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls 211  
5
Click OK to reallocate the log space and clear all user logs.  
Click Cancel if you do not want to clear user logs. In this case, the call log space is not  
reallocated.  
Table 58 explains the type of content for the two fields in the dialog box.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212 Chapter 24 Feature configuration: Answering calls  
Table 58 Call log options  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Space per log  
<three digits>  
Type a three-digit number, for example, 020, to give each set 20  
spaces.  
# of sets with logs <read-only>  
Lists the number of sets that have logs.  
If you click OK on this dialog, these logs are deleted.  
Set call log options  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences - top panel >  
Preferences - bottom panel  
Reset Call Log Password  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences - top panel >  
Preferences - bottom panel  
Using the Call Log feature  
This feature allows users to:  
— manually log a call (FEATURE 813)  
— delete old log items (FEATURE 815)  
— view the log (FEATURE 812) or about a current call (FEATURE 811)  
— view charges for a call (FEATURE 818)  
— view details about a specific item  
— make a call using a call log entry  
Information, such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number, may not show in  
the log. The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone  
company, and the local telephone company of the caller.  
Auto bumping  
Ensure that you have auto bumping (FEATURE 815) enabled on any telephones that have call  
logging active; otherwise, the logs fill up, and subsequent calls are not logged.  
LogIt  
Store caller information for your current call in your Call Log.  
Activate feature: FEATURE 813  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
213  
Chapter 25  
Feature configuration: Making calls  
The following describes the features the system user can configure, or use to place outgoing calls.  
•
•
•
•
•
“Blocking user access to feature programming”  
“Protecting outgoing call privacy”  
“Managing a busy signal on an internal call” on page 214  
“Other ways of communicating with internal users” on page 214  
“Dialing shortcuts” on page 220  
Blocking user access to feature programming  
You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to Full  
(Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions > Properties > Set Lock  
drop-down list).  
To block user access to feature programming  
1
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets, select the DN record for the  
telephone for which you want to restrict.  
2
3
Click the Restrictions tab.  
On the Properties tab set lock to None, Partial, or Full.  
None - allows access to all features.  
Partial - prevents programming autodial buttons and user speed dial.  
Full - no feature programming is allowed.  
Protecting outgoing call privacy  
Outgoing calls contain name and number information that displays on the target telephone, if this  
information is supported on the line, at the switch, and by the telephone.  
You can block this information for outgoing calls using the ONN (outgoing name and number)  
blocking code.  
For details about setting up ONN blocking on the system and for telephones, refer to  
“Programming outgoing CLID” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606).  
Activate feature: FEATURE 819  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #819  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
214 Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls  
Managing a busy signal on an internal call  
The following features can be used when the internal number you dialed is busy.  
•
•
•
“Priority Call”  
“Ring Again”  
“Leaving a message” on page 215  
Priority Call  
If your call is urgent, use this code to override a busy signal, or Do Not Disturb. This feature must  
be enabled in programming on the initiating set. This feature is set to off by default.  
Note: Your telephone intrusion level must be equal to, or greater than,  
the telephone you are calling (“Intrusion controls” on page 200).  
Allowing a telephone to make priority calls  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences tab >  
Capabilities tab - bottom panel  
To allow a telephone to make priority calls  
1
While the DN is ringing, enter FEATURE 69, or the priority softkey, on a two-line display  
set.  
You are connected directly to the other person, unless they are on another call. That person has  
the option of pressing FEATURE 85 (Do Not Disturb) to block the call. On two-line display  
telephones, the user also has the option of pressing the BLOCK SoftKey.  
Ring Again  
Use this code to have the system to notify you when a telephone you want to call is no longer busy,  
or becomes available.  
There is no system programming to allow/disallow this feature.  
Activate feature: While on the call, enter FEATURE 2.  
Cancel feature: Enter FEATURE #2.  
Other ways of communicating with internal users  
If you cannot reach a person, or if you want to reach more than one person, there are other methods  
of communication, including:  
•
•
“Leaving a message” on page 215  
“Paging” on page 215  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls 215  
•
•
“Making announcements to individuals (Voice Call)” on page 217  
“Create a conference call” on page 218  
Leaving a message  
The message feature is a standard system feature and has no specific programming. However,  
some telephones and remote voice mail systems can require programming to ensure that message  
waiting indicators (MWI) perform as expected.  
This feature allows you to leave a message on the display of another telephone in your system, or  
to analog telephones connected to an Analog Station Module (ASM/ASM8+). The Messages  
feature indicates if you have any messages waiting.  
The Messages feature uses a message waiting list to keep a record of your internal messages and  
your (external) voice mail messages. To keep a record of external voice mail messages, you must  
have access to an external Voice Messaging service with visual message waiting indication and a  
BCM digital telephone.  
User messaging codes:  
•
•
•
•
Send message – FEATURE 1 (Cancel using FEATURE #1).  
View and reply to message – FEATURE 65.  
Cancel Message Waiting – FEATURE #65.  
Erasing a message while viewing a message – Press Hold.  
Paging  
If you are unable to reach a person by telephone, or you want to deliver the same message to more  
than one person, use the page feature.  
This feature allows you to make page announcements in various ways, depending on the audience  
you are trying to reach.  
Feature constraints:  
•
Telephones that do not have external speakers can initiate pages, but cannot receive pages  
(7000 and 7100 digital telephones and the 2001 IP telephone).  
•
Using Page with external equipment: When you make a page that uses external paging  
equipment (external page or combined page), the DTMF Long Tones feature automatically  
activates for the external paging system only, thus allowing you to control optional equipment  
with the DTMF Long Tones feature.  
•
•
You can have a maximum of 50 digital telephones or a maximum of 60 IP telephones in a page  
zone.  
Business Series Terminals note: If the active call is on mute when the page comes in, it does  
not return to mute when the call comes off hold after the page.This is only applicable if the set  
has Auto Hold for incoming page enabled. Sets cannot receive a page if the set is in use.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
216 Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls  
Configuring system settings for page  
Page is a standard system feature. However, there are two system settings that you must confirm or  
change, depending on your requirements. To configure the system settings for the page feature in  
Element Manager, navigate to Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature  
Settings.  
To configure system settings for page  
1
Select the Page tone check box, on the Feature Settings panel, if you want a tone to sound  
before a page announcement, or if you want the page announcement to just occur.  
2
On the Timers panel, in the Page timeout drop-down list, select the amount of time before the  
page automatically disconnects.  
Setting the page timeout  
Page announcements are programmed to time-out after a preselected amount of time that is set, by  
your System Administrator, under the Timers heading.  
Configuring telephone settings for page  
This procedure describes how to determine individual telephone access to the page feature and  
how the system handles page broadcasts. To configure a telephone for the page feature in Element  
Manager, navigate to Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets.  
To configure telephone settings for page  
1
2
3
4
Click Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets.  
Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
Select the DN for the telephone where you want to define the page feature.  
On the bottom frame, under the Capabilities tab:  
•
Select the Paging check box if you want the telephone to have access to the paging  
feature.  
•
Beside Page zone, enter the number of the zone that the telephone is to be part of for  
pages. Enter None if you do not want the set to receive a page.  
Setting Auto hold on incoming pages  
If this Page feature is enabled, telephones with active calls that receive internal pages have the  
active call placed on hold for the duration of the page. When the page message is finished, the  
active call is removed from hold.  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences >  
Capabilities  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls 217  
Business Series Terminals note: If the active call is on mute when the page comes in, the call is  
not returned to mute when the call comes off hold.  
Making a page announcement  
Internal page: Make a page announcement to all, or to a specific group of telephones, through the  
telephone speakers. Zone 0 pages all zones.  
To make a page announcement  
1
2
Enter FEATURE 61.  
Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone.  
External page: Make a page announcement through an external loudspeaker system.  
Enter FEATURE 62.  
1
Internal and external page: Make a page announcement through both your telephone speaker  
and an external loudspeaker system. Zone 0 pages all zones.  
1
2
Enter FEATURE 63.  
Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone.  
Making announcements to individuals (Voice Call)  
Use the Voice Call feature if you want to make an announcement through a specific telephone  
speaker.  
Voice Call is a standard system feature, and does not require any programming to activate or  
deactivate the feature.  
Feature constraints:  
•
•
Enable HF answerback if you want to respond to a voice call without lifting the handset.  
Telephones that do not have handsfree capability receive voice calls as ringing calls (7000 and  
7100 digital phones, 2001 IP phones, and analog telephones).  
Making a voice announcement  
Make a voice announcement, or begin a conversation, through the speaker of another telephone  
without first making the other telephone ring.  
To make a voice announcement  
1
2
Enter FEATURE 66.  
Speak through your handset using handsfree, or a headset.  
Note: Voice calls made to portable handsets, as well as the BST  
cordless handset, occur as a ringing call.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
218 Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls  
Preventing voice announcements at a telephone  
Prevent your telephone from receiving voice announcements by using:  
FEATURE 88 or FEATURE 85 (Do not Disturb)  
Create a conference call  
You can establish calls to two people at the same time, and allow each caller to hear the other two  
callers. You must have at least two intercom paths assigned to your telephone to initiate a  
conference call.  
The person who establishes the conference call has several options available to provide control  
within a conference call.  
•
•
•
remove callers temporarily (put on Hold), or permanently  
split the conference into two separate calls  
leave the conference, and allow the other two callers to remain connected  
Setting a conference tone  
If your profile allows it, you can configure the system to sound a tone when a conference call is  
established.  
Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings  
To set up a 3-party conference call  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Place or answer the first call.  
Put the first call on hold.  
Place or answer the second call.  
After the second call is connected, press FEATURE 3.  
Press the line or intercom button of the first held call (not required on the 7100 digital phones).  
Press RLS to end the conference call.  
To set up an Ad-hoc multiparty conference call  
1
2
Complete the procedure for the 3-party conference call.  
The conference master enters FEATURE 807 or presses the NEWCALL softkey.  
The conference is placed on hold.  
3
Dial the fourth party number.  
The fourth party answers the call.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls 219  
4
The conference master enters FEATURE 3 to create an ad-hoc multiparty conference.  
Note: A conference participant can also add parties to the conference by  
placing the conference on hold and calling a fourth party on a free  
intercom key. The fourth caller is placed into conference when the  
participant enters FEATURE 3. The participant placing that call is then  
a conference master for an ad-hoc multiparty conference  
Note: This procedure can be repeated to include up to 64 conferencees.  
Other conference features:  
•
Remove yourself from the conference permanently: FEATURE 70.  
Note: The other two callers remain connected. (Some external lines may  
not support this feature. Ask your System Administrator.)  
Note: For FEATURE 70 to work, at least one of the calls must be  
incoming.  
•
Put the conference on hold at one telephone: Press HOLD.  
Note: The other two callers can continue to talk to each other.  
•
•
Split a conference: Press the line, or intercom button, of one caller to consult privately while  
the other caller is on hold.  
Re-establish the conference: Press FEATURE 3, and select the held line.  
Disconnect one party:  
a
b
Press the line, or intercom button, of the caller you want to disconnect, then press RLS.  
Press the line, or intercom button, of the remaining caller to resume your conversation.  
•
•
Independently hold two calls: Press the line or intercom button of the first caller, then press  
HOLD. The second caller is put on hold automatically.  
Re-establish the call: Press the line or intercom button to retrieve one call from hold, press  
FEATURE 3, then retrieve the second call from hold.  
Release privacy to create a conference call:  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220 Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls  
With a line programmed with privacy, you can turn privacy off to allow another person with  
the same line to join in your conversation to form a conference. All the rules for a conference  
apply; however, there is one line in use, instead of the normal two. This means that you cannot  
split a conference using Privacy.  
a
b
Press FEATURE 83.  
Tell the other person to press the line button and join your conversation.  
Note: Only two BCM telephones and the external caller can take part in  
this kind of conference.  
Send Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call  
Either system telephone engaged in a three-way conference call over a Network CLID or DS trunk  
can issue a hookswitch, or DTMF dialing request, without leaving the conference.  
Allowing the feature:  
Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Feature Settings > Force auto/spd dial over  
ic/conf  
•
If you want the other set to hear DTMF tones during dial, ensure that the Long Tones feature is  
active (FEATURE 808).  
Note: This feature is not available for 20XX IP telephones, since they  
cannot receive long or short tones.  
•
If you want to add someone to the conference through the trunk, use the button marked Link  
(FEATURE 71).  
Dialing shortcuts  
Use the following features to save time when dialing:  
“Last Number Redial”  
“Saved Number Redial” on page 221  
•
•
•
•
•
“Autodial” on page 221  
“Speed dialing” on page 221  
“Programming memory buttons” on page 222  
Last Number Redial  
If the number you want to dial is the last number dialed from your telephone, use this feature to  
redial the external number.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls 221  
Allowing the feature  
You enable last number redial for each telephone through the restriction programming.  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab > Properties > Allow Last  
Number check box  
Using the feature  
Press FEATURE 5.  
Note: This feature records a maximum of 24 digits.  
Saved Number Redial  
Use this feature to save a number from an existing call, or from an autodial button, so that you can  
call the number later. Each telephone can save only one number at a time.  
Allowing the feature  
Enable last saved redial for each telephone through the restriction programming.  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab > Properties > Allow  
Saved Number  
To allow last number redial  
1
2
While on the call, enter FEATURE 67.  
When your telephone is idle, enter FEATURE 67.  
Autodial  
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of internal or external telephone numbers.  
When you program an external autodial, you must specify a path out of the system. You can also  
program autodial buttons with speed dial codes.  
Programming DN records memory buttons for autodial:  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > All DNs > Capabilities and Preferences > Button  
programming  
For information about programming memory buttons on the telephone, refer to “Programming  
memory buttons” on page 222.  
Speed dialing  
BCM provides two types of speed dialing:  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
222 Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls  
•
•
System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign two or three-digit speed dial codes to  
the external numbers called most often. You can set the system to have 01 to 70 codes or 001  
to 255 codes.  
User speed dial numbers can be programmed during telephone DN record configuration, or at  
the telephones by the users (71-94).  
To program speed dials in the DN record  
1
2
3
4
5
6
DN record, select the telephone you want to program.  
Select the Capabilities and Preferences tab.  
Select the User Speed Dial tab.  
Select Add.  
Enter in User Speed Dials 71-94.  
Enter FEATURE 0, and the system or user speed dial code.  
To program user speed dials at the telephone  
1
2
3
Enter FEATURE *4.  
Enter a two-digit code from 71 to 94.  
Specify the external line by pressing a line button, a line pool button, or the intercom button.  
(If you do not specify the external line, the system uses the prime line for the DN.)  
4
5
6
Dial the telephone number you want to program (up to 24 digits).  
Press HOLD.  
Record the code and number you programmed.  
Blocking user access  
You can block the user from using this feature by setting the telephone set lock to Partial or Full  
(Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab > Properties tab > Set  
Lock drop-down list).  
Programming memory buttons  
The telephones with programmable memory buttons are given a default set of button assignments  
when the system is set up. The system administrator can change these defaults in system  
programming. The user can also program memory buttons for autodial and feature codes, as well  
as move button assignments to suit their working style.  
If you want to remove a feature from a key, either replace it with another feature, or program it  
with a Blank external autodial.  
The feature codes in this section allow you to program a memory key, and to view the information  
currently on a key.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls 223  
Blocking user access  
You can block the user from using this feature by setting the telephone Set Lock to Partial or Full  
(Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Restrictions tab > Properties tab > Set  
Lock drop-down list).  
To view the feature that is currently assigned to a button  
1
2
Press FEATURE *0 (button inquiry).  
Press the memory key for which you want to view programming.  
To check for your DN number, press an intercom key.  
To configure memory buttons for features  
1
2
Press FEATURE *3.  
Enter the feature code, auto dial, speed dial feature code and number, or SWCA code that you  
want to program on your telephone.  
Note: Using this feature overrides programming entered by the system  
administrator. You cannot change buttons that have handsfree, lines,  
intercom lines, or Answer DNs assigned to them.  
To erase a memory button  
1
2
3
Press FEATURE *1.  
Press the memory key you want to erase.  
Press OK.  
Note: You cannot erase buttons assigned with lines, Answer DNs, or  
intercom keys.  
To store more than one number or code on one button  
1
Press FEATURE *9 to insert a break point between numbers or codes.  
You can program up to four numbers or codes separated by break points per memory key.  
2
To use: The first press of the button dials the first number. Pressing the button a second time  
dials the next number.  
External call codes  
Call code features can be part of dial strings for calls to external numbers. These codes allow  
various actions to occur as part of the dialing sequence.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
224 Chapter 25 Feature configuration: Making calls  
You can use special alphabetical designators in the following features when you are entering the  
dial strings from the Element Manager:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
hotline external number  
call forward to external numbers  
system and user speed dial numbers  
telephone and CAP button external number (auto dial)  
lines: Redirect to:  
routing dial string  
ONN block for Tone and BRI  
voice message center number  
Table 59 External call codes and definitions  
Link  
Generate a Link signal to access a PBX or other host exchange.  
FEATURE 71  
If you connect the system to a private branch exchange (PBX), you can use a Link  
signal to access special features. On some telephones, Link is called FLASH. You  
can include the Link signal as part of a longer stored sequence on an external  
autodial button, or in a speed dial code. The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces  
in a dialing sequence. (FEATURE 71)  
LN  
Note: This feature must be enabled under the restrictions for the telephone.  
Pause  
Program within an external auto-dial sequence to insert a 1.5-second delay.  
FEATURE 78  
This feature enters a 1.5-second delay in a dialing sequence on an external line. The  
use of this feature is required often for signaling remote devices, such as answering  
machines, or when accessing PBX features or host systems. You can program more  
than one pause in an external auto dial or speed dial sequence. (FEATURE 78)  
P
Note: This feature is not supported on ISDN trunks.  
Run/Stop  
FEATURE *9  
B
Insert a break point into a sequence of dialed numbers or characters used for  
automatic dialing. This is necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar  
host system. For example, if a company has an automated attendant that instructs  
you to dial an internal number you need, you can program the company number, a  
Run/Stop, then the internal number on one external autodial button.  
The Run/Stop symbol uses one of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial  
sequence.  
You can include up to three Run/Stop commands in a dialing string. The system  
ignores a fourth Run/Stop, and any digits or commands that follow three Run/Stop  
commands in a programmed dialing sequence.  
Programming: There is no system programming for this feature.  
Wait for dial tone  
FEATURE 804  
DT  
Program with an external auto-dial number to cause the system to wait to receive a  
dial tone from another system before proceeding with the dialing sequence.  
This feature (FEATURE 804) causes a sequence of numbers to pause until dial tone  
is present on the line before continuing to dial. You can use this feature if you must  
dial a remote system, and then wait for dial tone from that system before dialing the  
remainder of your number. The Wait for Dial Tone symbol uses two of the 24 spaces  
in an autodial or speed dial sequence.  
Programming: There is no system programming for this feature.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
225  
Chapter 26  
Using telephones for special features  
You can program telephones and devices to perform specific feature services, such as dialing an  
emergency number as soon as the handset is picked up, or acting as the control set for the system  
schedules. (“Special feature telephones” on page 225 and “Setting up a central answering  
position” on page 227)  
Special feature telephones  
The following are telephones that are specifically programmed to perform a system operation.  
Hotline telephone  
You can define a telephone that automatically dials an emergency or direct number when the  
handset is lifted.  
Setting up the hotline  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences tab >  
Preferences - bottom tab  
Setting up the hotline for analog telephones  
See also:  
•
•
“Line Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 46  
“Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices” on page 118 (analog devices)  
Control telephone  
The control telephone allows you to control other telephones in the system by turning service  
schedules off and on.  
Defining a control telephone  
You can define a control set for lines, individual telephones, and for hunt groups.  
Configuration > Telephony > Lines > Active Physical Lines > Control Set column  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences tab >  
Properties  
Also refer to:  
•
“System schedule settings and services scheduling” on page 29 (setting common features and  
restriction and routing schedule features)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
226 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features  
•
•
•
“Creating ring groups” on page 95  
“Restrictions main tab” on page 65 (telephones)  
“Restrictions (Line and Remote) in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide  
(N0060606)  
•
•
“Destination codes” in the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)  
“Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab” on page 56  
Using the control telephone  
•
•
Show active schedules: Enter FEATURE 870.  
Ringing service:  
a
b
Enter FEATURE 871.  
Use NEXTto scroll to the schedule you want to activate. (On one-line display telephones,  
press #.)  
c
d
Press OKto select the schedule.  
Press QUITto exit. (On one-line display telephones, press RLS.)  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #871  
•
Restriction service:  
a
b
c
Enter FEATURE 872.  
Enter the Service Control password.  
Use NEXTto scroll to the schedule you want to activate. (On one-line display telephones,  
press #.)  
d
e
Press OKto select the schedule.  
Press QUITto exit. (On one-line display telephones, press RLS.)  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #872.  
•
Routing service:  
a
b
c
Enter FEATURE 873.  
Enter the Service Control password.  
Use NEXTto scroll to the schedule you want to active. (On one-line display telephones,  
press #.)  
d
e
Press OKto select the schedule.  
Press QUITto exit. (On one-line display telephones, press RLS.)  
Cancel feature: FEATURE #873  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 227  
Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring  
The silent monitoring feature enables specified two-line display telephones to be used to monitor  
Hunt group and Contact Center operators. You can specify whether the system sounds a tone  
before breaking into a call or whether the break-in is silent. Display prompts on the supervisor  
telephone allows the supervisor to unmute or move from user to user.  
Setting up Silent Monitoring  
The following path indicates where to set up silent monitoring parameters in Element Manager:  
•
Element Manager: Configuration > Telephony > Global Settings > Advanced Feature  
Settings  
Security Note: Change the password regularly.  
!
Assigning a supervisor telephone  
A maximum of 30 two-line display telephones can be configured as supervisor telephones for  
monitoring. This feature can be assigned in Element Manager under Configuration > Telephony  
> Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences > Capabilities. Refer to “Monitoring  
external hunt group calls” on page 107.  
Hospitality services telephones  
This feature enables small to medium service facilities to provide customer telephone service, as  
well as administration services, through a telephone interface.  
Programming: Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group  
members, “Configuring Hospitality services” on page 109 explains the feature in detail.  
Also refer to the Hospitality Features Card.  
Setting up a central answering position  
For incoming calls, you can have a central answering position, or you can specify target lines to  
one or more telephones to receive directed calling.  
If you are using the central answering position to answer all calls, or to monitor incoming calls,  
you may need the extended capabilities of a T24 Key Indicator Module (KIM) for digital phones  
or a Key Expansion Module (KEM) for IP Phone 2002 and 2004. These telephones allow you to  
expand the number of line assignments, SWCA code assignments, and Hunt group indicators.  
If you do not filter incoming calls through an central answering position, you can arrange your  
telephones in Hunt groups, ringing groups, or call groups that use system wide call appearance  
(SWCA) assignments to share calls.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
228 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features  
You can set up a central answering position to enable you to:  
•
•
To filter all incoming calls through one point.  
To provide fallback for unanswered telephones.  
Set up the prime telephone feature or use call forward.  
•
•
To provide one number for callers that can be distributed to an internal group.  
Set up hunt groups for service groups or System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) assignments  
for small groups.  
To provide a central answering position for internal users.  
Set up a direct dial code.  
Central Answering Position overview  
Prime line  
The prime line is the DN that the line rings when the system cannot ring the intended DN.  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences > Properties  
Also refer to “Transfer (unanswered) calls” on page 202 and “Call forward (unanswered) calls” on  
page 204.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 229  
Direct dial telephone  
The direct dial telephone is the telephone that system users can dial with one digit, the direct dial  
access code. A receptionist telephone is one example of this. This telephone is usually the control  
telephone for system scheduling. You can create up to five direct dial telephones. However, they  
all respond to the same direct dial access code.  
Programming  
Configuration > Telephony > Dialing Plan > General  
Configuration > Telephony > Sets > Active Sets > Capabilities and Preferences >  
Capabilities  
Extra direct dial set: Configuration > Telephony > Scheduled Services  
Creating an enhanced CAP station  
Note: Key Indicator Module (KIM) is used with digital phones and Key  
Expansion Module (KEM) is used with IP phones. All references to KIM  
also refer to the KEM only with an IP extension.  
Central answering position (CAP station): A CAP can consist of a 7316E digital phone plus one  
to four eKIMs (key indicator modules), or one to nine OKIMs. KEM IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone  
2004 When the CAP is assigned under CAP/KIM assignment in the system, the CAP becomes an  
enhanced CAP (eCAP), and the modules become known as eKIMs. The system supports a  
maximum of 12 eCAPs.  
eCAPs can:  
•
•
•
•
•
monitor system telephone status.  
answer external calls on line buttons.  
monitor Hunt group appearances.  
support multiple appearances of a target line.  
answer external calls on up to 112 lines on a KIM (120 lines on a legacy CAP), and extend  
calls to other BCM telephones.  
•
provide extra memory buttons for the 7316E digital phones.  
Telephones with KIMs that are not configured in system programming allow only memory button  
programming on the modules. In this case, the KIM is known as an OKIM (ordinary KIM). There  
is no specific limit for the number of CAPs using OKIMs for the system, except from a call  
processing point of view.  
Legacy CAP: A 7324(N) plus one or two CAP(N)s (Central Answer Position modules)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
230 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features  
Hunt groups  
Use this feature to group your Contact Center operators so you can target specific types of calls to  
specific groups. As well, you can define how calls enter the group, so you can control workload  
based on operator requirements.  
Programming: Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group  
members, “Hunt Group members and lines” on page 103 provides details about setting up hunt  
groups and hunt group features.  
The operation of some features varies if the BCM telephone is part of a Hunt group. Table 60  
shows the affected features.  
Table 60 Hunt group feature operation  
Feature  
Description  
Call Forward All Calls  
The system ignores Call Forward All Calls feature, and the Hunt group call rings at the  
telephone.  
Call Forward No Answer The system ignores Call Forward No Answer, and the Hunt group call continues to ring  
until the hunt time expires.  
Call Forward on Busy  
The system ignores Call Forward on Busy and the Hunt group call continues to ring until  
the hunt time expires.  
Do not Disturb on Busy If this feature is active, the set does not receive notification of incoming Hunt group calls.  
Group Pickup  
If a set is part of a Hunt group and a call pickup group, then an incoming Hunt group call  
can be picked up from any set that is in the call pickup group.  
Transfer via Hold  
The system supports transfer for Hunt group sets. However, you cannot Transfer by  
using Hold. Once you answer a call on a Hunt group set, the Hunt group notification  
disappears from all other sets in the Hunt group.  
Priority Call  
You cannot make Priority calls to Hunt group DNs.  
Ring Again  
You cannot use Ring Again when calling a Hunt group DN.  
Line Redirection  
The Allow redirect attribute must be selected for DNs assigned to Hunt groups. For more  
information, see “Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 52.  
Page Zones  
Voice Call  
You cannot include Hunt group DNs in a Page zone.  
Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls. Answer buttons have no appearances for voice  
calls, and the set does not ring.  
Ringing groups  
If you set up call scheduling on the system, you can define groups of telephones into ring groups.  
This allows you to specify schedules where Trunk Answer can be used within the ring group to  
answer incoming calls, even on telephones that do not have that line specifically assigned. You can  
also define a second direct dial set for a ringing group.  
For details about setting up ringing groups, refer to “Creating ring groups” on page 95.  
For information about using schedules, refer to “Using the control telephone” on page 226.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 231  
Setting up Contact Center  
Contact Center is run from a separate client. Refer to the Contact Center documentation for  
information about setting up this feature.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
Chapter 27  
Display prompts and messages  
Use the following information for an explanation of the prompts you see on your telephone. The  
following tables show the prompt along with a description or required action, as appropriate.  
Prompts are listed alphabetically within the following categories:  
•
•
•
Common display prompts  
“Viewing active services” on page 244  
“Call log prompts” on page 245  
Common display prompts  
These prompts can appear during general call features:  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS =  
second DN#; XXX = line  
number; YYY = second line  
number  
Double SS symbols indicate a long distance call. (May be available with Call  
Display services.)  
01:9___  
Speed dial: Continue entering the number you want to program. You can  
change the number by pressing BKSPor the volume bar. When you are  
finished, press HOLD or OK.  
CANCL  
BKSP  
OK  
3 parties only  
Conference call: You are trying to add a fourth party to your conference call,  
or to join two conferences together.  
Release one call from the conference before adding another, or keep the  
two conferences separate.  
4 calls  
The conference master presses one of the keys representing the three-party  
conference slaves. The total number of conferees is displayed transiently for  
three seconds.  
NNN 02:47  
Call duration timer: The display shows the last call you made, or the total  
elapsed time in minutes and seconds on a current call.  
XXX <LINENAME>  
SHOW  
Button inquiry: The display shows the number and name of the line. Press  
SHOW to view the redirection status of the line.  
OK  
NNN: Busy  
Hunt group: The hunt group member is in a conference, and the supervisor  
cannot break in. The display briefly shows Conference busy, and then  
reverts to this prompt.  
NEXT  
VIEW  
NNN: Idle  
NEXT VIEW  
Hunt group: The hunt group member currently is not handling a call.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
234 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
NNN <SETNAME>  
Button inquiry: The display shows the directory number of the telephone,  
and the assigned name. Press NEXTto see the first line assigned to ring at  
the intercom button.  
NEXT  
VIEW  
NNNNNNNNNNNNN...  
Press # or press VIEW‚or ·VIEWto view a number that is too long to fit on  
the display. Press OKwhen you have finished.  
VIEW‚  
NNN>SSS  
OK  
Transfer: You are talking to the person to whom you want to transfer the call.  
Press RETRYif you decide to transfer the call to another person. Press RLS  
or JOINto transfer the call.  
CANCL  
RETRY  
JOIN  
NNN DND  
CALLBCK  
Camp-on: The person to whom you redirected a call has Do Not Disturb  
active. The call has returned to you. Press the CALLBCKbutton or the line  
button to reconnect to the call. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones, lift the  
handset.  
NNN no reply  
CALLBCK  
Transfer: The person to whom you tried to transfer a call did not answer.  
Press CALLBCKor the flashing line button to reconnect to the call. On 7000  
and 7100 digital phones, lift the handset to reconnect.  
NNN>SSS  
– You are receiving an internal call from extension NNN forwarded by  
extension SSS  
– You have an Answer button for extension SSS and an internal call from  
NNN is ringing on SSS.  
NNNNNNNN  
TRANSFR  
This prompt remains on your display while you are on a call you have dialed.  
To transfer the call, press TRANSFR.  
NNN  
You are connected to an internal call. Press TRANSFRto transfer the call.  
TRANSFR  
NNN busy  
The telephone you have called has no internal lines available.  
– Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Message features.  
– Press PRIORITY to make a priority call.  
PRIORITY  
LATER  
Priority call: The telephone to which you want to transfer a call is busy.  
You are receiving a call from extension 221.  
NNN calling  
NNN___  
Continue entering digits. Press BKSPto delete incorrect digits.  
Press # or OKwhen you have finished.  
QUITBKSPOK  
Auto dial: Continue to enter digits until the number is complete. Press the  
volume bar or BKSPto erase an incorrect digit.  
Press HOLD or OKwhen you finish.  
Silent monitor: While a call is being monitored, you can choose to:  
– move to another Hunt group member (OTHER)  
– join the current conversation (JOIN)  
OTHERJOINEXIT  
– exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 235  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Silent monitor: When you join a monitored call, you can choose to:  
OTHERLEAVEEXIT  
– move to another Hunt group member (OTHER)  
– mute your telephone out of the current conversation (this does not  
disconnect silent monitoring) (JOIN)  
– exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)  
Programming is busy, or the feature you are trying to use is not compatible with the  
configuration of the telephone or line.  
Access denied  
Already joined  
Silent monitor: You tried to start a monitoring session on a telephone that does not  
support the feature.  
Your telephone is connected to the telephone you are trying to call. Check your  
active line buttons, and return to that call.  
Pickup group: You are connected to the telephone that made the call you are trying  
to answer. This display appears if you are on a call to a colleague, your colleague  
dials the number of a telephone in your pickup group, and you try to answer that call.  
Call park: The person you were talking to has parked your call. You cannot park the  
same call.  
Already parked  
Auto dial: The memory allocated to auto dial numbers in your system is full.  
Autodial full  
Button erased  
Auto dial: While programming external auto dial, you erase the button by pressing  
HOLD or OKbefore entering any digits.  
You have received a Ring Again offer from a call to an internal telephone. Press the  
flashing internal line button or YESto call the number again. On 7000 and 7100  
digital phones, just lift the handset. Otherwise, press NOor wait 30 seconds for Ring  
Again to expire.  
Call NNN?  
YES  
NO  
Wait for the telephone to be answered. If no one answers, press LATERto use the  
Ring Again feature or Message feature, or press PRIORITYto make a priority call.  
Calling NNN  
PRIORITY  
LATER  
Priority Call: You initiate the Priority call transfer to this local.  
Priority call: You tried to place a priority call to another telephone in your system. The  
person you called has blocked your call.  
Call blocked  
The person at extension NNN has not answered the camped call. The call has come  
back to you. Press the line button or CALLBCKto reconnect to the call. On 7000 and  
7100 digital phones, lift the handset to reconnect to the call.  
Camped: NNN  
CALLBCK  
Camp-on: You have tried to camp an internal call. You can camp external calls only.  
Camp denied  
Camp-on: Dial the number of the internal telephone to which you want to camp the  
call.  
Camp to:  
CANCL  
Message: You entered an invalid number when trying to cancel a message.  
Cancel denied  
You cannot use Ring Again on your current call. You can use Ring Again while you  
have a busy signal on an internal call or line pool request, or while an internal call is  
ringing.  
Can't ring again  
Message: You cleared an external message from your message waiting list. The  
message exists in your message center until you erase it there.  
Cleared>LINENAM  
NEXT  
You attempted to allow CLI for an assigned line for more than 30 telephones.  
CLI COPY INCOMP  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
236 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Conference: You tried to make a conference call, but your system is handling the  
maximum number of conference calls (six).  
Conference busy  
Silent Monitor: The six conference resources on the system are already occupied.  
This is a transient display that reverts to HG Member DN: busy.  
Conf Resrce Full  
Denied in admin  
You are trying to use a feature, but do not have access to it under administration.  
Last Number redial: The Last Number is not allowed.  
Voice call: Dial the internal number or press the internal auto dial button of the  
person to whom you want to speak.  
Dial voice call  
DND from NNN  
DND transfer  
DN: Idle  
Prime telephone: The person at telephone NNN has forwarded a call to you using Do  
Not Disturb.  
Prime telephone: The system has transferred a call to you from a telephone with Do  
Not Disturb activated.  
Silent monitor: The current call on the telephone you are monitoring is either not a  
Hunt Group call, or the call came in on a line key on that telephone. Note: Lines that  
are assigned to the hunt group must not be assigned to individual hunt group  
members.  
Prime telephone: No person answered this call, so the system transferred it to you.  
DRT Line001  
The telephone you are calling has Do Not Disturb turned on. Press LATERto use the  
Ring Again or Messages features, or press PRIORITYto make a priority call.  
Do not disturb  
PRIORITY  
LATER  
Priority Call: The telephone to which you want to transfer the call has Do Not Disturb  
active.  
Transfer: The person to whom you tried to transfer a call has Do Not Disturb active  
on their telephone.  
Do not disturb  
CANCL  
RETRY JOIN  
•
•
•
•
Press JOINto transfer the call.  
Press RETRYto transfer the call to another person.  
Press CANCL or the flashing line button to reconnect to the call.  
On 7000 and 7100 digital phones use feature code  
FEATURE #70 to cancel the call.  
Feature button: If you are checking a speed dial button, enter the two-digit speed dial  
code that you want to check.  
Enter code:  
Auto dial: Enter the number you want to program, selecting the line first, if necessary,  
exactly as if you were placing a call.  
Enter digits  
QUIT  
OK  
Speed dial: Enter the telephone number you want to program exactly as if you were  
dialing it normally. When you are finished, press HOLD or OK.  
Page: Enter the required page zone number (0- 6) or press ALL.  
Enter zone:___  
ALL  
Move button: The two buttons you selected have exchanged position.  
Exchanged  
You have dialed a number, but the least expensive route programmed for the system  
is busy. Unless you release the call, the number goes through on a more expensive  
route.  
Expensive route  
Feature button: Enter the feature code, or press RLS or QUITto end programming  
or CLEARto clear the numbers entered. The system accepts the entry when you  
enter a valid feature code.  
F__  
QUIT  
CLEAR  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 237  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Feature button: Press FEATURE and enter the feature code you want to assign to  
the button. Check that the code is valid.  
Feature code:  
QUIT  
Feature button: You have programmed a button with a feature programmed on  
another button. The feature has moved to the button you just programmed. The  
original button is now blank.  
Feature moved  
Button inquiry: The name of the feature assigned to a button appears on the display  
when you press the button. Press # or SHOWfor additional information.  
<Feature name>  
SHOW  
OK  
You took more than 15 seconds to press a button in response to a display.  
Call forward: Your calls are being forwarded to telephone NNN.  
Feature timeout  
Forward>NNN  
CANCL  
Call forward: There are several reasons why you can receive this message. For  
example, you cannot forward your calls to a telephone that has Call Forward  
programmed to your telephone.  
Forward denied  
Hidden number  
Hold or release  
The last number you dialed, or the number you saved for Saved Number Redial, was  
a speed dial number that displayed a name instead of the number. You dialed the  
number correctly, but it is not visible.  
While on a call, you must either release the call, or place the call on hold, before you  
can program a feature button.  
SWCA: The requested SWCA code already has a call parked on it. Choose another  
key position.  
You entered the feature code for an application that is disabled.  
Inactive feature  
Incoming only  
The line you are trying to use to redirect calls is for incoming calls only. Select an  
outgoing line.  
The active call display of the former conference master.  
In conference  
INFO  
Silent monitor: The hunt group member is being monitored already.  
In observe:  
Monitor  
Auto dial: Enter the internal telephone number you want to program.  
Intercom #: ___  
QUIT  
Line redirection: You selected the intercom button as the facility on which to place  
the call. Enter a line pool code or a destination code.  
Intercom  
You tried to program redirection while the feature is in use. Only one person can  
program line redirection at a time.  
In use:XXX  
SWCA: The requested SWCA code is being used by telephone XXX. Choose  
another key position.  
Message: You are trying to call from your message waiting list. The line that you are  
trying to use is in use by the identified user in your system.  
You entered an invalid feature code.  
Invalid code  
Speed dial: You have entered a code outside the code range (01-70 for system,  
71-94 for user-based speed dials).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Move button: You tried to move a line to a button that cannot be a line button, such  
as an intercom button, Handsfree/Mute button, or an answer button.  
Invalid location  
You entered an invalid line pool code or an invalid destination code.  
Invalid number  
Auto dial: You are programming an internal autodial button and have entered a  
number that is not an internal number on your system. Enter a valid internal number.  
If the number you are entering is a destination code, use external autodial.  
Call park: You have entered an invalid retrieval code.  
Transfer: You entered an invalid internal number. Press RETRYand enter the  
number again. On 7000 or 7100 digital phones, use the FEATURE #70 feature code  
to cancel the call, and then retry.  
Invalid number  
CANCL  
RETRY  
Silent monitor: The DN you entered is invalid for your system. Press Observeto  
enter another hunt group telephone.  
Invalid number  
Observe  
Page: You have entered a page zone code that is not between 0 and 6.  
Invalid zone  
Call duration timer: You parked your last call. You cannot see the length of time a call  
was parked.  
LineXXX 01:45  
You are receiving an external call forwarded from extension YYY, or you have an  
answer button for extension YYY and an external call is ringing on that telephone.  
LineXXX>YYY  
Transfer: Press JOINto transfer the call on line XXX to telephone YYY. Press  
RETRYif, after talking to the person at extension YYY, you decide to transfer the call  
to another person.  
LineXXX>YYY  
CANCLRETRYJOIN  
Conference call: You are on a conference with the two lines or telephones shown.  
You can drop out of the conference, and leave the other two parties connected  
(Unsupervised Conference) by pressing TRANSFRor entering the Transfer feature  
code.  
LineXXX NNN  
TRANSFR  
You are connected to an external call. Press TRANSFRto transfer the call. Enter the  
digits of the number you want to dial.  
LineXXX  
TRANSFR  
Prime telephone: A person camped, parked, or transferred a call on line XXX, but no  
one has answered the call. Press CALLBCKor the line button to connect to the call.  
LineXXX callback  
CALLBCK  
Transfer: The external caller you were transferring hung up before the transfer was  
complete.  
Line XXX hung up  
Camp-on: A call you camped has returned to you, but the caller hung up before you  
can reconnect.  
Message: You are viewing your message list. The display shows the number and  
name of the line used for your message.  
LXXX:LINENAMVMsg  
NEXT  
CALL  
CLEAR  
Prime telephone: The call coming in on line XXX for target line YYY has come to you  
because Line YYY is busy.  
LineXXX>LineYYY  
LineXXX to prime  
Prime telephone: There is no telephone that can receive a call on line XXX, so the  
system has transferred it to you.  
Another user in the system is transferring a call to you on line XXX.  
LineXXX transfer  
LineXXX waiting  
A camped call is waiting. Press the line button, or use Call Queuing to answer the  
call. Press HOLD if you have 7000 and 7100 digital phones.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 239  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
You selected a line that is private to another telephone.  
Line denied  
Trunk Answer: You have tried to pick up a call on a private line.  
The line is in use. Make the call using normal methods, or wait until a line is free.  
Line in use  
Line redirection: Press * or ADDto begin redirection. Press # or REMOVEto cancel a  
previous redirection.  
Line Redirection  
QUIT  
ADD  
REMOVE  
Message: You have one or more messages, and one or more new Call Logs. Press  
FEATURE 806 to change the first line of the display to the current time and date.  
Messages & Calls  
MSG CALLS  
The feature you tried to use requires you to be on an active call at your telephone.  
This prompt also appears when information about a call is cleared by a system reset.  
Make calls first  
Message denied  
Message list  
Message: You tried to send a message to an invalid internal number, or to a  
telephone that is out of service.  
Message: SHOWappears when you have remaining messages. Press SHOWto  
review messages you have sent. Press ADDto send a new message.  
SHOW  
ADD  
EXIT  
Message: Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you want to send a  
message.  
Message to:  
Voice call: Your handsfree microphone is on the mute setting. Press the button  
labeled Handsfree/Mute, or pick up your handset to respond to the voice call.  
Microphone muted  
Move button: Press the button of the line you want to move. Press FEATURE or  
QUITwhen you have finished moving lines.  
Move line from:  
QUIT  
Move button: Press the button of the line to which you want to move the current line.  
Neither of the buttons is erased. The lines, or the line and feature, switch places.  
Move line to:  
QUIT  
Silent monitor: You entered the silent monitor feature code without lifting the  
handset, and the telephone does not support Handsfree operation.  
Need Handsfree  
SWCA: The FEATURE *520 request was unsuccessful, either because the  
telephone has no associated SWCA keys, or all the SWCA keys for that telephone  
are associated with other calls.  
No avail SWCA  
Note: If the call is an internal call and the destination set has a SWCA associated  
with the call, and if the originating set requests that the call be associated with a  
different SWCA, then the destination telephone transfers the call to the new SWCA  
position. If the destination telephone does not have a button programmed for the new  
SWCA position, the call disappears from all SWCA button appearances, and can  
only be retrieved by entering the corresponding SWCA code.  
You tried to make, receive, or pick up a call when no line button was available. Some  
features require you to have a button free. Releasing calls can free up line buttons.  
No button free  
Message: You have no line button free with which to reply to a message.  
Call park: You have tried to use Call Park with no active call on your telephone. If the  
call you want to park is on hold, reconnect to the call before you park it.  
No call to park  
No call on: 101  
Call park: There was no call on the retrieval code (101-125) that you entered.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was ringing at your telephone.  
No calls waiting  
SWCA: The FEATURE *537 or FEATURE *538 request was used, but there  
are no calls parked on any of the assigned buttons on your telephone.  
All the lines or line pools available to the telephone are in use. This prompt also  
appears when you try to dial an external number, or use a feature that conflicts with  
the lines, line pools, or prime line used by the telephone. Your installer must correct  
this situation.  
No free lines  
You have not dialed an external telephone number since the last power interruption  
or system reset.  
No last number  
No line to use  
Line redirection: You have one external line on your telephone, but you need a  
second line to perform line redirection. Redirect your external line using a line pool as  
the outgoing line.  
Auto dial or Speed dial: The telephone is set up to dial an external number on a  
prime line, but the telephone does not have a prime line. Your installer must correct  
this situation.  
No line selected  
There is no call ringing at your telephone. If you have a flashing line button, but your  
telephone is not ringing, press the line button to answer the call on that line.  
No line selected  
No number saved  
No number stored  
Saved number redial: You have tried to save the number of an incoming call. You  
can only save numbers that you have dialed.  
Speed dial: There is no number stored on the speed dial code you have dialed.  
Message: No number programmed for the message center. Contact your voice  
messaging service provider.  
Voice call: The telephone receiving the call cannot accept voice calls for one of the  
following reasons:  
No voice call  
•
•
•
•
•
•
The telephone is active or ringing with another call.  
Call Forward is on.  
Do Not Disturb is on.  
Voice Call Deny is on.  
It is not a BCM telephone.  
Your call continues as a normal ringing call.  
You tried to use a feature that is currently not available from your system.  
Not available  
Transfer: The telephone where you directed a call is not in service or is or  
unavailable. The call returns to your telephone.  
Silent monitor: The DN you entered is not a Hunt Group member. Press Observe  
to enter another hunt group telephone.  
Not HG member  
Observe  
Call forward: Two or more telephones are linked in a forwarding chain, and one is out  
of service or used for programming.  
Not in service  
Transfer: The telephone to which you are trying to transfer a call is out of service.  
Not in service  
CANCL  
RETRY  
Camp-on: The telephone to which you have camped a call is out of service or is used  
for programming. The call has returned to you. Press CALLBCKor the line button to  
reconnect to the call. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones, lift the handset to reconnect  
with the call.  
Not in service  
CALLBCK  
Silent monitor: The DN you entered did not respond to the system. Press Observe  
to enter another hunt group telephone.  
Not in Service  
Observe  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 241  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Silent monitor: The DN you entered belongs to a portable telephone or an ISDN  
terminal. Press Observeto enter another hunt group telephone.  
Not Supported  
Observe  
Silent monitor: The supervisor, hunt group member and the caller are all connected.  
If you make a mistake entering a DN number, press RETRYand re-enter the  
number. If the number you entered is correct, press OK.  
Observe:  
RETRY  
OK  
The telephone you have called is on another call. Press LATERto use the Ring  
Again or Message features.  
On another call  
LATER  
Priority call: The telephone to which you want to transfer the call is on another call.  
On another call  
PRIORITY  
LATER  
You have placed one or more calls on hold. The name of the line held the longest  
appears on the display.  
On hold: LINENAM  
Line redirection: You are trying to redirect a line, and the line you have selected is the  
outgoing line you have selected as a destination. You cannot redirect a line to itself.  
Select another line.  
Outgoing line  
Paging ALL  
Page: You are making a page. The display shows the page zone you have selected.  
Press FEATURE or RLS when finished.  
Page: A page is being made in the page zone you have requested.  
Paging busy  
Page choice:  
Page: Select the type of page you want.  
SETS  
SPKR  
BOTH  
Page: The time allocated for paging has expired.  
Page timeout  
No one answered the call you parked. The call returns to you.  
Parked call  
CALLBACK  
Call park: You have tried to park a conference call. Split the conference, and park the  
calls separately. The person who retrieves the calls can reconnect the conference.  
Park denied  
Parking full  
Call park: All available retrieval codes are in use. Transfer the call, or take a  
message instead.  
SWCA: No park resources, out of the 27 that are available on the BCM, are free. Wait  
for one to become free, and then try again.  
Call park: Record the code shown (n01-n25). Use Page (FEATURE 60) or press  
PAGEto announce the call and its retrieval code.  
Parked on: n02  
PAGE  
EXIT  
Pickup group: Enter the internal number of the telephone that is ringing. You can use  
an internal auto dial button to do this.  
Pickup:  
If you decide not to answer a ringing call after you have activated Directed Pickup,  
press FEATURE.  
Pickup groupers is no call to pick up, or the call has been answered, or you have  
tried to pick up a call on a person’s private line.  
Pickup denied  
Trunk Answer: The call that is ringing is on a line that is not in a Ringing Service.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
You have used the Call Queuing feature without lifting the handset. Auto Handsfree  
is not assigned to your telephone. You must use the handset, or press the handsfree  
button to answer a call.  
Pick up receiver  
Priority call: The party you are calling has eight seconds to decide to accept or reject  
your priority call.  
Please wait  
Line redirection: Enter a valid line pool access code.  
Pool code: ___  
QUIT  
Auto dial: Press the memory button you want to program.  
Press a button  
QUIT  
Button inquiry: Press the button you want to check. Press FEATURE or EXIT  
when finished.  
Move button: The button you are trying to move is not a line button. If you are trying  
to switch a line and a feature, move the line to the feature button, not the feature  
button to the line.  
Press a line  
Conference call: You have activated the Conference feature with one call active and  
another on hold. Press the held line to bring that person into the conference.  
Press held line  
Program and HOLD  
Auto dial: Enter the number you want to program on the button, then press HOLD.  
Speed dial: If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed dial  
number, select the line or line pool. If not, enter the telephone number exactly as if  
you were dialing it normally. When you are finished, press HOLD.  
Enter the number you want to program on the button, then press HOLD or OK. You  
can include a line or line pool selection in an auto dial sequence by selecting the line  
before entering any digits.  
Program and OK  
QUIT  
OK  
Speed dial: If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed dial  
number, select the line or line pool. If not, enter the telephone number you want to  
program exactly as if you were dialing it normally. When you are finished, press OK.  
The number is stored correctly on the button.  
Programmed  
You are receiving a priority call. If you are on another call, tell the person to whom  
you are speaking, that you are about to place the call on hold. Press the flashing line  
indicator of the priority call, or wait until the call connects automatically (in eight  
seconds). The priority call goes through after you hear the next beep. Your active call  
is on Exclusive Hold. It reconnects automatically when the priority call ends (unless  
you transfer the priority call, in which case, you must press the line button of your  
original call to reconnect). Use DND (FEATURE 85) or press BLOCKto reject a  
priority call.  
Priority> NNN  
BLOCK  
Priority call: The telephone you are calling is receiving a priority call at the same time,  
or cannot receive priority calls.  
Priority denied  
Line redirection: You have tried to redirect a line, but another person has redirected  
that line. Press * or OVERRIDEto override the previous redirection and redirect the  
line.  
Redir by NNN  
OVERRIDE  
Line redirection: You can redirect calls only on individual lines.  
Redirect denied  
Release a call  
You have no free line available to receive a call. Release one of your current calls,  
and try again to answer the incoming call.  
Camp-on: The line that the camped call is on is in use, or that line does not appear at  
your telephone. Release the line or release an internal line.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 243  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
You tried to use a feature while you were on a call or had calls on hold. Release the  
call, or calls, before using the feature.  
Release calls  
Silent monitor: You entered the silent monitor feature code on a telephone that  
already has an active call. To continue, you must place that call on hold, or release it.  
The destination you selected for line redirection is restricted.  
Restricted call  
Restricted call  
System programming has a restriction configured for the call you are trying to make,  
such as time-of-day restrictions for some calls.  
Transfer: You cannot transfer the call because of telephone or line restrictions.  
CANCL  
RETRY  
Press YESto use Ring Again. Press NOto send a message.  
Ring Again?  
YES NO  
EXIT  
Either you have no prime line, or the prime line is in use, or the line programmed for  
an auto dial number, speed dial number, or Hotline is in use. Select a line and dial  
again.  
Select a line  
Speed dial: There is no line related with the speed dial number you are trying to use.  
Select a free external line or line pool and enter the speed dial feature code again.  
Line redirection: Select the line used to redirect calls out of the system.  
Select line out  
QUIT  
Line redirection: Press the lines to redirect. To release a line selection, press the line  
to redirect again. Press ALLto redirect all your lines.  
Select line(s)  
QUIT  
ALL  
Cancel redirection: Press the lines that no longer need redirection. The lines light up  
when pressed. After you cancel redirection for a line you cannot restore it by  
pressing the line again. Press ALL to cancel redirection for all your lines. When  
finished, press HOLD or OK.  
Line redirection: Continue to press the lines to redirect. Press HOLD or OKwhen  
Select line(s)  
ALL  
finished.  
OK  
Cancel redirection: Continue to press the lines that no longer need redirection. Press  
HOLD or OKwhen finished.  
Press YESto send a message. See Messages.  
Send message?  
YES  
NO  
You cannot use the feature you selected because your telephone is locked.  
The active call display for a three-party conference master.  
Set locked  
SetNam2 SetNam3  
NEWCALL TRANSFR  
Message: You are at the beginning of your list of messages. Press NEXTto move  
through your messages.  
Start of list  
NEXT  
Transfer: Complete the transfer in progress before you access a new feature, answer  
another call, or select an outgoing line.  
Still in trnsfer  
CANCL  
RETRY  
Silent monitor: The DN you entered belongs to another Supervisor. You cannot  
monitor SM supervisor telephones. Press Observeto enter another hunt group  
telephone.  
Supervisor  
Observe  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
Message: You are trying to send a message to a user whose message waiting list is  
full.  
Their list full  
Transfer: Your transfer does not function for one of these reasons:  
Transfer denied  
•
•
All the resources needed to perform a transfer are in use. Try again later.  
CANCL  
RETRY  
You have tried to transfer an external call to another external party. Some  
restrictions apply.  
•
You cannot transfer your conference call.  
Transfer: Press RETRYif you entered the wrong internal number, or if the person to  
whom you are transferring the call is not available. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones,  
use the FEATURE #70 feature code to cancel the call, and then retry.  
Transfer to:2___  
CANCL RETRY  
Line redirection: The line you are trying to redirect cannot be redirected because the  
hardware does not support redirection.  
Unequipped line  
Speed dial: The system cannot dial the number stored. Reprogram the number.  
Unknown number  
Use line pool?  
You received a Ring Again offer for a line pool. Press the flashing internal line button,  
or YESto use the line pool. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones, lift the handset.  
Otherwise, press NO, or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire.  
YES  
NO  
Voice call: The line is open for you to speak.  
Voice call  
Message: You tried to send a message, but your list of sent messages is full. Cancel  
one of the messages you sent, if possible, or wait until you have received a reply to  
one of those messages.  
Your list full  
Silent monitor: You entered your own DN. Press Observeto enter another hunt  
group telephone.  
Your number  
Observe  
Viewing active services  
These are the prompts you can receive if you are viewing or changing your service scheduling.  
Table 61 Active services  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
You are viewing the active services. Press # or NEXTto view the other active  
services. Press RLS or EXITto quit.  
<Sched> Restr'n  
EXIT  
NEXT  
NEXT  
NEXT  
NEXT  
The name of the current Restriction service schedule appears on the display. Press  
# or NEXTto view the other Ringing service schedules. Press HOLD or OKto  
select the required schedule.  
<Sched> Restr'n  
QUIT  
OK  
You are viewing the active services. Press # or NEXTto view the other active  
services. Press RLS or EXITto quit.  
<Sched> Ringing  
EXIT  
The name of the current ringing service schedule appears on the display. Press #  
or NEXTto view the other Ringing service schedules. Press HOLD or OKto  
select the required schedule.  
<Sched> Ringing  
QUIT  
OK  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 245  
Table 61 Active services (Continued)  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
You are viewing the active services. Press # or NEXTto view the other active  
services. Press RLS or EXITto quit.  
<Sched> Routing  
EXIT  
NEXT  
NEXT  
NEXT  
The name of the current Routing service schedule appears on the display. Press #  
or NEXTto view the other Routing service schedules. Press HOLD or OKto  
select the required schedule.  
<Sched> Routing  
QUIT  
OK  
Press HOLD or OKto select this schedule, # or NEXTto view the next available  
schedule, or RLS or QUITto exit. If you select this schedule, it remains active  
until the next automatic schedule begins.  
<Sched> until *  
QUIT OK  
You have entered the Show services feature code and there is no active service.  
No services ON  
There is a service active in your system. Press * or LISTto view the active  
services.  
Services  
LIST  
ON  
Call log prompts  
These are the prompts you can receive when you are viewing your call logs:  
Table 62 Call log prompts (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
The caller's name is not available.  
The caller’s number is not available.  
The colon indicates a new item.  
1:Unknown name  
1:Unknown number  
12:KATE SMITH  
NEXT  
ERASE  
MORE  
MORE  
MORE  
The symbol indicates that the call was answered.  
The symbol indicates a long distance call.  
12 KATE SMITH  
NEXT ERASE  
12 KATE SMITH  
NEXT ERASE  
/ indicates the stored number was trimmed to its final 11 digits. Press the volume  
bar or MOREto show additional information about the call.  
49/1234567890123  
NEXT ERASE MORE  
One or more log entries are deleted by the Autobumping feature while you are  
viewing at the Call Log.  
Call(s) bumped  
Hold or release your active call before entering Call Log.  
Hold or release  
In use: SETNAME  
The external line is in use.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
246 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
Table 62 Call log prompts (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Display prompt  
Description of error or action  
The repeat call counter, shown with time and date, indicates the number of calls  
you have received from the same caller.  
Jan 4 9:00a  
3X  
MORE  
NEXT  
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE  
This call was answered at another telephone (227).  
This call was logged manually.  
Line061  
NEXT  
227  
MORE  
Line061  
NEXT  
Logit  
MORE  
This call was not answered.  
Line061  
NEXT  
MORE  
There are one or more items in your message waiting list, and there are one or  
more new items in your Call Log. Press FEATURE 806 to change the first line of  
the display to the current time and date.  
Messages & Calls  
MSG CALLS  
You have viewed your last old log item; now you can view your new log items.  
No information is available for the call.  
New calls begin  
No info to log  
No log assigned  
No resume item  
No log space has been assigned to the telephone.  
The resume item has been removed because of Autobumping, repeat call update,  
or log reallocation while you are looking at the Call Log.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 247  
Report and record alarm codes  
An alarm telephone display shows a BCM system alarm code when an alarm condition occurs.  
The installer assigns alarms to digital telephones with two-line displays.  
When an alarm message appears, an Alarm number and a Time are displayed.  
1
2
Record the alarm number and time.  
Call your customer service representative and report the alarm code.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
248 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
Chapter 28  
About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys  
The System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) feature enables you to park incoming and outgoing  
calls on your BCM and, at the same time, provides call appearance to a group of telephones. Using  
this feature frees the line used by the call, and enables another user to pick up the call at any  
telephone that has been assigned the same SWCA keys.  
Note: Your telephone must have a free intercom key to pick up SWCA  
calls.  
Labelling your telephone keys provides identification about which code is applied to which key.  
(See diagram below.)  
Indicate the label for your SWCA  
keys  
Assigning SWCA keys  
Line 1  
Telephone key #  
SWCA code  
Line 2  
FEATURE *521  
FEATURE *522  
FEATURE *523  
FEATURE *524  
FEATURE *525  
FEATURE *526  
FEATURE *527  
FEATURE *528  
FEATURE *529  
FEATURE *530  
FEATURE *531  
FEATURE *532  
FEATURE *533  
FEATURE *534  
FEATURE *535  
FEATURE *536  
SWCA1  
SWCA4  
SWCA5  
SWCA2  
SWCA3  
SWCA6  
Intercom  
Intercom  
If possible, assign the same set of buttons to  
the same SWCA user codes for all  
telephones in the call group.  
You can use any name for the keys, but a  
reference to the SWCA code saved on the  
key is useful.  
If you must find out which code has been  
assigned to a button, use Button Inquiry  
(FEATURE *0).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
250 Chapter 28 About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys  
To add SWCA keys to your telephone  
SWCA keys can be assigned by your system administrator to a group of telephones.  
Also, each user can assign these keys on their own telephones:  
1
2
3
Enter FEATURE *3.  
Select a memory button with an indicator.  
Enter a SWCA code (FEATURE *521 to FEATURE *536).  
Managing calls using SWCA keys  
To receive a call and assign it to a SWCA key  
Your system administrator can tell you how your system works. The system may be programmed  
in one of the following ways:  
•
An incoming call automatically assigns to a free SWCA key when the call is answered.  
— To park the call, press the SWCA key a second time.  
— Answering a second call: The original call is automatically parked on a free SWCA key.  
For this instance to occur, your system must be set for Full Autohold (FEATURE 73),  
•
•
You press a free SWCA key to park the call to that key.  
When you press HOLD, the call parks on a free SWCA key.  
You also can perform one of the following steps to park the call:  
•
While the call is active, enter the SWCA code that corresponds to the key where you want to  
park the call. Refer to “To add SWCA keys to your telephone” on page 250.  
•
While the call is active, enter FEATURE *520 to search for the next available SWCA code  
(assigned to your telephone).  
— If the system finds an available code, the call is associated with the code.  
Press HOLD or the assigned SWCA key to park the call.  
— If no code is available, the call remains active on your line only. Put the call on hold until  
a SWCA key becomes available.  
— If the call was already associated with a SWCA code (for the duration of the call), the call  
is reparked on that code.  
No programmed SWCA keys  
It is not necessary to have SWCA keys programmed on your telephone to unpark a SWCA call.  
You can also retrieve a call parked on a SWCA key by entering the SWCA code  
(FEATURE *521 to FEATURE *536) that was used to park the call. However, this requires the  
person who parked the call to use other features to indicate where the call is parked, such as Page  
(FEATURE 60), Voice call (FEATURE 66), or Messaging (FEATURE 1).  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 28 About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys 251  
In this example, the call comes in on  
line 1 and automatically transfers to  
SWCA1 (the first free SWCA key).  
The solid indicator beside SWCA1 and  
beside the line key indicates that the call  
is active on this telephone and it has not  
yet been parked.  
Incoming call assigns to a SWCA key  
Line 1  
Line 2  
SWCA1  
SWCA4  
SWCA5  
SWCA2  
SWCA3  
On all other telephones in the group, the  
indicator would be solid only beside  
SWCA1. The line keys for the other  
telephones would be free to receive  
additional calls.  
SWCA6  
Intercom  
Intercom  
If you press SWCA1 again to park the  
call, the line indicator disappears and the  
indicator beside SWCA1 starts blinking  
on all telephones in the group, indicating  
that the call is available to be picked up.  
Using Hold with SWCA keys  
If a call does not automatically park on a SWCA key when you press HOLD, it means the call is  
parked only on your telephone on the line on which the call entered. To make the call available to  
the group, you must unhold the call (press HOLD), then press a free SWCA key. The call is parked  
on that SWCA key and the line on which the call entered becomes free.  
Temporarily parked calls  
Your system can be configured so that calls parked on SWCA keys release the SWCA key, once  
someone picks up the call. In this case, if the person who answered the call wants to repark the  
call, they must use one of the manual methods described above to repark the call on a free SWCA  
key.  
The system can be configured to retain the call on the same SWCA key for the duration of the call,  
which is the period until someone hangs up, regardless of how many times the call is answered and  
reparked.  
No available SWCA keys  
If all your SWCA keys have assigned calls, and you receive another call, you can:  
•
Put the call on HOLD until a SWCA key becomes free. Do this by picking up the call. The  
first call automatically is placed on hold at your telephone.  
•
Dial in a SWCA code that is not assigned to a button on your telephone.  
If you assign a call to a code that does not have an appearance on your telephone, use Page,  
Voice call, or Message to notify the group or another person that there is a call waiting, and on  
which code it was parked.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252 Chapter 28 About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys  
Retrieving a call from a SWCA key  
If the indicator beside a SWCA key is blinking, you can retrieve the call by picking up  
the handset and pressing the SWCA key associated with the indicator, or by dialing in  
the SWCA code that associates with that key.  
In this example, the call parked on  
SWCA1 was retrieved by this user, who  
Line 1  
pressed the SWCA1 key.  
The flashing indicator beside SWCA1  
Line 2  
becomes solid. As well, a solid indicator  
appears beside one of the intercom  
buttons.  
SWCA1  
SWCA4  
SWCA5  
SWCA2  
SWCA3  
On all other telephones in the group, the  
indicator displays solid beside SWCA1,  
indicating that the call has been retrieved  
and is active.  
SWCA6  
Intercom  
Intercom  
To retrieve a call from a SWCA key  
If you are not sure which call to retrieve, you can use one of the following codes to find the longest  
parked call or the most recently parked call:  
•
FEATURE *537 retrieves the oldest SWCA call. The indicator on all telephones in the group  
becomes solid, indicating an active call.  
Note: These codes only work for telephones that have SWCA keys  
defined, and the system only searches across the range of codes that are  
assigned for that telephone.  
•
FEATURE *538 retrieves the most recent SWCA call. The indicator on all telephones in the  
group becomes solid, indicating an active call.  
Other features that affect how you use SWCA  
Timed out SWCA calls  
If a call remains parked and unanswered on a SWCA key for a pre-set period of time (the Call Park  
timeout timer), the call unparks from the SWCA key and rings again at the telephone from which it  
was last parked.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 28 About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys 253  
Outbound calls  
You also can park out-dialed calls on a SWCA key. If your system is set up to automatically assign  
calls to a SWCA key, the call will assign to a key as soon as it is answered. Otherwise, during your  
call, you can press a free SWCA key or HOLD to park the call on a SWCA key. This makes the  
call available to other users in the group and it frees up your intercom or line.  
Auto Hold  
FEATURE 73  
Your telephone must be set to have Full Auto-hold so that a call automatically gets placed on Hold  
if you answer a second call. If your telephone does not have Auto Hold on, use FEATURE 73 to  
change the setting.  
Transferring calls  
FEATURE 70  
If you transfer the call to a telephone that does not have the same SWCA keys assigned, the call  
will disappear from the SWCA key on your telephone when the call transfers. If the call needs to  
be reassigned to your group, the person who answered the call enters a SWCA control code that is  
assigned to your group, to return the call to a SWCA designation at your telephone.  
Conference calls  
FEATURE 3  
A conference call cannot be parked on a SWCA key.  
You cannot conference a call that is parked on a SWCA key until it is unparked.  
To conference a call parked on a SWCA key  
1
2
3
Press the SWCA key to unpark the call.  
Press HOLD.  
Press FEATURE 3 to create the conference.  
If a conference call is created from two SWCA-associated calls, and then a transfer occurs by the  
conference master releasing the call, the call is associated to only the currently associated SWCA  
keys (if any) on the slaves.  
If a conference call is created from two SWCA-associated external calls, and then a transfer occurs  
by the conference master releasing the call, the remaining call between the lines and trunks are not  
be associated with any SWCA key.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
254 Chapter 28 About System-Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
Chapter 29  
Market profile attributes  
The following describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes. These attributes  
are based on the market profile that you select when you configure the system. Each market profile  
is designed using a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical  
area in which the system is deployed.  
Refer to the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Media bay module availability” on page 255  
“FEM MBM–Norstar trunk cartridge combinations” on page 256  
“Time zones and language information” on page 257  
“Core parameters for market profiles” on page 259  
“Global analog trunk parameters” on page 272  
“GASM8 parameters” on page 275  
“ISDN line services” on page 278  
“Analog and digital trunk types” on page 279  
Media bay module availability  
Some of the media bay modules (MBM) are customized for a specific region and are not available  
to all market profiles. Table 63 provides a list of market profiles and MBMs available within each  
market profile.  
The symbols in the chart are defined as follows:  
ꢀ
indicates full support. The MBM is available and is localized in the market profile.  
ꢁ
indicates that functionality and support is limited. The MBM is available in the market  
profile, but is not localized.  
Table 63 Media bay module availability by market profile (Sheet 1 of 2)  
DSM16(+)/  
DSM32 (+) ASM8 ASM8+ GASM8  
ASM/  
CTM4/  
CTM8  
GATM4/  
GATM8  
Market profile  
Australia  
Brazil  
4x16  
BRI  
DTM  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
CALA  
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ  
Canada  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Caribbean  
Denmark  
France  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
256 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 63 Media bay module availability by market profile (Sheet 2 of 2)  
DSM16(+)/  
DSM32 (+) ASM8 ASM8+ GASM8  
ASM/  
CTM4/  
CTM8  
GATM4/  
GATM8  
Market profile  
Germany  
Global  
4x16  
BRI  
DTM  
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ  
Holland  
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Hong Kong  
Italy  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ  
ꢀ
Mexico  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢀ
New Zealand  
North America  
Norway  
ꢁ ꢁ  
ꢁ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Poland  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ  
ꢀ
PRC  
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ  
Spain  
ꢀ
Sweden  
ꢀ
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ  
ꢀ
United Kingdom  
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ  
FEM MBM–Norstar trunk cartridge combinations  
Norstar trunk cartridges can be connected to the BCM system using the fiber expansion module  
(FEM). Table 64 provides a cross-reference between market profiles and the Norstar trunk  
cartridges you can connect to the FEM.  
Table 64 Norstar trunk cartridge availability, by market profile (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Analog Country-specific  
Market profile  
Australia  
Brazil  
BRI S/T 2/4  
BRI U2/4  
Analog DID  
Analog E&M  
CLID  
analog trunk card  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CALA  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Canada  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Caribbean  
Denmark  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 257  
Table 64 Norstar trunk cartridge availability, by market profile (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Analog Country-specific  
Market profile  
France  
BRI S/T 2/4  
BRI U2/4  
Analog DID  
Analog E&M  
CLID  
analog trunk card  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Germany  
Global  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Holland  
ꢀ
Hong Kong  
Italy  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Mexico  
ꢀ ꢀ  
New Zealand  
North America  
Norway  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Poland  
PRC  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ  
United Kingdom  
ꢀ
Time zones and language information  
This section provides information about time and date format and language support for Central  
America and South America.  
Time and date format based on language  
Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the BCM system is located. You can choose a  
compatible time zone from the Time Zone list in Element Manager. If your exact location is not on  
the list, choose the location with the time zone closest to you. Note that some time zones are  
individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time (for  
example, Saskatchewan).  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
258 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the market profile.  
Table 65 provides a list of formats based on language or country.  
Table 65 Time/date formats based on language  
Language/country  
Time/date format  
Danish  
2001-01-01 13:57  
1 Jan 01 13:57  
1 jan 13:57  
Dutch  
EuroFrench  
EuroSpanish  
Brazil  
1 Ene 13:57  
German  
1 Jan 13:57  
Italian  
1 Gen 13:57  
NA English  
NA French  
NA Spanish  
Norwegian  
Swedish  
Jan 1 1:57 pm  
2001-01-01 13:57  
Ene 1 1:57 pm  
1 Jan 13:57  
2001-01-01 13:57  
1 Ock 13:57  
Turkish  
UK English  
1 Jan 1:57 pm  
Language support for South America and Central America  
Table 66 shows the language support for South American and Central American countries.  
Table 66 South/Central America language support  
Language  
English  
Country  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Anguilla  
Antigua  
Aruba  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bermuda  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Montserrat  
St. Kitts  
•
•
Suriname  
Cayman Islands  
Curacao  
Turks and  
Caicos  
St. Lucia  
•
•
Trinidad  
USVI  
Bahamas  
Barbados  
Belize  
Dominica  
Grenada  
St. Maarten  
St. Thomas  
St. Vincent  
Guyana  
French  
•
Haiti  
•
•
•
•
•
Argentina  
Bolivia  
•
•
•
•
•
Dominican Republic  
El Salvador  
Ecuador  
•
•
•
•
•
Jamaica  
Mexico  
•
•
•
•
Puerto Rico  
Peru  
Spanish  
Chile  
Nicaragua  
Panama  
Paraguay  
Uruguay  
Venezuela  
Columbia  
Costa Rica  
Guatemala  
Honduras  
Portuguese • Brazil  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 259  
Caller ID display formats  
The Caller ID function is supported on telephones that provide a display window. Caller ID  
formats consist of the name and number of the calling party.  
The North America market profile supports the following format: 5554775 (613).  
All other market profiles display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14  
characters: 6135554775.  
Core parameters for market profiles  
The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables (market  
profiles are listed in alphabetical order):  
•
•
•
•
Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark (see Table 67 on page 259)  
France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy (see Table 68 on page 262)  
Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC (see Table 69 on page 265)  
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom (see Table 70 on page 268)  
Table 67 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Market profile  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Australia  
Brazil  
CALA  
Canada  
Caribbean Denmark  
Access codes  
Direct dial digit  
9
0
9
0
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
Dest code for  
default route  
Digital trunking ISDN  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
NI-2  
ISDN  
NI-2  
NI-2  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
protocols  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
BRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG  
Protocols  
BRI S-loop  
protocol variant  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
NI-2  
NI-2  
ETSI-102  
PRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
NI-2  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG DMS100  
MCDN  
DMS100  
DMS250  
4ESS  
MCDN  
MCDN  
DMS250  
4ESS  
MCDN  
MCDN  
Global analog  
trunk versions  
GATM  
GATM  
GATM  
GATM  
GATM  
N/A  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
260 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 67 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Market profile  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Australia  
Brazil  
CALA  
Canada  
Caribbean Denmark  
Conference  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
tone supported  
Held line  
reminder  
After 30  
seconds  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Delay ring  
transfer  
After 15  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
Telephony  
feature settings  
Transfer  
callback timeout rings  
After 15  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
Network  
callback  
30  
30  
30  
N/A  
30  
30  
Host delay (ms) 1000  
Link time (ms)  
1000  
300  
1000  
600  
1000  
600  
1000  
600  
1000  
600  
Target line if  
busy setting  
Busy  
Prime  
Prime  
Prime  
Prime  
Prime  
Companding  
law  
A-law  
A-law  
A-law  
mu-law  
mu-law  
A-law  
DTI carrier type E1  
E1  
1
E1  
1
T1  
1
T1  
1
E1  
1
System settings  
Hunt groups  
Number of rings  
in a cycle  
2
M7000 set  
supported  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Default delay  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
Queue timeout 60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
If busy  
Mode  
Night  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast  
Start 17:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00  
End 08:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00  
Service times  
Evening  
Lunch  
Start 00:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00  
End 00:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00  
Start 00:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00  
End 00:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 261  
Table 67 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Market profile  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Australia  
Brazil  
CALA  
Canada  
Caribbean Denmark  
Ringing service Off  
mode  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Ringing service Yes  
trunk ans  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Restriction  
Off  
service mode  
Restriction  
000  
190  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
global overrides  
131440  
Restriction filter 0(013),  
0,  
0,  
0,  
0,  
N/A  
01  
1(13, 1800) 1(1800,  
1877,  
1(1800,  
1877,  
1(1800,  
1877,  
1(1800,  
1877,  
Service modes  
1888),  
911(911),  
1888),  
911(911),  
1888),  
911(911),  
1888),  
911(911),  
9411, 976, 9411, 976, 9411, 976, 9411, 976,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1***900,  
5551212  
1***900,  
5551212  
1***900,  
5551212  
1***900,  
5551212  
Restriction filter 00, 1(13,  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
05  
11, 1800)  
Restriction filter  
06  
*
Routing service Off  
mode  
Routing service No  
overflow  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Public DN  
Public DN  
lengths  
Default(7)  
Default(7), Default(7), Default(7), Default(7), Default(8),  
0(11),  
0(11),  
0(11),  
0(11),  
00(17),  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
1(3), 16(5),  
17(4), 18(4)  
Unknown  
number length  
N/A  
8
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
N/A  
N/A  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Public OLI  
Local number  
length  
7
7
National  
9
10  
10  
number length  
Handsfree  
Auto  
1
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Pickup group  
Allow redirect  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Set capabilities  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Call forward  
delay  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 67 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Market profile  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Australia  
Brazil  
CALA  
Canada  
Caribbean Denmark  
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay,  
the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.  
Dial tone  
detection  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Set preferences Language  
UK English Portuguese Spanish  
English  
French  
Spanish  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Danish  
English  
Norwegian  
Swedish  
(first is default) VICAP  
English  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Analog VSC  
(tone)  
1831  
1831  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
ONN blocking  
Analog VSC  
(pulse)  
None  
BRI VSC  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
BRI per loop  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
None  
SuprsBit  
None  
SuprsBit  
None  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
Release reason Release text  
Release code  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Tone duration  
80 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
DTMF  
parameters  
Pause time  
Interdigit time  
Table 68 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Market profile  
Hong  
Functionality  
Attribute  
France  
Germany  
Global  
Holland  
Kong  
Italy  
Access codes  
Direct dial digit  
9
0
9
0
0
9
0
9
0
9
9
0
Dest code for  
default route  
Digital trunking ISDN  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
protocols  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
BRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
HKTA2015 ETSI-102  
ETSI-QSIG  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG  
Protocols  
BRI S-loop  
protocol variant  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-102  
PRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
HkTA2015 ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG MCDN  
MCDN  
ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
MCDN  
MCDN  
MCDN  
Global analog  
trunk versions  
N/A  
N/A  
GATM  
N/A  
GATM  
N/A  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 263  
Table 68 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Market profile  
Hong  
Kong  
Functionality  
Attribute  
France  
Germany  
Global  
Holland  
Italy  
Conference  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
tone supported  
Held line  
reminder  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Delay ring  
transfer  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
Telephony  
feature settings  
Transfer  
callback timeout rings  
After 4  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
Network  
callback  
30  
30  
30  
30  
N/A  
30  
Host delay (ms) 1000  
1000  
N/A  
1000  
600  
1000  
600  
1000  
600  
1000  
N/A  
Link time (ms)  
N/A  
Target line if  
busy setting  
PBX >  
Busy  
PBX > Busy Prime  
Prime  
Prime  
PBX >  
Busy  
DID >  
Prime  
DID >  
Prime  
DID >  
Prime  
Companding  
law  
A-law  
A-law  
A-law  
A-law  
mu-law  
A-law  
DTI carrier type E1  
E1  
2
E1  
1
E1  
1
T1  
1
E1  
2
System settings  
Hunt groups  
Number of rings  
in a cycle  
2
M7000 set  
supported  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Default delay  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
Queue timeout 60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
If busy  
Mode  
Night  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential  
Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00  
End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00  
Service times  
Evening  
Lunch  
Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00  
End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00  
Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00  
End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 68 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Market profile  
Hong  
Functionality  
Attribute  
France  
Germany  
Global  
Holland  
Kong  
Italy  
Ringing service Manual  
mode  
Manual  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Manual  
Ringing service Yes  
trunk ans  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Restriction  
Off  
service mode  
Restriction  
global overrides  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Restriction filter N/A  
01  
0,  
00***, 170, N/A  
172, 173,  
1(1800,  
1877,  
1888),  
911(911),  
9411, 976,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1747, 1760,  
1761, 1766,  
1770, 1771,  
1772, 1775,  
1778, 1783,  
1788, 900  
Service modes  
1***900,  
5551212  
Restriction filter N/A  
05  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
Restriction filter N/A  
06  
Routing service Off  
mode  
Routing service No  
overflow  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Public DN  
Public DN  
lengths  
Default(25) Default(25) Default(7), Default(7)  
Default(7), Default(25)  
0(11),  
0(11),  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
Unknown  
number length  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Public OLI  
Local number  
length  
National  
number length  
Handsfree  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Pickup group  
Allow redirect  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Set capabilities  
N0060600  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Call forward  
delay  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 265  
Table 68 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Market profile  
Hong  
Kong  
Functionality  
Attribute  
France  
Germany  
Global  
Holland  
Italy  
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay,  
the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.  
Dial tone  
detection  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Set preferences Language  
EuroFrench German  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Turkish  
Dutch  
English  
EuroFrench Spanish  
English  
French  
Italian  
English  
(first is default) English  
English  
Analog VSC  
(tone)  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
ONN blocking  
Analog VSC  
(pulse)  
None  
BRI VSC  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
BRI per loop  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Detailed  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
None  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
Release reason Release text  
Release code  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Tone duration  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
DTMF  
parameters  
Pause time  
Interdigit time  
Table 69 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Market profile  
New  
North  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Mexico  
Zealand  
America  
Norway  
Poland  
PRC  
Access codes  
Direct dial digit  
0
9
0
9
0
9
9
0
0
9
0
9
Dest code for  
default route  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 69 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Market profile  
New  
North  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Mexico  
Zealand  
America  
Norway  
Poland  
PRC  
Digital trunking ISDN  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
NI-2  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
protocols  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
BRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG  
Protocols  
BRI S-loop  
protocol variant  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG DMS100  
MCDN  
ETSI-102  
+ BTNR191  
NI-2  
NI-2  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-403  
PRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
MCDN  
DMS250  
4ESS  
MCDN  
MCDN  
MCDN  
Global analog  
trunk versions  
GATM  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
GATM  
N/A  
No  
GATM  
Yes  
GATM  
No  
Conference  
No  
tone supported  
Held line  
reminder  
Off  
Immediate Off  
Off  
After 30  
seconds  
Off  
Delay ring  
transfer  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 15  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
Telephony  
feature settings  
Transfer  
callback timeout rings  
After 4  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
After 15  
rings  
After 4  
rings  
Network  
callback  
30  
30  
N/A  
30  
30  
30  
Host delay (ms) 1000  
1000  
N/A  
1000  
600  
1000  
N/A  
1000  
1000  
600  
Link time (ms)  
600  
Target line if  
busy setting  
Prime  
PBX > Busy Prime  
PBX > Busy Busy  
Prime  
DID >  
Prime  
DID >  
Prime  
Companding  
law  
A-law  
A-law  
mu-law  
A-law  
A-law  
A-law  
DTI carrier type E1  
E1  
2
T1  
1
E1  
2
E1  
2
E1  
1
System settings  
Hunt groups  
Number of rings  
in a cycle  
1
M7000 set  
supported  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Default delay  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
4 ring  
cycles  
Queue timeout 60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
60 sec  
If busy  
Mode  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Busy tone  
Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Sequential Broadcast  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 267  
Table 69 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Market profile  
New  
North  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Mexico  
Zealand  
America  
Norway  
Poland  
PRC  
Night  
Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00  
End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 08:00 End 07:00  
Service times  
Evening  
Lunch  
Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 00:00 Start 17:00  
End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 00:00 End 23:00  
Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 00:00 Start 12:00  
End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 00:00 End 13:00  
Ringing service Off  
mode  
Manual  
Off  
Manual  
Off  
Yes  
Off  
Off  
Ringing service Yes  
trunk ans  
Yes  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Off  
Restriction  
Off  
Off  
Off  
service mode  
Restriction  
global overrides  
N/A  
999  
112  
N/A  
N/A  
112  
990  
N/A  
Restriction filter 0,  
01 1(1800,  
0(0800), 1 0,  
1(1800,  
N/A  
N/A  
0, 1(1800,  
1877,  
1888),  
1877,  
1877,  
Service modes  
1888),  
1888),  
911(911),  
9411, 976,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1***900,  
5551212  
911(911),  
9411, 976,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1***900,  
5551212  
911(911),  
9411, 976,  
1976,  
1***976,  
1900,  
1***900,  
5551212  
Restriction filter N/A  
05  
010, 1, 00  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
Restriction filter N/A  
06  
*
Routing service Off  
mode  
Off  
No  
Routing service No  
overflow  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Public DN  
Public DN  
lengths  
Default(7), Default(8), Default(7), Default(25) Default(7)  
Default(7),  
0(11),  
0(11),  
0(11)  
0(11),  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
00(17),  
1(3), 9(3)  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
00(12),  
01(17),  
011(18),  
1(11),  
411(3),  
911(3)  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 69 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Market profile  
New  
North  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Mexico  
Zealand  
America  
Norway  
Poland  
PRC  
Unknown  
number length  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
N/A  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Public OLI  
Local number  
length  
Variable  
Variable  
7
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
National  
10  
number length  
Handsfree  
Auto  
None  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
0
Auto  
Pickup group  
Allow redirect  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Set capabilities  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Call forward  
delay  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Disabled  
(4)  
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay,  
the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.  
Dial tone  
detection  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Set preferences Language  
English  
UKEnglish English  
Norwegian Polish  
English  
(first is default) French  
Spanish  
VICAP  
French  
Spanish  
English  
Swedish  
Danish  
EuroFrench French  
English  
Czech  
Spanish  
Turkish  
Turkish  
Analog VSC  
(tone)  
None  
141  
141  
None  
None  
None  
1831  
None  
ONN blocking  
Analog VSC  
(pulse)  
None  
None  
1831  
None  
BRI VSC  
None  
141  
None  
None  
None  
None  
BRI per loop  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SrvcCode  
Detailed  
SuprsBit  
None  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
Release reason Release text  
Release code  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Tone duration  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
110 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
DTMF  
parameters  
Pause time  
Interdigit time  
Table 70 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)  
Market profile  
United  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
Kingdom  
Access codes  
Direct dial digit  
9
0
9
0
9
0
0
9
0
9
Dest code for  
default route  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 269  
Table 70 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)  
Market profile  
United  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
Kingdom  
Digital trunking ISDN  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
ISDN  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
protocols  
DASS2  
DPNSS  
BRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
ITU-T  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
Protocols  
BRI S-loop  
protocol variant  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-102  
ETSI-102  
+ BTNR191  
PRI trunk  
protocol  
variants  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
ITU-T  
MCDN  
ETSI-403  
ETSI-QSIG  
MCDN  
Global analog  
trunk versions  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
GATM  
No  
GATM  
Conference  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
tone supported  
Held line  
reminder  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Immediate  
After 4 rings  
After 4 rings  
30  
Delay ring  
transfer  
After 4 rings  
After 4 rings  
30  
After 4 rings  
After 4 rings  
30  
After 4 rings  
After 4 rings  
30  
After 4 rings  
After 4 rings  
N/A  
Telephony  
feature settings  
Transfer  
callback timeout  
Network  
callback  
Host delay (ms) 1000  
1000  
600  
1000  
N/A  
1000  
600  
1000  
N/A  
Link time (ms)  
N/A  
Target line if  
busy setting  
PBX > Busy  
DID > Prime  
Prime  
PBX > Busy  
DID > Prime  
Prime  
PBX > Busy  
DID > Prime  
Companding  
law  
A-law  
A-law  
A-law  
mu-law  
A-law  
DTI carrier type E1  
E1  
1
E1  
2
T1  
1
E1  
2
System settings  
Hunt groups  
Number of rings  
in a cycle  
2
M7000 set  
supported  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Default delay  
4 ring cycles  
4 ring cycles  
60 sec  
4 ring cycles  
60 sec  
4 ring cycles  
60 sec  
4 ring cycles  
60 sec  
Queue timeout 60 sec  
If busy  
Mode  
Busy tone  
Sequential  
Busy tone  
Broadcast  
Busy tone  
Sequential  
Busy tone  
Broadcast  
Busy tone  
Sequential  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 70 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)  
Market profile  
United  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
Kingdom  
Night  
Start 23:00  
End 07:00  
Start 23:00  
End 07:00  
Start 23:00  
End 07:00  
Start 23:00  
End 07:00  
Start 23:00  
End 07:00  
Service times  
Evening  
Lunch  
Start 17:00  
End 23:00  
Start 17:00  
End 23:00  
Start 17:00  
End 23:00  
Start 17:00  
End 23:00  
Start 17:00  
End 23:00  
Start 12:00  
End 13:00  
Start 12:00  
End 13:00  
Start 12:00  
End 13:00  
Start 12:00  
End 13:00  
Start 12:00  
End 13:00  
Ringing service Manual  
mode  
Off  
Manual  
Off  
Manual  
Ringing service Yes  
trunk ans  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Restriction  
Off  
Off  
Off  
service mode  
Restriction  
global overrides  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
999  
112  
Restriction filter N/A  
01  
N/A  
0, 1(1800,  
1877, 1888),  
911(911),  
0(0800), 1  
Service modes  
9411, 976,  
1976, 1***976,  
1900, 1***900,  
5551212  
Restriction filter N/A  
05  
N/A  
N/A  
Off  
N/A  
N/A  
010, 1, 00  
Restriction filter N/A  
06  
N/A  
N/A  
*
Routing service Off  
mode  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Routing service No  
overflow  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Public DN  
Public DN  
lengths  
Default(25)  
Default(11),  
00(17),  
Default(25)  
Default(7),  
0(11), 00(12), 0(11) 00(17),  
Default(8),  
01(10),  
02(10),  
020(9),  
0200(10),  
02000(7),  
020000(10),  
0201(10),  
02010(9),  
07(10),  
01(17),  
1(3), 9(3)  
011(18),  
1(11), 411(3),  
911(3)  
071(11),  
0718(10),  
072(11),  
077(11),  
09(11), 1(3)  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 271  
Table 70 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)  
Market profile  
United  
Functionality  
Attribute  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
Kingdom  
Unknown  
number length  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Public OLI  
Local number  
length  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
National  
number length  
Handsfree  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
None  
Pickup group  
Allow redirect  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Set capabilities  
Disabled  
Disabled (4)  
Disabled  
Disabled (4)  
Disabled  
Disabled (4)  
Disabled  
Disabled (4)  
Disabled  
Disabled (4)  
Call forward  
delay  
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay,  
the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.  
Dial tone  
detection  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Set preferences Language  
Euro  
Swedish  
English  
Norwegian  
Danish  
German  
English  
EuroFrench  
Italian  
English  
French  
Spanish  
UKEnglish  
VICAP  
(first is default) Spanish  
English  
Portuguese  
Analog VSC  
(tone)  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
141  
141  
ONN blocking  
Analog VSC  
(pulse)  
None  
None  
None  
BRI VSC  
None  
None  
None  
None  
141  
BRI per loop  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SuprsBit  
Simple  
SrvcCode  
Detailed  
Release reason Release text  
Release code  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Tone duration  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
120 msec  
1.5 msec  
80 msec  
120 msec  
3.5 msec  
100 msec  
DTMF  
parameters  
Pause time  
Interdigit time  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Global analog trunk parameters  
This section contains information for the GATM4 and GATM8 MBMs. The information in the  
tables applies to downloaded profiles only; it is not applicable to DIP switch modes.  
Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles: Denmark, France,  
Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland.  
For PRC and Hong Kong, analog trunks are available in North American DIP switch mode only.  
The global analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables:  
•
•
•
•
Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (see Table 71 on page 272)  
Transmission parameters (see Table 72 on page 273)  
Call supervision parameters (see Table 73 on page 274)  
On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (see Table 74 on  
page 274)  
Table 71 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Pulse Dialing (ms)  
Break  
time  
Make  
time  
Interdigit  
time  
Market profile  
Localized  
PSTN standards  
Australia  
Yes  
[1] AS/ACIF S003:2005 (2nd  
Edition) — Customer Access  
Equipment for Connection to a  
Telecommunications Network  
85  
15  
860  
[2] AS/ACIF S002:2001 —  
Analogue interworking and  
non-interference requirements for  
Customer Equipment for connection  
to the Public Switched Telephone  
Network  
Brazil  
CALA  
Yes  
[1] Identification of the Calling Party 66  
for SPC With DTMF, 220-250-713.  
34  
40  
800  
700  
[2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct  
Access Arrangement Specification.  
No  
N/A  
60  
(North American  
based A-law)  
Canada  
Caribbean  
Global  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
60  
60  
60  
40  
40  
40  
700  
700  
700  
No (North American N/A  
based A-Law)  
Mexico  
Yes  
[1] Mexico general Specification,  
June 9, 1993  
60  
66  
40  
34  
700  
740  
New Zealand  
No (UK-based  
telephony with  
Australian tones)  
N/A  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 273  
Table 71 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Pulse Dialing (ms)  
Break  
time  
Make  
time  
Interdigit  
time  
Market profile  
Localized  
PSTN standards  
North America  
Poland  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
60  
66  
40  
33  
700  
700  
[1] Polish ASS_1_v1.doc  
[2] ITU-T Telecommunication  
Standardization Sector of ITU  
Supplement2 Series E 01/94  
Taiwan  
Yes  
Yes  
[1] Technical Specifications for  
Terminal Equipment for Connection  
to Public Switched Telephone  
Network, PSTN01, September 27,  
2001  
66  
66  
33  
34  
800  
740  
United Kingdom  
N/A  
Table 72 Transmission parameters  
Transmission  
Loop length  
adjustment  
capability  
Tx CO gain  
(short, medium, (short, medium,  
long)  
Rx CO gain  
PCM coding  
scheme  
Market profile  
AC impedance  
long)  
Australia  
A-law  
220 Ω+ (820 Ω||  
No  
(N/A, 0, N/A)  
(N/A, 6 dB, N/A)  
120nF)  
Brazil  
A-law  
A-law  
mu-law  
mu-law  
A-law  
A-law  
A-law  
600 Ω/900 Ω  
600 Ω  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
(-3 dB, 0, 0)  
(0, 0, 3 dB)  
CALA  
(-3 dB, 0, 0)  
(0, 0, 3 dB)  
Canada  
Caribbean  
Global  
600 Ω  
(-3 dB, 0, 0)  
(0, 0, 3 dB)  
600 Ω  
(-3 dB, 0, 0)  
(0, 0, 3 dB)  
600 Ω  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
Mexico  
600 Ω  
No  
New Zealand  
320 Ω+ (1050 Ω ||  
No  
230nF)  
North America  
Poland  
mu-law  
A-law  
u-law  
600 Ω  
600 Ω  
600 Ω  
Yes  
No  
(-3 dB, 0, 0)  
(0, 0, 3 dB)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(-3 dB, 0, 0)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(0, 0, 3 dB)  
Taiwan  
Yes  
No  
United Kingdom  
A-law  
320 Ω+ (1050 Ω ||  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)  
230nF  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 73 Call supervision parameters  
Call supervision  
Ring  
Link/flash time  
(ms)  
Force on-hook Wetting time  
confirmation  
count (ms)  
Market profile  
OSI time (ms)  
time (ms)  
(ms)  
Australia  
Brazil  
600  
300  
600  
600  
600  
600  
600  
90  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
500  
100  
100  
1600  
2000  
1500  
1600  
1600  
1500  
1600  
1600  
1600  
1800  
1600  
1600  
0
150  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
200  
256  
256  
256  
200  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
15  
CALA  
Canada  
Caribbean  
Global  
Mexico  
New Zealand  
North America  
Poland  
600  
500  
600  
90  
N/A  
N/A  
0
Taiwan  
United Kingdom  
15  
Table 74 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)  
On-hook caller ID  
Disconnect supervision  
Message waiting  
DTMF  
Market  
profile  
(Start Digit,  
Stop Digit) OSI  
Line  
reversal  
Voltage  
reversal dial tone  
Stutter  
FSK  
Busy tone  
FSK  
Australia  
Bellcore  
Not  
supported  
No  
No  
ROI and  
ROA  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
Brazil  
Not  
Not  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
supported supported  
CALA  
Bellcore  
Bellcore  
Bellcore  
Bellcore  
ETSI  
Not  
supported  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
Canada  
Caribbean  
Global  
Not  
supported  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
Not  
supported  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
Not  
supported  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
Mexico  
Not  
supported  
Supported  
(425 Hz, 250  
ms On/ 250  
ms Off)  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
New Zealand ETSI  
Not  
supported  
Yes  
No  
No  
Supported Not  
Not  
(500msUK  
Guarded  
Clear)  
supported supported  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 275  
Table 74 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)  
On-hook caller ID  
Disconnect supervision  
Message waiting  
DTMF  
Market  
profile  
(Start Digit,  
Stop Digit) OSI  
Line  
Voltage  
reversal dial tone  
Stutter  
FSK  
Busy tone  
reversal  
No  
FSK  
North  
Bellcore  
Not  
Yes  
No  
Supported Not  
Not  
America  
supported  
supported supported  
Poland  
ETSI  
Not  
supported  
No  
Supported in Supported Supported Not  
unsupervised in supported supported  
Not  
mode  
supervised  
(425 Hz, 500 mode  
ms On/ 500  
ms Off)  
Taiwan  
ETSI  
ETSI  
Supported  
(D, C)  
No  
Supported  
(480 + 620  
Hz, 500 ms  
On/ 500 ms  
Off)  
No  
Supported Not  
Not  
supported supported  
United  
Not  
Yes  
No  
No  
Supported Not  
Not  
Kingdom  
supported  
(500msUK  
Guarded  
Clear)  
supported supported  
GASM8 parameters  
This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM.  
Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles: Brazil, CALA,  
Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and  
Taiwan.  
The GASM8 parameters are provided in the following tables:  
•
Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters (see Table 75 on  
page 275)  
•
•
Loop interface and call supervision (see Table 76 on page 277)  
Dial pulse and DTMF parameters (see Table 77 on page 277)  
Table 75 Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Transmission  
DIP  
Input  
Bi-  
PCM  
Market  
profile  
switch  
source  
Reference Load  
directional coding  
Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain  
scheme  
Australia  
Yes  
Australia TS 003  
TCE2  
300 Ω+ (820 Ω | | 120 nF)  
1.3 dB  
CCITT  
A-law  
Canada  
Yes  
North  
Refer to North  
600 Ω  
3 dB  
CCITT  
mu-law  
America America spec  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
276 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 75 Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Transmission  
DIP  
Input  
Bi-  
PCM  
Market  
profile  
switch  
source  
Reference Load  
directional coding  
Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain  
scheme  
Caribbean  
Yes  
North  
Refer to North  
600 Ω  
3 dB  
CCITT  
mu-law  
America America spec  
Global  
No (North North  
American America  
based  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
600 Ω  
3 dB  
CCITT  
A-law  
A-law)  
Hong Kong  
Mexico  
No (North North  
American America  
based  
600 Ω  
600 Ω  
3 dB  
CCITT  
mu-law  
mu-law)  
No (North North  
American America  
based  
3 dB  
CCITT  
A-law  
A-law)  
New Zealand No  
(UK-base  
UK  
300 Ω+ (1000Ω|| 220 nF)  
1.8 dB  
CCITT  
A-law  
d
telephony  
with  
Australian  
tones)  
North  
America  
Yes  
Nor th  
America  
EIA/TIA-464A  
T512.1  
600 Ω  
3 dB  
CCITT  
mu-law  
T512.2  
Poland  
Yes  
Poland  
[1] Polish  
ASS_1_v1.doc  
600 Ω  
0dB for Rx CCITT  
A-law  
-7dB for Tx  
[2] Technical  
Requirements  
for Private  
Automatic  
Branch  
Exchanges.  
Reference  
Analog  
interfaces11.do  
c
United  
Kingdom  
Yes  
UK  
BS 6450 Part 4  
BTNR 1080  
300 Ω+ (1000 Ω|| 220 nF)  
1.8 dB  
CCITT  
A-law  
EN 41003  
Annex D  
BS 6305  
BTNR 315  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 277  
Table 76 Loop interface and call supervision parameters  
Loop interface  
Call supervision  
Min  
Min/max  
recall  
Loop current Ringing  
Ringing  
Min. seize answer  
Min clear  
duration  
Market profile  
limit  
frequency amplitude duration  
duration  
duration  
Australia  
Canada  
32 mA  
32 mA  
25 Hz  
20 Hz  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
50 ms  
25 ms  
30/150 ms 1500 ms  
250/1100  
ms  
1400 ms  
1400 ms  
1400 ms  
1400 ms  
1400 ms  
Caribbean  
Global  
32 mA  
32 mA  
32 mA  
32 mA  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
25 ms  
25 ms  
25 ms  
25 ms  
250/1100  
ms  
250/1100  
ms  
Hong Kong  
Mexico  
250/1100  
ms  
250/1100  
ms  
New Zealand  
North America  
32 mA  
32 mA  
25 Hz  
20 Hz  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
50 ms  
25 ms  
25/150 ms 1500 ms  
250/1100  
ms  
1400 ms  
Poland  
32 mA  
32 mA  
25 Hz  
25 Hz  
65 Vrms 180 ms  
65 Vrms 200 ms  
80 ms  
50 ms  
51/88 ms  
550 ms  
United Kingdom  
25/150 ms 1500 ms  
Table 77 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters  
Dial pulse  
DTMF  
Dial pulse  
coding  
Min/max  
break  
Min/max  
make  
Min interdigit  
pause  
DTMF coding Min DTMF  
Market profile  
scheme  
duration  
duration  
duration  
scheme  
detect level  
Australia  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
25/120 ms  
25/120 ms  
25/120 ms  
25/120 ms  
25/120 ms  
25/120 ms  
15/200 ms  
25/120 ms  
51/88 ms  
10/90 ms  
250 ms  
250 ms  
250 ms  
250 ms  
250 ms  
250 ms  
200 ms  
250 ms  
150 ms  
200 ms  
16 digits  
12 digits  
12 digits  
12 digits  
12 digits  
12 digits  
16 digits  
12 digits  
12 digits  
16 digits  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-25 dB  
-29 dB  
-25 dB  
Canada  
10/90 ms  
10/90 ms  
10/90 ms  
10/90 ms  
10/90 ms  
15/200 ms  
10/90 ms  
25/48 ms  
15/200 ms  
Caribbean  
Global  
Hong Kong  
Mexico  
New Zealand  
North America  
Poland  
United Kingdom  
15/200 ms  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
ISDN line services  
Table 78 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by BCM 4.0. shows the  
network-based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each.  
Table 78 ISDN line services  
MCDN over PRI (SL-1)  
DPNSS  
Basic call  
DASS2  
ETSI QSIG  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic call  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic call  
DDI  
•
•
•
•
Basic call  
DDI  
DDI  
DDI  
Name display  
Number display  
Centralized voice mail  
Camp-on  
Diversion  
Redirection  
Originating line identity (OLI)  
Terminating line identity (TLI)  
Call charge indication (CCI)  
Name display  
Number display  
Centralized voice  
mail  
Call charge rate indication  
(CCRD)  
•
•
•
•
•
Call offer  
ISDN call connection limit  
Network call transfer  
Break-in  
Loop avoidance  
Executive intrusion  
Three party  
Trunk route optimization  
(TRO)  
Route optimization  
•
Trunk anti-tromboning  
Table 79 ISDN services by protocol  
Protocol  
Market profile  
Available ISDN services  
•
•
NI  
•
•
Canada  
•
North America  
•
•
•
Basic call  
DID  
•
•
Number display  
ONN blocking  
Caribbean  
Name display  
ETSI  
Euro  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Australia  
Brazil  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mexico  
•
•
•
Basic call  
DDI  
•
AOC-E (specific changes  
for Holland and Italy)  
New Zealand  
Norway  
•
•
•
•
MCID  
CLIP  
CALA  
Subaddressing (on  
S-loop)  
Denmark  
France  
Germany  
Global  
Poland  
•
ETSI call diversion  
(partial rerouting)  
COLP  
CLIR  
PRC  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
Holland  
Hong Kong  
Italy  
United Kingdom  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 279  
Analog and digital trunk types  
Table 80 provides a description of the types of analog and digital trunks.  
Note that some of the analog and digital trunks are available only when you select specific market  
profiles.  
Table 80 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Trunk types  
Description  
Digital trunk types:  
T1/E1  
Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1.544 Mb/s (North America); 30 channels at  
2,048 Mb/s (Europe)  
Loop, E&M, DID, and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines.  
You can program auto-answer T1 loop start, T1 E&M trunks, T1 DID, T1 ground start trunks,  
PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass (calling directly to a  
department or individual) and line concentration (one trunk can map onto several target  
lines).  
DID  
A type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM  
system.  
Loop  
A type of T1 line that is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect  
supervision for the digital loop start trunks.  
These trunks provide remote access to the BCM system from the public network. These  
trunks must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to auto-answer, which  
provides the remote access portal.  
Ground  
T1-groundstart trunk.  
These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks, but are used when the local service  
provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks. Ground start  
trunks work with T1 only. By configuring lines as ground start, the system recognizes when a  
call is released at the far end.  
E&M  
PRI  
T1 and E&M. This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other  
phone systems.  
This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode.  
ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 Mb/s (in Europe: 30 B-channels  
and 1 D-channels at 2.048 Mb/s).  
These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are  
auto-answer trunks.  
BRI  
ISDN loop that provides both T and S reference point loops.  
These loops can support both network (T and S loops) and terminal equipment (S-Loop)  
connections.  
This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network. ETSI ISDN  
BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN  
service. BRI provides two bearer B-channels operating at 64 Kb/s and a data D-channel  
which operates at 16 Kb/s. The D-channel is used primarily to carry call information. Like  
loop start trunks, BRI lines can be configured as manual-answer or auto-answer.  
DASS2  
(British) Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
280 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes  
Table 80 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Trunk types  
Description  
DPNSS  
A digital private network signaling system, which allows phone systems from different  
manufacturers to be tied together over E1 lines, offering significant enhancements to BCM  
networking capabilities.  
DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks  
for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls. Its routing capabilities  
provide more of the larger-network capabilities without the expense of installing a new  
system, reconfiguring all the nodes, and worrying about a lot of downtime. Most functionality  
over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is programmed into the system.  
DPNSS allows a local node, acting as a terminating node, to communicate with other PBXs  
over the network using E1 lines. For example, corporate offices separated geographically  
can be linked over DPNSS lines to other BCM systems, bypassing the restrictions of the  
PSTNs to which they may be connected. This allows connected BCM systems to function  
like a private network.  
Analog trunk types:  
Loop start Standard PSTN telephone line.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
281  
Chapter 30  
Configuring the music source  
The Music on Hold and Background Music features provide music to users. For these features to  
function properly, a music source must be connected to the BCM.  
There are three ways you can connect the music source to the BCM:  
•
•
You can connect an external music source to the Media Services Card (MSC) on the BCM.  
You can use the IP Music feature to connect to Music Manager. Music Manager is an audio  
player application that resides on the BCM and provides a streaming audio signal to the BCM  
system.  
•
You can use the IP Music feature to connect to an external music source on the data network.  
This external music source must be connected to your network and must be accessible to the  
BCM. The external music source must also produce a streaming audio signal that is  
compatible with the BCM.  
Note: A third party application that supports audio streaming is required. It  
must adhere to the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs:  
G.711, G.729, or G.723.  
If you use an external music source connected to the BCM, refer to the BCM200/400 4.0  
Installation and Maintenance Guide (N0060612) for information about how to connect the  
external music source. If you use an external IP music source connected on the data network, refer  
to the documentation that came with the music source for information about how to connect the  
music source to the data network.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
282 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source  
Selecting the music source  
After you have connected the music source, you must select the music source you want to use.  
To select the music source  
1
Click Configuration > Applications > Music.  
The Music panel appears. See Figure 66.  
2
Configure the Music parameters. Refer to the information in Table 81.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 283  
Figure 66 Music panel  
Table 81 Music parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Setting  
Definition  
Music Source  
Select Audio Jack if you are using an external music source that is connected to the MSC  
card on the BCM.  
Select Music Manager if you are using the IP Music feature to connect to the music source  
available on the BCM. If you select Music Manager, you must then configure the BcmAmp  
application before you can use it. For information about how to configure BcmAmp, refer to  
“Configuring Music Manager” on page 285.  
Select Streaming Server if you are using the IP Music feature to connect to a music  
source on the data network. If you select Streaming Server, you must configure the  
Network Device before you can use it. For information about how to configure the Network  
Device, refer to “Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source” on page 290.  
Note: A third party application that supports audio streaming is required. It must adhere to  
the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs: G.711, G.729, or G.723.  
Audio Jack  
Server  
Field not required.  
Field not required.  
Field not required.  
Field not required.  
Server RTP port  
Stream Type  
Frames per packet  
Music Manager control  
Launch Music Manager Launch the Music Manager Administration web page  
Server  
Field not required.  
Field not required.  
Field not required.  
Server RTP port  
Stream Type  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
284 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source  
Table 81 Music parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Setting  
Definition  
Frames per packet  
Field not required.  
Streaming Server  
Note: A third party application that supports audio streaming is required. It must adhere to the RTP protocol and  
support one of the following codecs: G.711, G.729, or G.723.  
Server  
Enter the IP Address of the network device that contains the music source.  
Server RTP port  
Enter the source port number to use when connecting to the network device that contains  
the music source.  
Stream Type  
Select the codec of the audio file provided by the network device.  
Enter the frames per packet to be received from the network device.  
Enter destination port number used on the BCM for sending out music to users.  
Frames per packet  
RTP port on BCM  
If you choose Audio Jack as the Music Source, there is no further configuration required  
for the Music Source.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 285  
Configuring Music Manager  
BcmAmp is an audio player that resides on the BCM. If you choose to use Music Manager, you  
must configure the play list, which is the music available to the BcmAmp audio player.  
Configuring the play list involves:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Opening the Music Manager Administration application”  
“Loading music onto the BCM”  
“Deleting music from BCM” on page 287  
“Adding music to the Play List” on page 287  
“Removing music from the Play List” on page 287  
“Using the BcmAmp Player” on page 289  
Opening the Music Manager Administration application  
Use the Music Manager Administration application to load music files and compile play lists.  
To open the Music Manager Administration application  
1
Click Configuration > Applications > Music.  
The Music panel appears.  
2
Click Launch Music Manager.  
The Connect to IP Address dialog box appears.  
3
4
5
In the User Name box, enter the user name you use to log on to Element Manager.  
In the Password box, enter the password you use to log on to Element Manager.  
Click OK.  
The Music Manager Administration panel appears.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
286 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source  
Loading music onto the BCM  
Before you can add music to the play list, you must the load the music track onto the BCM.  
Note: The Music Manager feature supports uploading of .WAV and .AU file  
types. To reduce your upload times, pre-process your files to include a single  
channel, sampled at a rate of eight thousand samples per second  
(8 kHz-MONO). This will help to minimize the time spent uploading data to  
the BCM.  
To load music onto the BCM  
1
2
Start the Music Manager Administration application.  
Click the File Manager heading.  
A list of audio files already on the BCM appears, along with a form for uploading new files.  
3
Click Browse.  
The Choose file dialog box appears.  
4
5
Navigate to the folder that contains the sound file you want to load.  
Click on the sound file and then click Open.  
The sound file must be a .wav or .au file format.  
The path for the sound file appears in the Upload box.  
6
7
8
If you want to assign a name to this sound file, enter the name in the As: box.  
This name appears on the File List to help identify the sound file.  
Click the Go link.  
The file is added to the File List.  
Repeat steps 3 to 7 for each sound file you want to add to the BCM.  
Restrictions on uploading files  
The audio files loaded onto BCM are loaded into the same disk space that is used for CallPilot  
messages. Therefore, every minute of audio file loaded onto the BCM reduces the amount of  
message storage space available to CallPilot by one minute. To ensure the proper operation of both  
Music Manager and CallPilot, the following restrictions are applied to uploading audio files.  
•
•
•
The maximum size of any single sound file you load onto BCM is 5 MB.  
The maximum amount of disk space allowed for Music Manager audio files is 300 MB.  
To ensure there is sufficient disk space for CallPilot, Music Manager Administration prevents  
you from uploading audio files if there is less than 1 GB of free disk space on BCM.  
Note: To minimize the time required to upload audio files, record the audio files as a  
single channel (mono) using 8-bit samples at a rate of 8 kHz.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 287  
Deleting music from BCM  
To delete an audio file from BCM  
1
2
Start the Music Manager Administration application.  
Click the File Manager heading.  
A list of audio files already on the BCM appears.  
3
4
5
Click the Remove link beside the sound file you want to delete.  
A confirmation dialog box appears.  
Click OK.  
The file is permanently removed from the BCM.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each file you want to remove.  
Adding music to the Play List  
The play list is an ordered list of songs that are heard by users of the Background Music and Music  
On Hold features.  
To add a sound file to the Play List  
1
2
Start the Music Manager Administration application.  
Click the Play List link.  
The current play list appears.  
3
4
5
6
Click the Add drop list and click the sound file you want to add.  
The sound files that appear on the Add list are the sound files loaded on the BCM.  
Click the To drop list and click on the location on the list where you want to add the sound file  
(for example, Bottom of List).  
Click the Go icon.  
The sound file is added to the Play list.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each sound file you want to add to the Play List.  
Removing music from the Play List  
To remove a sound file from the Play List  
1
2
Start the Music Manager Administration application.  
Click the Play List link.  
The current play list appears.  
3
Click the Remove link beside the sound file you want to remove from the Play List.  
The file is removed from the Play List.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
288 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source  
4
Repeat step 3 for each file you want to remove.  
Note: Clicking the Remove link only removes the sound file from that location in the Play  
List. If the same sound file appears in another location on the Play List, the other entry is  
not removed.  
Removing a sound file from the Play List does not delete the file from the BCM. For  
information about how to delete a sound file from the BCM, refer to “Deleting music from  
BCM” on page 287.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 289  
Using the BcmAmp Player  
The BcmAmp Player is a web-based interface. Use the BcmAmp Player to select, play, stop, or  
pause sound files that appear on the Play List.  
To access the BcmAmp Player  
1
2
Start the Music Manager Administration application.  
Click the BcmAmp Player link.  
The BcmAmp Player interface appears.  
Figure 67 BcmAmp Player  
Note: When a song is stopped, the Stop button changes to the Play button.  
The following explains the actions associated to the BcmAmp buttons.  
Table 82 BcmAmp Player button actions  
Button  
Explanation  
Next - Move to Next sound file  
Previous - Move to Previous sound file  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
290 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source  
Table 82 BcmAmp Player button actions  
Button  
Explanation  
Play - Play selected sound file  
Pause - Pause play for selected sound file  
To select and play a sound file  
•
•
•
click Next  
click Previous  
click the sound file you want to play  
To play a sound file, click the Play button.  
To stop a sound file, click the Pause button.  
To pause a sound file, click the Pause button.  
Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source  
To configure a Network Device to be the IP Music source  
1
Click Configuration > Applications > Music.  
The Music panel appears.  
Note: A third party application that supports audio streaming is required. It  
must adhere to the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs:  
G.711, G.729, or G.723.  
2
3
Select the Streaming Server from the Music Source list.  
Configure the Streaming Server section of the Music panel. Table 7 lists the fields and the  
associated parameters.  
Table 7 Network Device parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Server  
<IP address>  
Enter the IP address of the music source.  
Server RTP Port  
Default port: 2216  
Enter the number of the source port used for the music source.  
This is the port the BCM uses to receive music from the music  
source.  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 291  
Table 7 Network Device parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)  
Attribute  
Value  
Description  
Stream Type  
G.711 U-Law  
G.711 A-Law  
G.729  
Enter the codec that is used for the incoming music source audio  
stream. The codec you enter here must match the codec used by  
the IP Music source.  
G.723  
Default: G.711 U-Law  
Frames per packets  
RTP port on BCM  
1, 2, or 3  
Default: 3  
Number of audio frames per RTP packet. The number of frames  
you enter must match the number of frames per packet sent from  
the IP Music source.  
Default: 2218  
Enter the number of the destination port used for the music  
source. This is the port BCM uses to send music to the users.  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
293  
Index  
maximum CLI per line 75  
Symbols  
>> soft key 165  
alternate language  
first (*502) 34  
second (*503) 34  
third (*504) 34  
Numerics  
2001  
analog lines, voice message indicator 47  
feature labels 141  
analog telephones  
2002  
message reply enhancement 74  
receiving short tones 55  
default button programming 157  
feature labels 141  
answer DNs  
2004  
answer key settings 75  
appearances 50  
default button programming 156  
feature labels 141  
autodial feature 125  
Contact Center warning 75  
Directed Pickup 194  
overview 196  
programming 49  
restrictions 76  
2050  
default button programming 156  
7100  
Ring Again 235  
Transferring a call 238  
7316E  
answer keys  
CAP station 91  
configuring an eCAP 93  
answer DNs 196  
autodial feature 125  
basic, enhanced, extended 75  
Contact Center warning 75  
A
activation code, features 33  
active services, view (870) 36  
agent busy/ready (908) 33, 39  
agent login-log out, (904) 33  
answer keys. See answer DNs 76  
answering calls  
answer other telephones 196  
Call Pickup 194  
conference calls 218  
trunk answer 195  
alarm  
codes, reporting 247  
messages 75  
telephone  
reporting alarms 247  
telephone, identify 75  
appear and ring, telephone line assignment 47  
appear only, telephone line assignment 47  
appearance type, line assignments 47  
appearances  
Alarm time  
telephone line assignment 47  
at telephone (875) 33  
cancel (#875) 33  
Hospitality Services admin set (877) 33  
ASM (analog station module)  
message indicator 63  
ATA (analog terminal adapter)  
answer timer 63  
allow  
last number redial 65  
redirect  
allow/disallow 55  
Embark switch, Call Forward 128  
saved number redial 65  
GASM disconnect supervision 63  
location setting 63  
tones 63  
ATA Dvc  
ATA 63  
alpha tagging  
ATA2 (analog terminal adapter 2)  
caller ID set 47  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
294 Index  
ATA answer timer 63  
ATA tones 63  
ATA use 63  
broadcast mode 101  
Business Communications Manager  
overview 16  
message indicator 63  
busy  
Auto called ID 52  
hunt group options 101  
priority call code (69) 37  
signal 214  
auto hold  
allow/disallow 54  
for incoming page 54  
SWCA keys 253  
tone  
hunt groups 101  
autobumping, call log (815) 34, 39  
button defaults 149  
7000 telephone 154  
7208 telephone 153  
7316 telephone 152  
7316E telephone 150  
7406 telephone 155  
T7100 button defaults 154  
T7100 telephone 154  
autodial  
answer DNs 125  
button programming 60  
external (*1) 33  
force auto/spd dial over ic/conf 74  
internal (*2) 33  
memory buttons 222  
overview 221  
button inquiry  
*0 33  
autodumping  
call log 212  
button programming  
answer keys 75  
automatic  
features list 36  
internal autodial 60  
call log 130  
dial 188  
Hold See auto hold 201  
buttons  
activate memory programming (*3) 34  
answer keys 196  
memory 221  
automatic dial See also autodial, dialing options 56  
automatic for life of call, SWCA keys 78  
auxiliary ringer  
move line (*81) 34  
Directed Pickup 194  
hunt groups 102  
overview 190  
programming 98  
telephone programming 57  
C
call  
buttons, SWCA 78  
duration 209  
auxiliary services  
ringer 190  
call charge (818) 33, 39  
call display  
call log note 130  
programming 52  
B
background music  
at telephone (86) 33  
cancel (#86) 33  
on hold 74  
call duration (77) 38  
call forward  
activate (4) 37  
on telephone (86) 39  
programming 73  
activate at telephone (4) 33  
all calls, hunt groups 230  
cancel at telephone (#4) 33  
DPNSS Embark switch 128  
no answer, hunt groups 230  
to voice mail 205  
blocking calls 198  
at telephone (819) 39  
DND on busy 197  
intrusion controls 200  
privacy 198  
to voice mail (984) 33, 39  
call information  
BRI  
accessing (811) 33  
line types 279  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
295  
current call (811) 38  
call log  
intrusion controls 54  
using at a telephone (82) 34, 39  
autobumping (815) 39  
autodumping 212  
automatic 130  
cancel  
message waiting (#65) 37  
send message (#1) 37  
delete items at telephone (815) 34  
display prompts 245  
feature codes 212  
manual (813) 34  
MCID (897) 34  
options 57  
options (*84) 34  
overview 210  
password (*85) 34  
space, reallocating 210  
telephone 130  
using 130  
view (812) 38  
CAP (Central Answering Position)  
7316E/KIM 91  
configuring as eCAP 93  
configuring buttons 93  
described 229  
line assignment 123  
moving a set 93  
capabilities  
auto hold for incoming page 54  
programming 50, 52  
SM supervision 55  
CC  
agent busy/ready (908) 39  
skillset status (909) 39  
view information (812) 34  
call logit  
manual (813) 38  
Call Park  
Central America, supported languages 258  
central answering position. See CAP 229  
charge, call information (818) 39  
parking a call (74) 34  
parking from a telephone (74) 38  
CLID (Calling Line Identification)  
caller ID set 47  
Call Pickup  
Directed Pickup 194  
Group Pickup 195  
maximum CLI per line 75  
communicating in the office  
Call Queuing (801) 34, 38  
sending messages, overview 215  
call routing  
conference  
overflow routing 32  
by releasing privacy 220  
initiate (3) 34, 37  
overview 218  
call timer. See call duration (77) 38  
Call Transfer 202  
tone, allow/disallow 73  
callback  
conference.See conference calls  
no answer 207  
timer, network 77  
transfer timer 77  
conference calls  
and SWCA keys 253  
Contact Center  
Caller ID  
agent busy/ready (908) 33  
agent login/log out ACD (904) 33  
Answer DN warning 75  
queue request (909) 33  
MCID at telephone (897) 39  
set, alpha tagging 47  
caller ID  
by region 259  
contrast  
CallPilot  
adjust (7) 34  
programming 57  
transfer to mail box (986) 40  
calls  
control set  
assign SWCA key to calls 78  
SWCA overview 207  
See control telephone  
control telephone  
overview 225  
camp timeout delay 77  
camp-on  
conventions, guide 18  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
296 Index  
button options 18  
buttons 18  
mode (*82) 34  
options 56  
command line 18  
pause signal 224  
pre-dial 188  
run/stop 224  
Copy Key 171  
copying  
standard dial 188  
telephone settings 69  
dialing restrictions  
line/set restriction 67  
telephone 65  
copyright 2  
CoS (Class of Service)  
password (68) 34  
dialtone, wait for (804) 38  
current  
direct dial  
call information (811) 38  
time (803) 38  
digit  
allow/disallow 53  
telephone  
custom  
feature labels 141  
overview 229  
sending messages 74  
cycle park codes, park mode 75  
Directed Pickup  
D
default  
answering from any telephone (F76) 38  
feature settings 75  
pick up code (F76) 34, 194  
7208 153  
7316 buttons 152  
7406 buttons 155  
button assignment 149  
buttons 150  
discarded calls, call log 130  
disconnect supervision  
GASM 63  
Display 18  
2004 156  
IP Phone 2002 157  
hunt group DN 100  
display  
contrast 187  
voice mail DN (985) 40  
default buttons  
DMC portables 174  
displaying  
prompts  
delay  
call log 245  
common 233  
viewing active service 244  
Camp timeout 77  
host delay timer 77  
link timer 77  
Park timeout 77  
ring transfer 74  
distinct ring  
hunt groups 102  
in use, telephone programming 57  
deny, voice call (88) 39  
Desktop Assistant 132  
distinctive ring pattern (DRP). See distinct ring  
distribution modes, Hunt groups 101  
dial  
insert Link (71) 34  
insert pause (78) 35  
DMC portables  
default buttons 174  
dial tone  
DN  
wait 224  
button programming 58, 149  
dialing restrictions 65  
display voice mail DN (985) 40  
hunt groups 100  
wait (804) 36  
See also dialing plan, dialing restrictions, Dialing  
Translation, Dialing Translation Table  
ISDN feature support 53  
user preferences, model 60  
dialing  
automatic dial 188  
insert pause (78) 38  
Link signal 224  
DND (Do Not Disturb)  
activate (85) 34  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
297  
cancel (#85)Do not disturb. See DND 34  
initiating (85) 39  
on Busy 197  
autodumping (815) 212  
button programming 36, 60  
call log feature codes 212  
Call Pickup 194  
overview 198  
Call Transfer 202  
change user speed dial (*4) 221  
Conference Calls 218  
DND on busy  
hunt groups 230  
initiating (85) 39  
programming 54  
current call (811) 38  
Display Voice Mail DN (985) 34  
Do Not Disturb (DND) (85) 198  
Do Not Disturb on Busy (85) 197  
Exclusive Hold (79) 34, 201  
Group Listening (802) 194  
hunt groups 230  
Do Not Disturb. See DND  
download  
firmware 147  
DPNSS 1 (Digital Private Network Signaling System)  
lines, Embark switch 128  
interrupt voice mail (987) 40  
line redirection 128  
MCID (897) 34, 210  
paging (60 - 63) 215  
privacy (83) 198  
programming memory buttons 222  
SM password (*550) 81  
sorted by name and activation code 33  
start conference (3) 218  
duplicate system DNs 69  
E
eCAP restore issue 123  
Embark switch  
Call Forward 128  
DPNSS lines 128  
validation errors 129  
ETSI  
trunk answer (800) 195  
MCID feature 210  
Hold See also parked calls, SWCA  
evening schedule 31  
firmware  
Exclusive Hold (79) 38, 201  
Expand to PC key 170  
downloading to IP telephones 147  
first display 52  
express messaging into voice mail (980) 34, 39  
Force auto/spd dial over ic/conf 74  
force download 147  
external  
hotline 57  
paging  
equipment 215  
to target line 198  
Forward on busy  
DND on Busy 198  
forwarding  
calls  
external #  
Do Not Disturb on Busy 197  
Line Redirection 128  
autodial 61  
user speed dial 61  
Full Set Lock Restriction 65  
Fwd Busy 46  
extra  
dial telephone 32  
lines, CAP module 123  
Fwd No Answer 46  
G
F
general settings  
facility  
answer keys 75  
hotline programming 57  
user speed dial 61  
associate SWCA key to call 78  
background music 73  
conference tone 73  
delayed ring transfer 74  
directed pickup allow 75  
Force auto/spd dial over ic/conf 74  
Held reminder 74  
Fax  
ATA answer timer 63  
features  
activate speed dial (0) 221  
Auto Hold (73) 33  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
298 Index  
Hold 74  
facility 57  
identify alarm telephone 75  
include I/C calls when auto associating 78  
include I/C calls when invoking by Hold 79  
maximum CLI per line 75  
network callback timer 77  
page tone, allow 73  
numbers 57  
overview 225  
hunt delay 101  
Hunt groups  
auxiliary ringer 102  
Broadcast mode 101  
distinct rings 102  
distribution modes 101  
DN, default value 100  
feature operation 230  
hunt delay timer 101  
if busy 101  
Linear mode 101  
monitoring mode 81  
monitoring with IP telephones 108  
moving members 104  
name 100  
receiver volume 75  
set relocation 75  
Goodbye key 160, 170  
Group Listening  
activating (802) 34  
at telephone (802) 38  
canceling (#802) 34  
Group Pickup  
activating (75) 34, 195  
answering from a telephone (75) 38  
hunt groups 230  
overflow constraints 76  
programming overview 230  
queue time-out 101  
Rotary mode 101  
SM  
H
handling many calls  
Hold 200  
Handsfree  
password 81  
sets 81  
answerback programming 53, 54  
Handsfree / Speaker key 170  
Headset key 160, 170  
headset volume 189  
Held reminder 74  
supervision 55  
I
incoming calls, tracking 210  
information  
Hold  
caller, call logs 130  
current call (811) 38  
auto hold code (73) 33  
auto hold control 54  
automatic 201  
intercom  
assign lines 51  
exclusive 201  
Include I/C calls when auto associating, SWCA 78  
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold, SWCA 79  
exclusive hold (79) 34  
exclusive hold at telephone (79) 38  
handling calls 200  
internal  
held reminder settings 74  
invoke SWCA parking by hold 79  
tones, music, or silence 74  
autodial button programming 60  
hotline 57  
intrusion  
Hold key 160, 164, 170  
controls, overview 200  
programming 54  
Hospitality  
programming overview 227  
IP features list 139  
Host delay, timer 77  
IP Hot Desking (999) 34  
See also Hot Desking  
IP Services list (900) 34  
host system signaling, pause 224  
Hot Desking  
change password 145  
Feature (999) 34  
IP telephones  
feature labels 141  
firmware, downloading 147  
hotline  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
299  
hunt group note 108  
keep DN alive 64  
telephones 47  
PRI line note 126  
redirection  
IP terminal status, features list 139  
activating (84) 34  
canceling (#84) 34  
hunt groups 230  
ISDN  
line services, by region 278  
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network)  
terminal feature support 53  
initiating (84) 39  
target line appearances 47  
user programming 189  
K
link  
keep DN alive 64  
external call features 224  
initiating code at telephone (71) 38  
insert into dial sequence (71) 34  
timer 77  
KIM (Key Indicator Module)  
CAP station 91  
configuring as eKIM 93  
configuring buttons 93  
moving a set 93  
listening group, at telephone (802) 38  
Local Area Network (LAN) 166  
L
log  
all calls 57  
labels, telephones 132  
space reallocating 210  
view call log (812) 38  
lamp, message indicator 63  
language  
login to voice mail (981) 39  
logit 212  
alternate, first (*502) 34  
alternate, second (*503) 34  
alternate, third (*504) 34  
primary (*501) 34  
programming 56  
South and Central America 258  
user programming 188  
logit See also call log  
long distance  
call indicator 233  
long tones  
entering in dialing sequence (808) 34  
external paging 215  
specifying at telephone (808) 38  
Last Number Redial  
activating (5) 34, 37  
line  
loop  
BRI and PRI line types 279  
first display 52  
pools  
avoiding redirection loops 128  
lunch schedule 31  
activating (64) 34  
redirection 128  
M
making a call  
Line (DN) key 169  
line buttons, moving (*81) 34  
Line key 164  
common display prompts 233  
manual  
activating call logit (813) 38  
for life of call, SWCA keys 78  
SWCA keys 78  
line pools  
access code from telephone (64) 37  
external autodial 61  
user speed dial 61  
maximum CLI per line 75  
MCDN (Meridian Customer Defined Networking)  
intrusion controls 54  
line services  
ISDN support, by region 278  
MCID (malicious call identification)  
feature (897) 34  
linear mode 101  
initiating (897) 39  
lines  
overview 210  
BRI and PRI line types 279  
Caller ID set  
media bay modules  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
300 Index  
availability by regions 255  
line buttons (*81) 34  
lines 189  
members  
telephones See also automatic telephone relocation  
moving, Hunt group 104  
75  
memory button  
music  
activate programming (*3) 34  
autodial 221  
program defaults 149  
programming at the telephone 222  
cancel (#86) 33  
on hold 74  
playing (86) 39  
turn on (86) 33  
message  
mute  
overview 214  
reply message (65) 37  
button 164  
key 161  
message indicator  
analog 63  
Mute key 170  
ATA 63  
MWI (message waiting indicator) 161, 166  
voice message set on telephone 47  
message reply enhancement  
allow/disallow 74  
N
name  
analog telephones 74  
message waiting  
cancel #65 37  
first display 52  
hunt groups 100  
Message waiting indicator 170  
name and number blocking  
cancel (#819) 35  
message waiting indicator  
message overview 215  
initiating (819) 35  
messages  
Navigation keys 170  
navigation keys 160, 165  
network callback timer 77  
night schedule 31  
cancel code (#1) 37  
cancel send (#1) 34  
direct-dial  
telephones (F1) 74  
express messaging into voice mail (980) 39  
message reply enhancement 74  
overview 215  
send (1) 34  
send message code (1) 37  
view (65) 34  
no answer  
autologging 57  
no autologging 57  
number  
first display 52  
messages key 165  
O
messaging, express (980) 34  
OLI number  
private 45  
public 45  
model  
user preferences 60  
modem  
On hold. See also hold 74  
ATA Dvc 63  
one button dialing see Autodial 221  
monitoring  
ONN  
answer DNs 196  
other telephones, answer DNS 49  
transferred calls 207  
blocking  
initiate at telephone (819) 39  
canceling (#819) 35  
initiating (819) 35  
monitoring mode  
silent monitor 81  
operator, voice mail (981) 39  
moving  
overflow  
Hunt group members 104  
IP telephones, keep DN alive 64  
answer key settings 76  
hunt groups 101  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
301  
overflow routing  
call routing 32  
routing service 32  
overview 228  
telephone programming 51  
user speed dial 61  
overrides  
prime telephone  
restrictions at telephone (68) 37  
delayed ring transfer 74  
priority call  
P
page  
(69) 35, 37  
allow/disallow 54  
hunt groups 230  
overview 214  
auto hold for incoming page 54  
combined (63) 35  
equipment 215  
external (62) 35  
external equipment 215  
initiate (60) 35  
internal (61) 35  
programming 54  
speaker (62) 37  
speaker and zone (63) 37  
timeout timer 77  
tone 73  
Privacy  
(83) 35, 39  
overview 198  
program buttons, default assignment 149  
Programmable line/feature keys 169  
programming system features  
System Speed Dial 222  
programming telephones  
Call Pickup 194  
zone  
Protect level, intrusion controls 54  
assigning 53  
PVQM (Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring) 137  
hunt groups 230  
initiating (61) 37  
Q
queue  
park mode, retrieval code setting 75  
park timeout delay 77  
hunt groups 101  
request (909) 33  
time-out 101  
parked call  
park mode setting 75  
partial, set lock 65  
queuing calls, initiating (801) 38  
password  
R
hot desking (*999) 145  
reallocating log space 210  
Pause  
external call feature 224  
receiver volume 75  
in a sequence of numbers See Wait for Dial Tone  
224  
insert into dialing sequence (78) 35, 38  
user programming 189  
receiving calls  
SWCA overview 207  
pickup directed, allow 75  
redial  
pickup group  
last number (5) 37  
saved number (67) 35, 37  
assigning 53  
group pickup (76) 195  
redirect  
playing music through telephone (86) 39  
pre-dial 56, 188  
line, initiating redirection (84) 39  
redirect ring  
allow/disallow 55  
PRI  
line types 279  
redirection loops, avoiding 128  
primary  
regions  
language (*501) 34  
caller ID 259  
ISDN line services support 278  
modules 255  
system defaults 259  
prime line  
external autodial 61  
hotline 58  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
302 Index  
regulatory information 2  
related publications 19  
Release key 164  
turning off (#871) 36  
turning on (871) 36  
Room condition  
HS admin set (878) 35  
room set (876) 35  
relocating  
CAP module 93  
KIM 93  
Room occupancy  
HS admin set (879) 35  
relocating telephones 75  
rotary mode 101  
reminder, held line 74  
routing  
reply message (65) 37  
services 32  
reporting alarm codes 247  
Routing services  
restriction schedules, telephones 66  
restriction service, changing at telephone (872) 39  
turning off (#873) 36  
turning on (873) 36  
Restriction services  
turning off (#872) 36  
turning on (872) 36  
routing services  
turning on (873) 39  
routing table  
restrictions  
external autodial 61  
hotline 58  
user speed dial 61  
overriding at telephone (68) 37  
telephone record 65  
retrieval code, park mode 75  
Run/Stop code (*9) 35  
ring again  
S
activate (2) 35, 37  
cancel (#2) 35  
hunt groups 230  
overview 214  
Saved Number Redial (67) 35, 37  
schedules  
control telephone 225  
ringing services 95  
routing service, overflow 32  
ring groups  
extra dial set 32  
services 96  
send message code (1) 37  
trunk answer 96  
service mode status (870) 39  
ring only, telephone line assignment 47  
ring transfer, delayed 74  
service schedules  
control telephone 225  
Ring Type  
services  
changing (*6) 35  
user preferences 57  
changing restrictions at telephone (872) 39  
changing ringing at telephone (871) 39  
changing routing at telephone (873) 39  
extra dial set 32  
programming auxiliary ringer 98  
programming ring groups 98  
Restriction services (872, on/#872, off) 36  
ringing 95  
ring volume 190  
Ring Volume (*80) 35  
ringing  
call (807) 35  
Directed Pickup 194  
signal call at telephone (807) 38  
trunk answer 195  
Ringing services (871, on/#871, off) 36  
Routing services (873, on/#873, off) 36  
Schedule 1, night 31  
ringing services  
auxiliary ringer 98  
changing at telephone (871) 39  
programming 95  
ring group 98  
schedule 2, evening 31  
schedule 3, lunch 31  
schedule 4 31  
schedule 5 31  
ring groups 96  
schedule 6 31  
trunk answer 32  
service mode status at telephone (870) 39  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
303  
trunk answer 195  
trunk answer, ringing services 32  
view active services (870) 36  
user programming 61  
standard dial 56, 188  
static time (806) 35  
Services key 165  
status  
services list, IP telephones (900) 34  
service mode on telephone (870) 39  
set lock  
Status area 173  
dialing restrictions 65  
supervision  
set relocation 75  
short tones 55  
GASM disconnect supervision 63  
SWCA  
signal  
auto hold control 54  
autohold 201  
call (807), see also Ringing call 35  
link 224  
pause 224  
button codes (*520 to *535) 38  
conference calls 253  
memory buttons 222  
memory codes (*520 to *535) 35  
overview 207  
run/stop 224  
signal call, ringing at telephone (807) 38  
silent monitor  
transferring calls 253  
FEATURE *550 81  
monitoring mode 81  
programming overview 227  
SM password 81  
SM sets 81  
SWCA (System-Wide Call Appearance)  
associate SWCA (System-Wide Call Appearance)  
key to call 78  
include I/C calls when auto associating 78  
include I/C calls when invoking by Hold 79  
invoke SWCA parking by hold 79  
SM supervision 55  
skillset  
Symbols 18  
status, CC (909) 39  
system  
SM  
speed dialing 222  
password  
silent monitor 81  
sets  
system defaults, by region 259  
System DNs  
silent monitor 81  
copying settings 69  
SM supervision 55  
system programming  
user speed dials 61  
Soft keys 165, 169  
>> 165  
T
T7208  
South America, supported languages 258  
Speaker key 160  
button defaults 153  
special features  
T7316E  
hospitality 227  
hunt groups 230  
silent monitor 227  
button defaults 150  
T7406  
button defaults 155  
special telephones  
control telephone 225  
direct dial telephone 229  
hotline 225  
target line  
external call, DND 198  
target lines  
prime line 228  
appearances 47  
speed dial  
Telephon, ATA Dvc setting 63  
activate (0) 35  
telephone  
activate feature (0) 37  
add/change (*4) 35  
force auto-spd dial over ic/conf 74  
log calls automatically 130  
test display (805) 35  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
304 Index  
telephone programming  
alarm telephone 75  
allow  
pickup group 53  
prime line 51  
priority call, allow/disallow 54  
Private OLI number 45  
Public OLI number 45  
receive short tones 55  
redirect ring 55  
last number (redial) 65  
redirect 55  
allow saved number (redial) 65  
allow/disallow direct-dial 53  
answer DNs 49  
relocating 75  
Associate SWCA key to call 78  
ATA answer timer 63  
ATA Dvc 63  
restriction scheduling 66  
restrictions 65  
ring type 57  
ATA tones 63  
set lock 65  
ATA use 63  
ATA, answer timer 63  
ATA, use 63  
Auto called ID 52  
auto hold 54  
telephone restrictions 66  
transfer callback timeout timer 77  
user preferences 56  
user programming access 65  
user speed dialing 61  
auxiliary ringer 57  
button features list 36  
button programming 58, 149  
call forward on busy 46  
call forward, delay timer 46  
call forward, no answer 46  
call log options 57  
camp timeout timer 77  
Capabilities 50, 52  
contrast 57  
telephone restrictions, scheduling 66  
telephones 247  
call log display prompts 245  
caller ID for target and analog CLID lines 47  
common display prompts 233  
PRI line note 126  
viewing active service prompts 244  
voice message set 47  
template, button assignments 150  
control sets 51  
time  
dialing options 56  
distinct ring in use 57  
DND on busy 54  
current (803) 35  
display current time (803) 38  
static (806) 35  
external autodial button 61  
feature 60  
first display 52  
GASM disconnect supervision 63  
handsfree 53  
handsfree answerback 54  
hotline 57  
Include I/C calls when auto associating 78  
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold 79  
intercom keys 51  
time savers  
autodial 221  
Speed Dial 221  
time zones, by country 257  
timeout  
camp timeout timers 77  
page timeout timer 77  
park timeout timer 77  
transfer callback timer 77  
internal autodial 60  
intrusion controls 54  
Invoke SWCA parking by Hold 79  
keep DN alive 64  
timers  
camp timeout 77  
Host delay 77  
hunt delay 101  
language 56  
link timer 77  
hunt group queue time-out 101  
link 77  
message indicator 63  
page timeout timer 77  
page zone 53  
network callback 77  
page timeout 77  
park timeout 77  
transfer callback timeout 77  
paging 54  
park timeout 77  
tone  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
305  
long, at telephone (808) 38  
message indicator 63  
call duration 209  
logit 212  
tracking  
V
MCID 210  
view call log (812) 38  
tracking incoming calls, call log 210  
trademarks 2  
viewing  
active services (870) 36  
transfer  
viewing active service, prompts 244  
Viking, 7406 telephone defaults 155  
activate (70) 35  
Callback 207  
callback timeout 77  
calls 202  
cancel (#70) 35  
voice call  
activate (66) 36  
deny (88) 36  
initiate (3) 37  
deny at telephone (88) 39  
deny, cancel (#88) 36  
hunt groups 230  
initiating call (66) 37  
initiating at telephone (70) 37  
priority call (69) 37  
ring delay 74  
SWCA calls 253  
SWCA overview 207  
to voice mailbox (986) 35  
via hold, hunt groups 230  
voice mail to mail box (986) 40  
voice mail  
call forward 205  
call forward to (984) 39  
display DN (985) 34, 40  
interrupt (987) 36, 40  
intrusion controls 200  
login (981) 36, 39  
transfer See also Call Transfer  
troubleshooting  
operator settings (982) 36  
set up operator (981) 39  
transfer to mailbox (986) 40  
eCAP restore issue 123  
trunk answer  
activating (800) 36, 195  
at telephone (800) 38  
Directed Pickup 194  
ring groups 96  
voice message  
programming telephones 47  
volume  
ringing services 32  
handset volume 75  
Volume control 169  
U
Volume control bar 160, 169  
Volume control buttons 164  
volume of calls, call log 130  
unanswered by me, autologging 57  
unanswered calls  
prime telephone 228  
user access, set lock 65  
W
User preferences  
Wait for dial tone (804) 36, 38  
configuring CAP/KIM buttons 93  
wait for dial tone, external call feature 224  
Welcome 23  
user preferences  
button features list 36  
programming 56  
user programming  
contrast 187  
language 188  
moving lines 189  
receiver volume 189  
ring volume 190  
user speed dials, programming 61  
using features 212  
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
306 Index  
N0060600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Grinder 62613 User Manual
MTD Snow Blower Series 140 through E173 User Manual
Niles Audio Speaker PSW800 User Manual
Nilfisk ALTO Vacuum Cleaner Nilfisk GD 2000 User Manual
Nokia Bluetooth Headset BH 202 User Manual
Olympus Camera Accessories PT 036 User Manual
Oracle Audio Technologies Server E10898 02 User Manual
Oregon Scientific Scale GR101 User Manual
OWI Stereo Amplifier AMP1SGB User Manual
Panasonic Vacuum Cleaner MC UG504 User Manual